UC-NRLF 
 
 $B 553 753 
 
 
^ 
 
 v 
 
 LIBRARY 
 
 OF THE 
 
 University of California. 
 
 Class 
 
s 
 
 LABORATORY MANUAL OF PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY 
 

 THE MACMILLAN COMPANY 
 
 NEW YORK • BOSTON • CHICAGO 
 ATLANTA • SAN FRANCISCO 
 
 MACMILLAN & CO., Limited 
 
 LONDON • BOMBAY • CALCUTTA 
 MELBOURNE 
 
 THE MACMILLAN CO. OF CANADA, Ltd. 
 
 TORONTO 
 
 ( 
 
A LABORATORY MANUAL 
 
 OF 
 
 PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY 
 
 BY 
 
 PROFESSOR R. S. TARR and O. D. VON ENGELN 
 
 OF THE DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY 
 AT CORNELL UNIVERSITY 
 
 FOR USE IN CONNECTION WITH A GENERAL COURSE IN 
 
 PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY IN HIGH AND SECONDARY 
 
 SCHOOLS AND IN COLLEGES 
 
 OF THE 
 
 UNIVERSITY 
 
 OF 
 
 Nefo fgotfe 
 THE MACMILLAN COMPANY 
 
 .1910 
 
 All rights reserved 
 
Copyright, 1910, 
 By THE MACMILLAN COMPANY. 
 
 Set up and electrotyped. Published March, 1910. 
 
 Nortoooo $resa 
 
 J. S. Cushing Co. — Berwick & Smith Co. 
 
 Norwood, Mass., U.S.A. 
 
 ^1> 
 
 G 
 <3 
 
PREFACE 
 
 The subject of physical geography, above all others, leads to an appreciation by the pupil 
 of the natural world in which he lives, and an introductory course in physical geography 
 should include specifically a training in observation and deduction. 
 
 In the planning and writing of this manual these fundamental concepts of the necessity 
 of making the outlines at once practical and usable for the teacher with only a limited 
 laboratory equipment, and at the same time offering to the pupil this training in observation 
 and deduction — in fact, compelling it — have been constantly kept in mind, and it will be 
 found that there is a specific purpose for each exercise and that the groups form coherent 
 wholes. It is the belief of the authors, moreover, that the exercises cover the whole subject 
 adequately, and that the order in which they are arranged will be found the best for present- 
 ing the subject. On both these points some teachers, for specific reasons, may take issue. 
 This, however, implies no criticism, either on the manual as arranged or on the teacher; 
 for, on the one hand, the loose-leaf construction of the manual makes it a very simple matter 
 for the teacher to change the order or introduce other work ; while on the other hand, the 
 authors feel that teachers who are progressive, capable, and enthusiastic over the subject 
 should be given the greatest latitude in carrying out their own ideas. The laboratory study 
 of physical geography has an intense human interest and affords the best possible opportunity 
 for the infusion of a strong teaching personality. 
 
 A number of novel ideas and methods have been incorporated in this manual, but these 
 new features are not to be regarded as experiments. The senior author has had over fifteen 
 years' experience and the junior author four in the laboratory teaching of physical geography, 
 and the make-up of this manual incorporates plans that have been successfully used with 
 classes after repeated changes and modifications to secure the best possible results. 
 
 The feature which will first attract attention is the leaving of space after each question 
 for the student to write the answer. This serves a double purpose. It insures the student's 
 following the argument of the outline and the appreciation of every point by personal obser- 
 vation and deduction. The work thus becomes distinctly laboratory work and not essay 
 writing under the delusion that laboratory work is being done. This latter condition is the 
 greatest fault that the authors have found in most of the laboratory note-books, from various 
 schools throughout the country, which have come under their inspection. In the second 
 place this plan very materially lightens the labor of the overworked science teacher in 
 inspecting the note-books of the students. There is a place for every answer and every 
 answer should be in its place. Any incompleteness is readily detected, as is also the correct- 
 ness of the student's interpretations. Furthermore, the time of the student is conserved for 
 the actual observations, inasmuch as there is no need for the laborious rewriting of questions 
 in order to make the disconnected answers coherent. There is, however, sufficient space 
 allowed after every exercise to permit of the insertion of other material presented by the 
 teacher; accordingly, the exercises may vary considerably in different localities to insure 
 a fuller understanding of local conditions. 
 
 Another feature which we feel sure will meet with general approval is the insertion of 
 
 201630 
 
all maps, figures, diagrams, and tables at the exact place where they are needed. The con- 
 venience of this plan will make its own appeal, and needs no further amplification here. ^~ 
 
 The pedagogical departure in which this manual differs most markedly from those now 
 in use, and which is an altogether novel feature of these outlines, is the method of presenting 
 the physiography of the lands. In the past, in the authors' own experience and as related 
 by other teachers, the map work on which this phase of the subject is necessarily based has 
 been most distasteful and irksome to the student. This, we believe, is due to two causes : 
 
 (1) the incoherent manner in which the various topics have customarily been treated; and 
 
 (2) the fact that these topics have never been tied on to any geography of which the student 
 had a previous knowledge. To illustrate what is meant, take the subject of the development 
 of river valleys. In the first place the student was taught that Niagara River had a young 
 valley, and he studied its characteristics. The Mississippi, perhaps, was next studied as an 
 old valley. Then there was a jump to the study of a volcanic cone, Mt. Shasta. Nowhere 
 any logical development of the body of the subject-matter, nor any relation between succeed- 
 ing exercises. 
 
 This difficulty we believe we have successfully solved. In this manual young rivers are 
 studied in connection with young plains, old rivers on old plains, and plains in turn are con- 
 sidered in successive stages in their cycle of development from young to old. The basis of 
 the whole study is a series of carefully selected United States Geological Survey topographic 
 maps, and the position of these areas the student accurately locates on a United States map, 
 on which, also, he plots that physiographic division of the country which has conditions simi- 
 lar to those shown in detail on the topographic map he is studying. 
 
 The results in our own classes have been very gratifying. The students pursue the work 
 with keen interest ; they gain a very clear notion of the physical geography phenomena which 
 the maps illustrate; moreover, they associate the typical conditions of the topographic maps 
 with distinct areas and regions of the United States and thus gain a clear comprehension 
 of the varied topographic features of their own country and of their extent and significance. 
 This supplies the element of human interest which has been so lacking in elementary physical 
 geography study in the past; and it is largely to this fact that the eager interest of the 
 students in the above plan of study may best be ascribed. 
 
 The sections dealing with mathematical geography and tidal phenomena have been made 
 very simple. These are complex subjects at best, and it is the belief of the authors that they 
 are of a distinctly minor importance in a course in elementary physical geography. 
 
 Emphasis should be placed on the study of the processes of erosion, transportation, and 
 deposition as made possible by the use of the tank and land model, or some modification of it. 
 Such work is of the greatest value in enabling the students to get a clear, clean-cut concept 
 of these processes and their results ; and it enables them to proceed intelligently with the 
 study of the topographic forms shown on relief maps. 
 
 A few type excursions are included, four for the fall and three for the spring. It is, of 
 course, not possible to write excursion outlines in detail that are suitable for widely different 
 localities ; hence these excursions are generalized. It is the hope and belief of the authors 
 that they will be found useful in many schools ; but it is confidently expected that for some 
 or all of these many teachers will substitute specific outlines adapted to the opportunities 
 of the locality. 
 
 It is our belief that if a multitude of references are given, none will be used. There- 
 fore we have confined ourselves in the outlines to references to Tarr's "New Physical 
 Geography." Here may be added the titles of several publications*which the teacher will find 
 valuable for reference : Professional Paper # 60, United States Geological Survey. List of the 
 Publications of the United States Geological Survey. These may be obtained, gratis, on 
 
 C 
 
 VI 
 
application to the Director of the United States Geological Survey, Washington, D.C. In 
 
 Sthe list of publications the teacher will find what has been published on the home locality, 
 and should send for such papers as are available. Other valuable helps are : — 
 
 Johnson, Mathematical G-eography, American Book Co. 
 
 Pirsson, Rocks and Rock Minerals, Wiley & Sons. 
 
 Davis, Elementary Meteorology, Ginn & Co. 
 
 Ward, Practical Exercises in Elementary Meteorology, Ginn & Co. 
 
 Other text-books of physical geography. 
 
 Many valuable papers on methods in physical geography are printed in the Journal of 
 Geography (R. E. Dodge, Teachers College, Columbia University, New York City), a monthly 
 magazine "Devoted to the Interests of Teachers of Geography." Price, $1.00 a year. 
 
 The authors will welcome any suggestions teachers may make, and, where practicable, 
 insert them in future editions. 
 
 Ithaca, June 10, 1909. 
 
 Vll 
 
c 
 
* 
 
 # 
 
 SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS 
 
 A teacher's manual for use in connection with these outlines for laboratory and excur- 
 sion work is in preparation and will be issued shortly. In it will be found particular 
 suggestions in regard to each exercise, together with a list of references for supplementary 
 reading and hints on the use of lantern slides, models, and other material which may be 
 available in connection with these outlines. 
 
 In the following paragraphs are given a description and suggestions for the use of the 
 apparatus needed in Exercises XXII, XXIII, and XXVI. These are inserted because this 
 method of presentation of the subject is new, and most teachers will be unfamiliar with the 
 apparatus used. 
 
 EXERCISES XXII AND XXIII 
 
 The Construction and Understanding of Contour Maps 
 
 On a thorough understanding and appreciation of the significance of contour lines depends 
 the value of all the pupil's later study of topographic conditions as expressed by maps on 
 which they are used. The simplest method of teaching the meaning of contour maps, where 
 there are no laboratory facilities, is for the teacher to draw on the blackboard an outline 
 of a land surface and on it write in figures indicating elevations of different points and having 
 the pupils copy this and connect points of equal elevation with contour lines. This and 
 similar methods we have found very unsatisfactory. The apparatus and method advised 
 and outlined in this manual are those used with much success at Cornell University, where 
 they solved this problem of teaching contour maps after various other methods had been tried 
 with indifferent results. The apparatus is subject to several modifications. Where space 
 and funds are available, it will be found well worth while to install a large tank with 
 a crank-lifted platform as described below. This apparatus can also be used for study of 
 erosion and depositional processes. (See following pages devoted to such exercises.) If the 
 dimensions given are too large, they can readily be scaled down to meet the space conditions 
 of the laboratory where the apparatus is to be installed. The working drawings will make 
 the construction of the apparatus feasible in any localit}^ or the Geography Supply Bureau, 
 Ithaca, New York, will quote prices on duplications of various sizes. 
 
 Description of Large Tank and Screw-crank Platform 
 
 A large square wooden tank, made water tight, eight feet on the side and sixteen inches 
 deep. This tank is used to hold a body of standing water whose level may be adjusted, to 
 suit the requirements of the exercise, by means of a series of holes (bored in the side) fitted 
 with removable plugs. 
 
 A solidly built square platform five feet six inches on the side. This is intended to hold 
 the sand, clay, or other materials of which a land form is to be molded. 
 
 In the four corners of this platform threaded iron collars are inserted, and into these are 
 screwed heavy iron cranks which serve at once to support the platform and raise and lower it. 
 The threads on the cranks and in the collars are coarse, some ten or twelve turns to the inch. 
 The ends of the cranks are pivoted in loosely fitting iron sockets screwed fast to the bottom 
 of the outer tank. 
 
 ix 
 
MAKING READY FOE THE EXERCISE 
 
 When this apparatus is set up, the whole platform, with its incumbent model, can be S~ 
 
 rapidly raised and lowered at will, by turning the cranks simultaneously. 
 
 The materials used in building up the model are sand and clay, with enough plaster 
 of paris admixed (a very small quantity serves this purpose) to give the forms sufficient 
 firmness to stand up without slumping when immersed in water for some time. Just before 
 the beginning of the exercise the outer tank is filled with water, the water level being adjusted 
 by means of the plugs on the one side, and the platform is lifted by means of the cranks until 
 the water surface coincides with the level of the lowest parts of the land surface. 
 
 The drawing shows the apparatus adjusted with land form modeled ready for the class 
 to begin work. The square outline of the map to be constructed will then be expressed 
 by the square outline of the platform top. Working drawings of the apparatus are given 
 in the accompanying drawing. 
 
 Conduction of Exercise 
 
 To conduct the contour mapping exercise proceed as follows : After a suitable scale for 
 the map has been adopted, outline of the model sketched, and its salient points located, the 
 pupils have made a map on which the or sea-level contour is expressed by the outline 
 of the land form. Then a contour interval is adopted. (A one-inch interval will be found 
 practicable for this size model.) Next, with a pupil to operate each crank, lower the model 
 through the vertical distance of the contour interval. Be sure that the outflow of the tank 
 is sufficiently large to allow the water displaced to escape rapidly. Then the class proceeds 
 with the sketching of the first contour. This procedure is repeated as many times as neces- 
 sary to complete the map. 
 
 Where the installation of the large screw-tank apparatus is not feasible the following 
 modification may be used. This serves fairly well with small classes. 
 
 Instead of the platform with screw cranks and land form modeled of clay and sand a much 
 smaller plaster of paris model is used. This is a model after an ideal land form which the 
 United States Geological Survey uses in describing contour maps. (See one of the United 
 States Geological Survey Folios.) In connection with it a small tank of water is used, filled 
 to the brim. In this tank are piled a number of waterproof fiber boards of uniform thickness 
 and heavier than water. The plaster model is placed on this pile of fiber boards and the 
 water level adjusted to the edge of the modeled land area. Successive contour lines are 
 located by removing successive sheets of the fiber board. Otherwise the procedure is 
 the same. This equipment is also simple of construction, but if preferred, can be obtained 
 through the Geography Supply Bureau of Ithaca, New York. 
 
 EXERCISE XXVI 
 
 If the tank and land model are not available, a sand table or sink of sufficient dimensions 
 can be arranged to carry out this experiment. 
 
 In building up the land form use molder's sand and powdered clay in alternate layers. 
 Have the clay layers quite thin, one half inch on the average. Build the model so that it has 
 variety in topography, but give it the general surface of a plain with a somewhat steep slope 
 toward the front. It will be well to incline the platform. If the clay layers are not sufficiently 
 hard to cause waterfalls, a little plaster of paris may be added. To get good deltas the water 
 at the edge of the land form must not be too deep, and must remain at a uniform level. 
 The pupils should read through the whole exercise before the experiment is begun so that ( 
 
 they will be on the alert for the various phenomena. (For further details see article by Tarr 
 and von Engeln, in Journal of Geography, Vol. VII, 1908, pp. 73-85.) 
 

 * Q 5 
 
 
 5g£ 
 
 en *~ £. 
 ^ Q. O 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Z D * H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 to-- N 1- lf> 5 $■■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 T 
 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 00 
 
 — 
 
 \ 
 
 >» 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 ~m 
 
 O 
 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 z 
 
 -■- 
 
 <C3 
 crz> 
 
 / 
 
 \ 
 -> 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ;' 
 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 ■■ 
 
 Ol 
 
 
 ._'. 
 
 ■ •_' _ 
 
 _ „_ 
 
 ,., ,.^._ h-(W , 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 qui 
 
 
 Q 
 
 > 
 
 OZ 
 
 _i < 
 u. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 zo 
 <z 
 
 LUCE 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 111 
 
 H< 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 K 
 
 1 — 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CJ 
 
 <-l 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 (/) 
 
 mo 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CJJ 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 Z 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 0£ 
 
 
 
 h- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 u. 
 
 
 
 
 
 ~ii 
 
 ■3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ,.b-_..u 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Q. <rt 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 HI °o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Q ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 f 
 
 "\ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 '— ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 ~e»s 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 t 
 
 
 
 ■* 
 
 n 
 
 -I 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 XI 
 

 c 
 
• 
 
 COMPLETE LIST OF MATERIALS NECESSARY FOR USE IN 
 CONNECTION WITH THESE OUTLINES 
 
 (Some of these may be omitted according to the discretion of the teacher. ) 
 
 For Each Student 
 
 (a) Material which the student can bring to the classroom from home at different times. 
 Apple, knitting needle, string, pencil, ruler, plain paper, watch (where possible), small 
 
 bag or basket, steel knife or scratch point, window-glass fragment, drinking glass, piece of 
 candle, several small pieces of cheese cloth, several needles, coal fragment, baseball. 
 
 (b) Material which student may purchase. 
 
 Box of colored pencils (six different), cost 10 cents. Map of the United States 18x28 
 inches with contours, published by United States Geological Survey. Should be mounted 
 on cloth. Cost 10 cents. 
 
 (c) Material to be furnished by the school. 
 
 Small desk globe, simple compass dividers, several glass plates 4x4 inches approximately. 
 Copy of weather map, any date. Bar magnet. Several test tubes. Mineral and rock fragments, 
 unlabeled, following varieties : quartz crystal, orthoclase and plagioclase feldspar, hornblende, 
 halite, biotite and muscovite mica, calcite, gypsum, iron pyrites, dolomite, hematite, mag- 
 netite, granite, sandstone, fossiliferous limestone, schist, pumice, cellular lava, obsidian, 
 rhyolite, trachyte, syenite, gabbro, basalt, conglomerate, shale, gneiss, quartzite, slate, marble, 
 rock with lichen attached, rounded stream pebbles, residual soil from granite, residual clay 
 from limestone. 
 
 United States Geological Survey topographic sheets (should be mounted on cloth) as 
 follows : — 
 
 Montross, Maryland-Virginia. Lake Placid, New York. 
 
 Fargo, North Dakota-Minnesota. Saw Tooth, Idaho. 
 
 Donaldsonville, Louisiana. Chief Mountain, Montana. 
 
 Winterville, North Carolina. Spokane, Washington-Idaho. 
 
 Mt. Carrizo, Colorado. Granite Range, Nevada. 
 
 Syracuse, Kansas. Bright Angel, Arizona. 
 
 Kearney, Nebraska. Yosemite California Quadrangle. 
 
 Centerpoint, West Virginia. Map of Yosemite Valley, California. 
 
 Caldwell, Kansas. Shasta, California. 
 
 Whitewater, Wisconsin. Shasta Special, California. 
 
 Weedsport, New York. Cucamonga, California. 
 
 Niagara Falls and Vicinity, 1901, New York. San Francisco, California. 
 
 Cleveland and Vicinity, Ohio. Tamalpais, California. 
 
 St. Louis, Missouri. Boothbay, Maine. 
 
 Denver, Colorado. Barnegat, New Jersey. 
 
 Monterey, Virginia- West Virginia. Port Orford, Oregon. 
 
 Delaware Water Gap, Pennsylvania-New Jersey. Van Horn, Texas. 
 
 Mt. Mitchell, North Carolina-Tennessee. Crater Lake Special, Oregon. 
 
 Farmville, Virginia. Map of Home Region, if published. 
 
 xiii 
 
For General Class Use 
 
 (a) Material of which the teacher may secure the rise without cost. 
 
 An egg, saucer, bottle, pebbles, shears, field soil from beneath sod, fruit jar, piece of 
 muslin, daily weather map. 
 
 (b) Material to be furnished by school. (Note. — Much of this material can probably be 
 borrowed from the physics and chemistry laboratories of the school.) 
 
 Several wall maps of different scale. 
 
 Wall map of the United States, showing railway lines. 
 
 Chart # 14 of the Mississippi River Commission. 
 
 Land model tank (see Suggestions to Teachers). 
 
 Several yardsticks. 
 
 Spray nozzle and rubber hose. 
 
 Several magnetic compasses. 
 
 Air pump. 
 
 Glass tube 35 inches long, closed at one end. 
 
 Bottle of mercury. 
 
 Funnel. 
 
 Mercury barometer. 
 
 Several thermometers. 
 
 Bottle of alcohol or ether. 
 
 Simple rain gauge. 
 
 Several sheets of wrapping paper. 
 
 Wooden rod. 
 
 Sheet of white cardboard. 
 
 Several hammers (geological, if possible). 
 
 Dilute hydrochloric acid. 
 
 Several glass stirring rods or dropping bottles. 
 
 Labeled hand specimens of the minerals and rocks listed on preceding page. 
 
 (c) Supplemental. Material which may be used if available. 
 Meteorological instruments. 
 
 Hand specimens of iron, gold, silver, copper, lead, and zinc ores. 
 Lantern slides for quizzes. 
 
 Note. — If teachers find difficulty in securing any of these materials, it is suggested that 
 they apply to the Geography Supply Bureau, Ithaca, New York. 
 
 Cross-section paper needed will be found at the end of the manual. 
 
 c 
 
 XIV 
 
INDEX 
 
 Exercise w. 
 Exercise w. 
 Exercise w. 
 Exercise W. 
 Exercise #_ 
 Exercise # 
 Exercise W. 
 Exercise W- 
 Exercise W- 
 Exercise #_ 
 Exercise W~ 
 Exercise #_ 
 Exercise W. 
 Exercise #_ 
 Exercise W. 
 Exercise w.. 
 Exercise W. 
 Exercise W- 
 Exercise #.. 
 Exercise ff . 
 Exercise w. 
 Exercise W. 
 Exercise $.. 
 Exercise W. 
 Exercise W. 
 
 XV 
 
( 
 
 e 
 
INDEX 
 
 § 
 
 Exercise #_. 
 Exercise #_. 
 Exercise #_. 
 Exercise #.. 
 Exercise #_. 
 Exercise #._ 
 Exercise #.. 
 Exercise #.. 
 Exercise #_ 
 Exercise F_. 
 Exercise #- 
 Exercise #_ 
 Exercise #.. 
 
 * 
 
 « Exercise #.. 
 
 Exercise #.. 
 
 Exercise #„. 
 
 Exercise #_. 
 
 Exercise #_ 
 
 Exercise #.. 
 
 Exercise ff. 
 I Exercise #.. 
 
 Exercise #._ 
 
 Exercise #.. 
 
 Exercise #. 
 wi/' Exercise #_ 
 
 xvn 
 
( 
 
THE EARTH AS A WHOLE 
 
 Materials. 
 Purpose. 
 
 A sphere 
 defined. 
 
 I.— SHAPE AND SIZE OF THE EARTH 
 
 For Each Student. — Desk globe. Apple. Knitting needle. String. Pencil. Ruler. 
 
 To gain an appreciation of the form of the earth and its dimensions. 
 
 Give a definition of a sphere in as few words as possible. 
 
 Name three objects that are spheres. 
 
 The earth 
 an oblate 
 spheroid. sphere ? 
 
 Is an apple a perfect sphere ? How do most apples differ from a true 
 
 What is the name given a spherical body that is flattened at the poles ? 
 
 Make a sketch to show how an oblate spheroid differs from a 
 
 true sphere. 
 
 %) 
 
 How much is the earth flattened at the poles? 
 
 Why are globes always made as true spheres, though the earth is an oblate spheroid ? 
 
 Meaning of What is meant by the diameter of a sphere? 
 
 diameter 
 and circum- 
 ference. 
 
 1 
 
Thrust the knitting needle through the center of the apple, and with a ruler measure the 
 diameter of the apple. What is meant by circumference ? 
 
 With the string and ruler measure the circumference of the apple. 
 How many times greater than the diameter is the circumference ? 
 
 .. The circumference of a sphere is always that much greater than the 
 
 diameter. Since the diameter of the earth is a little over 7900 miles, how many miles is 
 
 the circumference ? 
 
 Meaning of Thrust the knitting needle through the center of the apple from the stem end ; then, 
 
 tanJu r restin £ one end of the needle on the desk, turn the needle so that the apple turns with it. 
 equa or. The need i e ig tne axig on w j 1 j c j 1 t ^ e app j e ro t a t es . What terms would you apply to the two 
 
 ends of the axis ? What does this experiment 
 
 illustrate with regard to the earth ? 
 
 What is the circumference of the earth midway between the poles called ? 
 
 _ Mark the equator on the apple. Make a drawing of a sphere, 
 
 shading it so that it appears round. On it mark the equator and the poles. 
 
 CI 
 
J 
 
 II. — PROOFS THAT THE EARTH IS A SPHERE 
 
 Materials. For Each Student. — Desk globe. Pencil. 
 
 For General Class Use. — An egg. Saucer. Bottle. Pebbles. Book. 
 Purpose. To show, by simple proofs, that the earth has a spherical form. 
 
 By journeys What did people believe the shape of the earth to be when Columbus started on his first 
 
 around the 
 
 earth. voyage ? 
 
 What did he believe? 
 
 What expedition was the first to make the voyage completely around the earth and return to 
 
 its starting place? 
 
 Push your finger around the globe from east to west ; from north to south ; in other directions. 
 In each case, if you follow a straight course, do you come back to the point where you started ? 
 
 Would that be possible if the earth were flat ? This 
 
 proves that the earth is a curved body. But does it prove it to be a sphere ? 
 
 Could you do the same thing on a body shaped like an egg? It is a longer 
 
 distance around an egg in some directions than in others. Is this true of a sphere ? 
 
 Is it true of the globe ? 
 
 By means Examine your desk globe to see that every part of its surface is curved. Place it in the 
 
 of eclipses sunlight so that its shadow will fall on the floor. What is the outline of the shadow ? 
 of the 
 
 moon - Turn the globe in various positions. Does the 
 
 shadow change in form ? Try the same experiment with several objects, 
 
 such as a bottle, a pebble, a saucer, an egg. What is the result? 
 
 Does any other object than a sphere always cast a circular shadow? 
 
 3 
 
Sometimes the earth's shadow is cast on the moon, when the earth comes between the sun and 
 
 moon. This is called an eclipse. Have you ever seen an eclipse of the moon ? 
 
 Describe it. 
 
 The shadow of the earth is always round in such an eclipse. What does that prove? 
 
 By gradual Place an object on the flat surface of your desk. When your eye is above the level of the 
 disappear- 
 ance of d es k top, can you see this object from all points of view ? Is the same true 
 
 objects in 
 
 tance °^ an 0D J ec ^ placed on the curved surface of a globe? Stick a pin in the 
 
 globe and turn the globe. As it turns away from you the pin slowly disappears from view. 
 
 Which end of the pin disappears first? 
 
 Where are the most level places on the earth ? 
 
 What part of a ship at sea is first seen 
 
 as it comes toward you? Make a drawing to 
 
 show this. (See Fig. 6, Text-book.) Then make a drawing to show what would be the case 
 if the earth were flat. 
 
 Objects disappear on the curved earth at a regular rate, no matter in which direction one 
 looks. This rate is 8 inches the first mile, 32 inches the second mile, and so on. The rate is 
 
# 
 
 the square of the number of miles times 8 inches. How much will the disappearance be at 
 
 the third mile ? (3 x 3 = 9 x 8 = 72 inches.) How much at the fourth ? 
 
 , The fifth? 
 
 Would it be true that an object would disappear at a regular rate in all directions and in all 
 
 places on a cylinder ? On an egg? On any other than a 
 
 spherical body ? What then do you conclude in regard to the form of the 
 
 earth? 
 
 By position Heavenly bodies also change position at a regular rate when viewed from different points 
 of the on fjhg earth. At the equator the north star is on the northern horizon, no matter at what 
 part of the equator one stands. At the north pole it is overhead. Where would it be half- 
 way between pole and equator? Could this 
 
 be true if the earth were egg shaped? Or pear shaped? 
 
 f 
 
 Or cylinder shaped ? 
 
 Other 
 spheres 
 in the 
 heavens. 
 
 Name other spherical bodies in the heavens. 
 
 What would be the appearance of the earth if it could be 
 
 seen from the moon ? 
 
 Make a drawing to scale (below) to show the comparative size of the earth and moon. (Text-book, p. 1.) Of 
 the earth and sun. (Text-book, p. 3.) 
 
 What is an eclipse of the sun ? 
 
 How does this prove that the moon is a sphere ? 
 
o 
 
 cc 
 
III. — WORLD MAPS 
 
 Materials. For Each Student. — Pencil (sharp). Ruler. Small desk globe. Several sheets of blank paper. 
 
 For General Class Use. — Maps of different scale. Pair of shears. Several baseballs. Sheet 
 of wrapping paper. 
 
 Purpose. To teach the meaning of scale, and to show the difficulty of representing the curved earth's 
 
 surface on a flat map. 
 
 What is the greatest distance that you can see in any one direction in your locality ? 
 
 (Express in city blocks or miles.) , 
 
 If you wished to represent five miles, or 
 
 five city blocks, on a piece of paper the width of this note book, what would you need to do ? 
 
 Meaning 
 of scale. 
 
 1 
 
 As applied to maps, what is the term used to express this scheme ? 
 
 Draw below a distance of 6 miles expressed by a scale of f inch = 1 mile. 
 
 How must the scale of a map vary with the size of the area represented ? 
 
 If a map of an area 5 miles square, and one of an area 1000 miles square were both of the 
 same size, which would show more detail ? 
 
 Could a road 25 feet wide be 
 
 accurately located by double lines on a map drawn to the scale 1 inch = 1 mile ? (Make the 
 calculation on a separate sheet of paper and copy the calculations and your conclusion below.) 
 
Examine different maps, as directed by the teacher, and note in the space below the areas 
 they represent and what scales are used. 
 
 Name of Map 
 
 Scale Used 
 
 Area represented in Square Mii.es (to be deter- 
 mined by Use op the Scale) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Explain the significance of the fraction (such as ^^) used on maps in connection with 
 the scale. 
 
 Globes. What form would give the most accurate representation, in miniature, of the whole world ? 
 
 What are some of the disadvantages of a 
 
 globe map; for instance, for use in books? * 
 
 Plane 
 
 surface 
 
 maps. 
 
 Try to fit a sheet of paper over one half or more of your desk globe. What is the result? 
 
 Examine a baseball. How many parts are 
 
 there to its cover? What proportion of the ball's surface does each part of 
 
 the cover fit over? Draw an outline of one of these parts. 
 
Why was such a shape adopted for baseball covers ? 
 
 Cut a piece of paper of the same shape, 
 
 and large enough to use in covering one half of your desk globe. Apply it to your globe in 
 different positions. What parts of what continents can you cover in different positions? 
 
 What great objection to making world maps of this shape does this experiment disclose? 
 
 Examine Figs. 28, 444, and 515 in Text-book to see the shape of some of the maps used to 
 represent the earth on a flat surface. What is the result of your observations? 
 
o 
 
 G 
 
# 
 
 Materials. 
 
 IV. —MAP CONSTRUCTION 
 
 For Each Student. — Pencil. Ruler. Desk globe. Dividers. 
 For General Class Use. — Several wall maps. 
 
 Purpose. To gain an understanding of the essential features of a map, methods of map projection, and 
 
 their application. 
 
 Meaning of In ancient times the land of the world was thought to be longer in an east and west direc- 
 
 latitude tion than in the north and south direction. Figure 1 is a copy of an early map of the world, 
 and 
 
 longitude. as Revised by Ptolemy. In what years did he live ? 
 
 Fig. 1. — Ptolemy's Map of the World. 
 Latin was then the language of the Mediterranean region. What is the meaning of the Latin 
 
 word longus ? Of the Latin word lotus ? 
 
 Which lines on Ptolemy's map are used to mark off the long directions ? 
 
 Which lines to 
 
 mark off the width? 
 
 11 
 
Why were the lines running north and south called lines of longitude ? 
 
 called lines of latitude ? 
 
 .. Why were those running east and west 
 Where did Ptolemy start num- 
 
 bering the lines of latitude? 
 
 Latitude 
 and 
 
 longitude 
 on the 
 globe. 
 
 The lines of longitude? 
 
 What latitude would one have north of a zero point? 
 What latitude south of a zero point? 
 
 What is the zero line of latitude on your globe? 
 
 Do you know of any similar natural line which could be used for a zero line of longitude ? 
 
 Through what city does the zero line of longitude on your globe 
 
 pass? Might not Paris or Washington be used? 
 
 • Why, then, does the zero line for reckoning longitude often vary with the 
 
 country where the map is made ? 
 
 Consult several maps and state which line is most commonly used. 
 
 Where is Greenwich? 
 
 Trace several lines of latitude around the globe ? Why are these circles called " parallels 
 
 of latitude"? 
 
 Trace in the same manner several lines of longitude. Are they parallel? 
 
 At what two points do they meet? 
 
 The longitude lines are called meridians of longitude. 
 
 If you have studied geometry, prove that two straight lines can intersect at only one 
 point. 
 
 12 
 
After examining your globe again, will you agree that with the exception of the poles this 
 proof also applies to the intersection of the parallels of latitude and the meridians of longi- 
 tude? Bearing this in mind, can any one point 
 
 on the earth's surface (except the north and south poles) have more than one latitude and one 
 
 longitude? On your desk globe locate the city which has (nearly) 60° 
 
 North Latitude and 30° East Longitude from Greenwich. 
 
 What is the longitude of this city, starting from Washington as the prime meridian 0°? 
 
 Determine from your desk globe the latitude 
 
 and longitude (Greenwich meridian) of your home region. 
 
 My home, , is at 
 
 latitude and at longitude of Green- 
 wich. How can the exact location, north or south of the equator, of any point on the earth's 
 
 surface be stated? 
 
 Its distance east or west of any given meridian? 
 
 How many degrees are there in the circumference of a circle? 
 
 In a half circumference? : A quarter circumference? , 
 
 How many degrees of north latitude can there be? 
 
 East or west longitude? 
 
 Assuming that the earth's circumference is- 25,000 miles, what is the length, in miles, of a 
 
 degree of longitude at the equator? At the 
 
 poles? At 60° N. or S. latitude? (Use dividers 
 
 for measuring on the globe.) How do the distances 
 
 between meridians vary on your globe? 
 
 Plane Map makers have devised many schemes to overcome the difficulties of mapping a curved 
 
 surface surface on a plane surface. These schemes are called projections. Some of these are the 
 
 mapping. Orthographic, Stereograph ic, Globular, Gnomonic, Homolographic, Conic, Polyconic, Van der 
 
 Grinten, and Mercator's Cylindrical projections. (See Fig. 2.) How do some of these differ 
 
 in the manner of representing meridians and parallels of latitude? 
 
 13 
 
100 120 140 ISO 180 180 140 120 100 80 60 40 20 20 40 60 
 
 Mercator Projection 
 
 Van der Grlnten Projection 
 
 « a 
 
 Equatorial Stereographic Projection 
 
 Western Hemisphere 
 In Equatorial Globular Projection 
 
 Fib. 2. — Various Projections. 
 14 
 
Why are maps and charts of greater importance to sailors than to any other class of 
 people? 
 
 Kemembering that sailors have instruments for determining latitude and longitude, consider 
 and state your reasons in answering the following : Which is of more importance to sailors 
 — to have distances between points shown truly on a map, or to have directions between 
 
 • 
 
 points shown as straight lines? 
 
 (The Mercator projection was invented by a German whose name was Kramer. In Ger- 
 man this word means " retail merchant." The Latin for merchant is mercator, and thus the 
 projection got its name.) 
 
 The Mercator projection was designed to show all parallels and meridians as straight 
 lines at proportional distances ; hence, directions as straight lines. Thus the sailor has sim- 
 ply to draw upon the map a straight line from the point where he is to the point to which he 
 wishes to sail, in a straight course. He can then steer his ship according to the bearings thus 
 obtained. 
 
 15 
 
a 
 
 o 
 
Materials. 
 Purpose. 
 
 Construct- 
 ing a 
 map on 
 Mercator's 
 Projection. 
 
 V.— THE MERCATOR MAP 
 
 For Each Student. — Dividers. Sharp pencil. Ruler. Desk globe. 
 
 The construction of a Mercator map; and to get an appreciation of the distortion involved in 
 such a map. 
 
 Figure 3 is a beginning of a Mercator Cylindrical Projection. The circle represents a 
 north and south section of the globe. The diameter of the circle shows 180° of the equator as 
 a straight line, and this line is continued into the map diagram that adjoins the circle. From 
 the center of the circle angles are laid off for every 15° north of the equator. The line A-L, 
 representing the western edge of the map, is perpendicular to the equator line. The length of 
 the line parallel to A-L (that is, Bx), and extending from the end (B) of the first radius north 
 of the equator, gives the distance that the 15° parallel of latitude of the map is to be drawn 
 north of the equator line. (The 15° parallel, as drawn, is marked C-D on the diagram.) In 
 the same way the length of the line parallel again to A-L, and extending from the end of the 
 radius of 30° to the 15° radius, gives the distance that the parallel of 30° north latitude is to 
 be drawn above that of 15° north latitude. (This, the 30° line, is marked E-F.) Follow this 
 procedure and complete the drawing of the parallels for both north and south latitude up to 75°. 
 
 Draw the meridians of longitude at equal distances from each other, and the same dis- 
 tance apart as the first parallel of latitude is from the equator. Draw the 0°, or prime 
 meridian, through the circle printed on the map. 
 
 On your globe, with dividers and a ruler, measure the distance (in inches) between 15° of 
 
 longitude on the line of the equator. Do the 
 
 same along the line of the 60° parallel of north [or south] latitude. , 
 
 What is the ratio between these two distances? r. 
 
 On your map, as 
 
 drawn, measure the distance between the equator and 15° north latitude. 
 
 Again, on your map, measure the distance between 52° 30' north latitude and 67° 30' north 
 
 latitude (=15°). What is the ratio between these latter two distances? 
 
 From these observations complete the following sentence : On the Mercator projection map, 
 the distortion in latitude distances is in the same ratio as the 
 
 § 
 
 and directions are consequently represented as straight lines. 
 
 17 
 
a 
 
 a 
 
c 
 
 f 
 

 Plotting in The little circle printed on the map represents the location of Washington, D.C., and is 
 
 I the outline on the prime meridian as you have drawn your map. From your globe plot in the outlines of 
 pi North ^ e con tinents of North and South America. 
 America 
 and South 
 America. 
 
 Distortion Compare the outline of these continents on your globe and on the Mercator map you have 
 
 of the 
 
 Mercator constructed. Where and how does the Mercator projection distort areas? 
 
 Projection. 
 
 Why, then, is no scale of miles given (except at times along the equator) on a Mercator map ? 
 
 1 Examine the maps in Figure 2 of this Manual 
 
 and, by comparison with the globe, make observations as to their correctness in representing 
 
 direction and distance. 
 
 21 
 
Curvature 
 of earth 
 on small 
 areas. 
 
 Calculate and draw a line showing the curvature of the earth's surface over a distance of 
 5 miles, mapped on a scale of 1 inch = 1 mile. 
 
 Note. — To find the amount of curvature of the earth's surface for any given distance, use the following 
 rule : Square the number of miles representing the distance. Two thirds of the resulting number represents in 
 feet the departure from a straight line. 
 
 Calculation : — 
 
 Draw line here. 
 
 How does this result apply to the amount of appreciable areal distortion shown in maps of 
 small areas ? , 
 
 How does it compare to the amount of distortion on the world maps ? 
 
 22 
 
• UPRIGHT POST 
 
 \ 
 
 i \ 
 
 12 M. 
 SEPT. 26 * 
 
 \ 
 
 \ 
 
 \ 
 
 \ 
 
 \10 O'CLOCK" 
 *SEPT. 26 
 
 Fig. 4. — Diagram of Apparatus for establishing the Meridian by the Sun's Position. 
 
 23 
 
t 
 
Material. 
 
 Purpose. 
 
 Determina- 
 tion of 
 direction 
 by sun's 
 position 
 and use of 
 watch. 
 
 Method. 
 
 VI. — DETERMINATION OF DIRECTION AND ESTABLISHMENT OF MERIDIAN 
 
 For Each Student. — Watch (when possible). Ruler. Pencil. 
 
 For General Class Use. — Rod. Cardboard. 
 
 To study simple methods for determining the cardinal directions and for establishing a 
 meridian by the sun's position. 
 
 Since the sun apparently revolves around the earth from east to west, it must at some 
 time in its daily course he halfway between these two directions, and therefore where you 
 
 live be due (Add proper word.) At what time between sunrise and 
 
 sunset would the sun be in this position ? 
 
 With a watch in hand we can make use of the sun's position to determine approximately 
 the cardinal directions, i.e. south, north, east, and west. 
 
 Stand facing the sun ; hold your watch so that the hour hand points directly to the sun ; 
 then a line from the center of the dial, and equally dividing the distance between the hour 
 hand and the twelve o'clock figure, will point approximately south. 
 
 (To the Teacher. — Advise the students of the amount that standard time is slower or faster than sun time 
 for your locality, and how to apply the correction.) 
 
 Try this experiment at different hours of the day. Do the results coincide ? 
 
 When is 
 
 Establish- 
 ing a 
 meridian 
 by sun's 
 position. 
 
 there the greatest deviation? 
 
 Is there a deviation from day to day ? 
 
 Facing south, what direction is at your back ? To your right ? 
 
 To your left? 
 
 Erect a thin rod of wood, or metal, six inches or more high, exactly perpendicular to the 
 middle point of the long edge of a stiff piece of white cardboard. Put this cardboard on a 
 smooth table top, carefully leveled, and place the table before a south-facing window with the 
 edge of the cardboard which carries the rod toward the outside. Note the length and direction 
 of the shadow which the rod casts on the cardboard by marking on the board, as accurately as 
 possible, the length and direction when the shadow is shortest. Do this for several days. Set 
 down the data on Figure 4. Get these data, if possible, on or near Sept. 23 or March 21. 
 
 What directions are determined by the line of the sun's shortest shadow ? 
 
 25 
 
Suggested On a clear night locate the north star by means of the " Big Dipper," as shown in the diagram (Fig. 5). 
 
 home work How well does your determination of north by the sun's position agree with the north as determined by the 
 
 ■fnr 
 
 students position of the north star ? 
 
 NORTH STAR . 
 
 ** 
 
 
 / 
 
 * -*«• 
 
 Fig. 5. — Diagram to illustrate Method of locating North Star by Means of the "Big Djpper." 
 
 26 
 
9 
 
 A 
 
 3 
 
 .9 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 c3 
 
 Q 
 O 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 60 
 
 w rQ 
 
 a> CO 
 
 CD 
 
 o 
 
 -a II 
 
 i 
 
 oo 
 
 
 + 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 o 
 
 co 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 © 
 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 1 ■* 
 
 
 1 d 
 
 CN 
 
 T-l 
 
 
 + ^ 
 
 
 + rH' 
 CM 
 
 
 
 co 
 
 co 
 
 co 
 
 CO 
 
 co 
 
 
 CO 
 
 , © 
 
 © 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 ° 1 cm 
 
 1 eo 
 
 1 A 
 
 1 CO 1 
 
 t^ 
 
 
 + d 
 
 +^i 
 
 + rH' 
 
 + d 
 
 
 
 
 CM 
 
 CN 
 
 rH 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 CM 
 
 CN 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 co 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 , co 
 
 , © 
 
 co 
 
 ■ 
 
 o 1 d 
 
 1 eo 
 
 I>h 
 
 1 d 
 
 00 
 
 Id 
 
 + d 
 
 + ^ 
 
 + rH 
 
 id 
 
 
 
 «-H 
 
 <M 
 
 CM 
 
 rH 
 
 
 
 * — ' 
 
 CN 
 
 CN 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 CO 
 
 00 
 
 CO 
 
 . © 
 
 , o 
 
 co 
 
 oo 
 
 M 
 
 1 d 
 
 1 co' 
 
 l*H 
 
 1 d 
 
 co 
 
 loo 
 
 + oi 
 
 +^ 
 
 + rH 
 
 +co' 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 CM 
 
 CN 
 
 T-t 
 
 
 
 ^H 
 
 CN 
 
 CN 
 
 
 co 
 
 CO 
 
 O 
 
 
 co 
 
 . © 
 
 CO 
 
 CD 
 
 co 
 
 CO 
 
 0) 
 
 | ,_j 
 
 1 d 
 
 IrH 
 
 1 d 
 
 co' 
 
 Id 
 
 +d 
 
 + co' 
 
 + ri 
 
 + d 
 
 
 
 
 CM 
 
 <M 
 
 1—1 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 CM 
 
 CM 
 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 O 
 
 
 o 
 
 . o 
 
 , o 
 
 co 
 
 , O 
 
 , w 
 
 M 
 
 o 1 rH 
 
 1 d 
 
 1 rl 
 
 1 d 
 
 o> 
 
 Id 
 
 +d 
 
 + d 
 
 + rH 
 
 +d 
 
 
 
 
 (M 
 
 CM 
 
 rH 
 
 
 
 r^ 
 
 CM 
 
 CN 
 
 
 CD 
 
 o 
 
 co 
 
 oo 
 
 O 
 
 co 
 
 CD 
 
 , o 
 
 , o 
 
 co 
 
 C4 
 
 o 1 © 
 
 1 d 
 
 Id 
 
 1 d 
 
 d 
 
 Id 
 
 + rH' 
 
 +d 
 
 +_• 
 
 + d 
 
 
 
 T— 1 
 
 cm 
 
 CM 
 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 CN 
 
 CM 
 
 3 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 , eo 
 
 oo 
 
 CO 
 
 , © 
 
 CO 
 
 , © 
 
 © 
 
 00 
 
 o 1 © 
 
 
 Id 
 
 1 eo' 
 
 Oi 
 
 Id 
 
 + rH' 
 
 + o» 
 
 + d 
 
 +d 
 
 
 
 iH 
 
 CM 
 
 CM 
 
 
 
 
 iH 
 
 CN 
 
 CM 
 
 
 o 
 
 co 
 
 CO 
 
 co 
 
 co 
 
 , o 
 
 CO 
 
 co 
 
 , « 
 
 , 00 
 
 M 
 
 o + © 
 
 1 i-5 
 
 Id 
 
 1 d 
 
 d 
 
 Id 
 
 +d 
 
 +d 
 
 + © 
 
 + 00 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 cm 
 
 CM 
 
 rH 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 CM 
 
 CM 
 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 , oo 
 
 CD 
 
 
 . m 
 
 © 
 
 , 00 
 
 CO 
 
 M 
 
 o +© 
 
 
 Id 
 
 Id 
 
 OS 
 
 Id 
 
 +© 
 
 + d 
 
 +© 
 
 + O0 
 
 
 
 1-H 
 
 CN 
 
 CN 
 
 rH 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 CM 
 
 CM 
 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 © 
 
 00 
 
 O 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 , © 
 
 © 
 
 OO 
 
 <M 
 
 o + ^ 
 
 1 © 
 
 Id 
 
 1 d 
 
 d 
 
 Id 
 
 Id 
 
 + ,-: 
 
 + © 
 
 + d 
 
 
 
 
 CM 
 
 CM 
 
 CM 
 
 
 
 y-^ 
 
 CM 
 
 
 8 
 
 oo 
 
 CO 
 
 . © 
 
 CO 
 
 oo 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 00 
 
 , o 
 
 CO 
 
 o + rl 
 
 1 © 
 
 Id 
 
 1 d 
 
 d 
 
 
 Id 
 
 + ,H 
 
 +d 
 
 + C0 
 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 CM 
 
 CM 
 
 rH 
 
 
 rH 
 
 CM 
 
 
 
 . © 
 
 CD 
 
 co 
 
 00 
 
 00 
 
 00 
 
 CO 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 , N 
 
 t-< 
 
 + r-i 
 
 1 d 
 
 1 d 
 
 1 d 
 
 o 
 
 1 rH' 
 
 1 d 
 
 + r4 
 
 + d 
 
 +d 
 
 
 
 
 r-t 
 
 CM 
 
 CM 
 
 rH 
 
 
 rH 
 
 '— » 
 
 CM 
 
 00 
 
 rH 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 O 
 
 CO 
 
 co 
 
 o 
 
 oo 
 
 , © 
 
 CO 
 
 00 
 
 o + CN 
 
 1 d 
 
 Id 
 
 1 d 
 
 o 
 
 1 04 
 
 1 rH 
 
 + © 
 
 +d 
 
 +d 
 
 
 
 
 
 CM 
 
 CM 
 
 rH 
 
 
 T-* 
 
 T— 1 
 
 CN 
 
 
 oo 
 
 © 
 
 o 
 
 00 
 
 o 
 
 oo 
 
 CD 
 
 , 00 
 
 co 
 
 eo 
 
 
 ° + d 
 
 1 d 
 
 Id 
 
 1 co 
 
 r-l 
 
 Id 
 
 1 l-H* 
 
 + d 
 
 +© 
 
 +d 
 
 
 
 
 
 CM 
 
 CM 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 CM 
 
 
 CD 
 
 CO 
 
 co 
 
 00 
 
 © 
 
 . © 
 
 o 
 
 , O 
 
 , o 
 
 CO 
 
 rH 
 
 ° +CN 
 
 1 CO 
 
 Id 
 
 1 d 
 
 rH 
 
 Id 
 
 1 d 
 
 + d 
 
 +d 
 
 + d 
 
 
 
 
 y—* 
 
 CM 
 
 CM 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 r~i 
 
 CM 
 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 , CO 
 
 , °5 
 
 
 o 
 
 00 
 
 . © 
 
 , © 
 
 CO 
 
 rH 
 
 o +d 
 
 1 CO 
 
 Id 
 
 Id 
 
 ,_; 
 
 1 oo 
 
 Id 
 
 + d 
 
 + d 
 
 + d 
 
 
 
 
 T— 1 
 
 CM 
 
 CM 
 
 rH 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 CM 
 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 00 
 
 00 
 
 00 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 , co 
 
 <* 
 rH 
 
 o + C0 
 
 1 CO 
 
 Id 
 
 1 CO 
 
 7—< 
 
 1 d 
 
 Id 
 
 +d 
 
 +d 
 
 +d 
 
 
 
 
 *H 
 
 CM 
 
 CM 
 
 rH 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 CM 
 
 
 o 
 
 co 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 CD 
 
 o 
 
 . © 
 
 , °2 
 
 , co 
 
 rH 
 
 o + d 
 
 1 1— 
 
 Id 
 
 1 d 
 
 
 1 d 
 
 1 CO 
 
 +d 
 
 + d 
 
 + d 
 
 
 
 
 *h 
 
 CM 
 
 CM 
 
 rH 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 CN 
 
 
 co 
 
 co 
 
 . © 
 
 o 
 
 CD 
 
 , O 
 
 CD 
 
 , oo 
 
 © 
 
 O 
 
 
 o + d 
 
 1 t-^ 
 
 1 r- 
 
 1 co 
 
 
 u 
 
 1 CO 
 
 + d 
 
 + 00 
 
 + d 
 
 
 
 
 *— t 
 
 CM 
 
 CN 
 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 CM 
 
 
 CO 
 
 e 
 
 co 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 oo 
 
 , © 
 
 , o 
 
 . © 
 
 © 
 
 
 O + -r}i 
 
 1 t~ 
 
 1 r^ 
 
 1 d 
 
 1 d 
 
 l<4 
 
 u 
 
 +d 
 
 + r^ 
 
 + d 
 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 CM 
 
 CM 
 
 rH 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 CM 
 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 . © 
 
 co 
 
 , © 
 
 , "M 
 
 o 
 
 
 o + d 
 
 1 ©' 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 1 d 
 
 CN 
 
 u 
 
 U' 
 
 +.^ 
 
 + ^ 
 
 + d 
 
 
 
 
 1—1 
 
 CM 
 
 CM 
 
 rH 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 CM 
 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 . © 
 
 ■ © 
 
 00 
 
 O 
 
 , © 
 
 , 00 
 
 , w 
 
 o 
 
 <n 
 
 o + d 
 
 1 ©' 
 
 Id 
 
 Id 
 
 1 CM 
 
 1 id 
 
 u 
 
 + r~ 
 
 + .^ 
 
 + d 
 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 CM 
 
 CM 
 
 r—< 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 CM 
 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 co 
 
 CD 
 
 CO 
 
 00 
 
 , o 
 
 © 
 
 , o 
 
 . © 
 
 00 
 
 O + ©" 
 
 1 id 
 
 1 d 
 
 Id 
 
 d 
 
 1 id 
 
 Id 
 
 + r^ 
 
 +*: 
 
 + CN 
 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 CM 
 
 CM 
 
 y—* 
 
 
 
 i—i 
 
 CM 
 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 ■ © 
 
 CO 
 
 co 
 
 , © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 , © 
 
 t- 
 
 o i co 
 
 1 d 
 
 1 d 
 
 Id 
 
 CM 
 
 1 d 
 
 1 id 
 
 "r© 
 
 +d 
 
 + d 
 
 
 
 
 T— 1 
 
 CM 
 
 CM 
 
 ~H 
 
 
 
 r^ 
 
 CM 
 
 
 © 
 
 o 
 
 , O 
 
 oo 
 
 CD 
 
 , © 
 
 , o 
 
 CO 
 
 , W 
 
 , © 
 
 co 
 
 o + © 
 
 1 id 
 
 Id 
 
 1 d 
 
 d 
 
 1 d 
 
 1 d 
 
 "f"© 
 
 + d 
 
 + CN 
 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 CM 
 
 CM 
 
 7—* 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 CM 
 
 
 , o 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 00 
 
 CD 
 
 , o 
 
 eo 
 
 , o 
 
 o 
 
 co 
 
 IG> 
 
 c + ^ 
 
 1 -r)< 
 
 1 ud 
 
 1 e4 
 
 CM 
 
 1 d 
 
 Id 
 
 +d 
 
 "r© 
 
 + CN 
 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 CM 
 
 CM 
 
 y—* 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 CM 
 
 
 co 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 00 
 
 co 
 
 oo 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 © 
 
 , eo 
 
 <* 
 
 o 4-^ 
 
 1 -# 
 
 1 id 
 
 1 d 
 
 CM 
 
 1 d 
 
 1 © 
 
 +ld 
 
 +d 
 
 + ei 
 
 
 
 
 r— 
 
 CM 
 
 CM 
 
 rH 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 CM 
 
 
 o -J-*. 
 
 co 
 
 . © 
 
 , ©. 
 
 o 
 
 1 °. 
 
 , ©. 
 
 +?6 
 
 oo 
 + id 
 
 T^CM 
 
 
 1 oo 
 
 1 id 
 
 1 CN 
 
 oo 
 
 1 cn 
 
 1 t~ 
 
 
 
 
 *— 
 
 CM 
 
 CM 
 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 CM 
 
 
 o +x 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 , ©. 
 
 o 
 
 , © 
 
 CO 
 
 +:• 
 
 oo 
 + d 
 
 o 
 
 CM 
 
 I co 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 1 CN 
 
 00 
 
 1 i-: 
 
 1 I- 
 
 + oi 
 
 
 
 
 t-H 
 
 CM 
 
 CN 
 
 T-< 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 CM 
 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 CD 
 
 c 
 
 00 
 
 . © 
 
 , 00 
 
 , O 
 
 . o 
 
 rH 
 
 o +QC 
 
 i co' 
 
 1 3 
 
 1 rH 
 
 I d 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 1 r^ 
 
 +^' 
 
 + d 
 
 +d 
 
 
 
 
 i—* 
 
 CM 
 
 CM 
 
 rH 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 CM 
 
 S5 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 
 ! 
 
 a 
 
 M -s 
 
 u 
 
 5 
 
 3 
 
 .a 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 
 •) 
 
 ® a 
 
 CO 
 O 
 
 *■> 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 ,d 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 > 
 o 
 
 0) 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 p 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 •-5 
 
 E 
 
 rO 
 
 CO 
 
 E 
 
 a 
 
 <5 
 
 I* 
 
 CO 
 
 c 
 i-s 
 
 27 
 
VII. — DETERMINATION OF LATITUDE AND LONGITUDE 
 
 Material. For Each Student. — Desk globe. Pencil. Ruler. 
 
 For General Class Use. — Rod and cardboard apparatus used in preceding exercise. 
 Purpose. A study of methods by which latitude and longitude may be determined for any given place. 
 
 Determina- On Sept. 23 and March 21 the sun is vertical at the equator. If you were at the equator, 
 
 tion of the sun would then be directly over your head at noon. Where would it appear if you were 
 
 latitude 
 
 JLic. e „„A„ at either pole? 
 
 suns noon r 
 
 altitude. What is the angular distance, in degrees, from a point in the sky directly overhead to a point 
 
 on the horizon? What is the angular difference, 
 
 then, between the position of the sun on those two days to observers, one at the equator and 
 
 the other at one of the poles ? How are the 
 
 degrees of latitude numbered as one goes from the equator toward the pole? 
 
 . How do the number 
 
 of degrees of the sun's height above the horizon vary as one goes from the equator to the pole ? 
 
 Complete this sentence: The numbering of degrees of latitude grows 
 
 as one goes from the equator toward the pole ; and the altitude of the sun above the horizon 
 
 grows as one goes from the equator toward the pole. Therefore, if 
 
 one observes at any place the altitude of the sun in degrees, and subtracts that number from 
 
 90°, the result will be the number equal to the degree of of the place. 
 
 The sun's apparent course is north of the equator after March 21, increasing in altitude 
 by a certain amount every day (see table on preceding page) up to June 21. To get the latitude 
 on any day between these two dates one must add a correction (from the table) to the latitude 
 
 as determined by the above method. Why do we add the correction ? 
 
 What correction must be applied between Sept. 23 and Dec. 21, when the sun is decreasing in 
 
 altitude? 
 
 A Figure 6 is a diagram of the apparatus used in this exercise. 
 
 29 
 
B' 
 
 /C 
 
 /a 
 
 C B 
 
 Fig. 6. — Diagram to illustrate a Method of finding Latitude. 
 A-B, the length of the rod ; C'-B, the length of the noon shadow ; BCA, angle of the sun's altitude. 
 
 Reading To read the angle of the sun's altitude, as observed, we need first to draw to scale our read- 
 
 the angle ing (as secured in the preceding exercise) of the length of the shadow and the length of the 
 of the sun's r0( j 
 
 If you have studied geometry, prove that the angle B'AC is the angle of the latitude. 
 To obtain the exact latitude, a correction must be applied to this angle, as you have learned 
 above. 
 
 30 
 
or Th _ ■* 
 
Suggested 
 home work 
 for 
 students. 
 
 Next we need to use the protractor printed on the cardboard accompanying this exercise 
 (Fig. 7). This is simply a half circle whose circumference is marked off in degrees and half 
 degrees. Use the shears to cut it out carefully, as directed on the figure. Place the marked 
 center of the protractor accurately on the extremity of the line of the shadow (by means of a 
 pin stuck through the cardboard). Let the base line of the protractor coincide with the line 
 representing the shadow. Then read off the angle made by a line from the center of the pro- 
 tractor to the top of the line representing the height of the rod ; that is, the angle BCA. 
 
 The angle is degrees. 
 
 The correction is degrees. 
 
 The latitude as determined is degrees north latitude. 
 
 How does this compare with the latitude as mapped on your globe, or any other map of 
 
 your locality? 
 
 The angle of the altitude of the north star is equal to the latitude of the place where the observation of 
 the north star's position is made. The same reasoning that was applied to the position of the sun at the 
 equator and the poles applies also to the north star, except that the positions are reversed ; i.e. the north star 
 is in the zenith (directly overhead) at the poles and on the horizon at the equator. Therefore the altitude of 
 the north star gives the degree of latitude directly. Moreover, the north star does not change in position from 
 day to day as does the sun ; therefore, the observation can be made on any clear night and no corrections 
 need be applied. (It is not deemed worth while to bring in here the variation between culmination points.) 
 
 Fasten the protractor, by tacks, to a smooth board, as illustrated in Figure 8. From the center point 
 suspend a split shot by a thread for a plumb bob, as shown in Figure 8. 
 
 r -zs—- ■"■- -rrr 
 
 
 
 CENTER 
 
 ■*!► >■ 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 _,& TACK 
 
 
 
 TACK 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 *#/ 
 
 vy 
 
 
 
 V? 
 
 
 >0 
 
 TJ 
 
 
 s 
 
 BOARD 
 
 V 
 
 Fig. 8. — The Protractor used as a Quadrant Instrument. 
 
 Determina- We are now ready to make the reading. Go to some point where the horizon line is uninterrupted, 
 
 tion of the Point one end of the board (as indicated by the arrow) toward the north star, allowing the plumb bob to 
 
 latitude by swing freely. When you have pointed the board accurately at the north star, hold the thread of the plumb 
 
 observation bob firmly at the position to which it has swung. Now read the angle between the present position of the 
 
 tf the plumb bob and that which it had when the board was held horizontally. Make the observation a number of 
 
 WiOitb. star, times and set down the result as indicated on page 53. 
 
 31 
 
Reading No. 1. — Angle 
 
 Reading No. 2. — Angle 
 
 Reading No. 3. — Angle 
 
 Reading No. 4. — Angle ' 
 
 Average 
 
 How does this result compare in accuracy with that obtained by your sun observation ? 
 
 It is by application of these methods, with accurate instruments and refined corrections, that sailors and 
 explorers determine their latitude. Find out what a sextant is. 
 
 Determina- (Use your desk globe in finding answers to these questions.) How many degrees are 
 
 tion of 
 
 longitude, there in the circumference of a circle ? How many hours does it 
 
 take the sun to seemingly go around the earth ? 
 
 Therefore, over how many degrees of longitude does it pass in one hour ? 
 
 Is there any difference in the number of degrees of longitude the 
 
 sun passes over at the equator and at other latitudes, such, for example, as 45° N". latitude ? 
 
 When it is noon at Washington on a certain day, what time is it on the same 
 
 meridian to the north and south of Washington ? 
 
 Where does the sun rise? Where does it set? 
 
 Which places have noon first on a certain day, those to the east or to the west? ' 
 
 If at the same actual time it is noon at Greenwich, Eng- 
 land (consult your globe), and seven o'clock in the morning at Philadelphia, U.S., what is the 
 
 longitude of Philadelphia as compared to that of Greenwich? 
 
 If now you set a very accurate watch (chronometer) exactly at noon 
 
 for Greenwich, or any meridian, and then start from there on an exploring expedition to 
 South America, how, by consulting this chronometer, can you tell the longitude of different 
 
 points in South America? 
 
 What advantage would there be in carrying several chronometers, all accurately set for Wash- 
 ington time, or that of some other meridian? 
 
 32 
 
If there is a telegraph line extending from a place, 
 
 of which you know the position, to one whose longitude you wish to determine, how could the 
 
 telegraph be utilized to great advantage in the determination ? A 
 
 33 
 
Materials. 
 
 Purpose. 
 
 Day and 
 night. 
 
 VIII.— ROTATION AND ITS EFFECTS 
 
 For Each Student. — Desk Globe. Dividers. 
 
 For General Class Use. — Cardboard and Rod Apparatus. 
 
 To understand how rotation governs daily change in time ; the significance of standard time; 
 and of date line. 
 
 Place your globe in a strong light. How much of it is illuminated? 
 
 How much of it is in the shadow? What do these areas determine 
 
 on the earth, when illuminated by the sun? 
 
 Between the lighted and unlighted parts is a 
 
 belt all around the globe which is partly lighted and partly in shadow. To what times in 
 
 the day would this belt correspond? 
 
 Sunrise Which way does the sun seem to move? 
 
 and sunset. 
 
 rotating, in which direction must it turn? 
 
 If the sun is standing still and the earth is 
 
 Slowly rotate the globe in the same direction. 
 
 Is it moving clockwise or counter-clockwise? 
 
 Stop the rotation when the conditions are such that the sun is just rising over your home. 
 
 Where is it then setting? 
 
 Where is the twilight zone? 
 
 Difference How long does it take the earth to make one complete rotation ? 
 
 in time. 
 
 Look on the globe to see how many degrees of longitude, east and 
 
 west, are marked on the equator. What is the sum of these? 
 
 How many degrees, then, must the sunrise pass over in one hour? 
 
 In two hours? In six hours? Rotate 
 
 35 
 
the globe to see that the sunrise extends farther and farther westward on the equator as the 
 
 globe rotates. Is the same thing true at latitude 45°? At latitude 60°? 
 
 Does an object move faster or slower at the equator than at latitude 45°? 
 
 Why does the sunrise pass over the same number of degrees of longi- 
 tude in an hour in the two places? 
 
 Now, state why there is an hour's difference in sunrise 
 
 at every fifteenth degree. 
 
 Is there the same difference in noon? In sunset? 
 
 To the north of the equator? To the south of the equator ? 
 
 How much difference in time is there in one degree? 
 
 Is the time of day earlier or later to the east? .. 
 
 To the west? What about the time north and south along a given 
 
 meridian? . 
 
 Problems. When it is sunrise at 70° west longitude, is it before or after sunrise at 100° west longi- 
 tude? How much is the difference? 
 
 What is the difference in time of sunrise be- 
 tween 70° west longitude and 10° west longitude ? 
 
 Between 70° west longitude and 10° east longitude? 
 
 When.it is midday at your home, where is it midnight? 
 
 When the people in London (at 0° Long.) are rising, say at 7 o'clock, what 
 
 is the time at your home? By study of your 
 
 globe find the difference in time between (a) Chicago and San Francisco; 
 
 (b) New York and Peking ; (c) New York and Chicago ; 
 
 (d) New York and Rome. In each case state which city has the earlier time. 
 
 Local time. (Note. — Use the cardboard and rod apparatus, see Exercise VI.) 
 
 36 
 
On a board placed in the sunlight set up a rod about six inches high. At half-past 
 eleven mark with a pencil where the end of the shadow of the rod falls on the board ; also 
 marking the time on the board. Be sure that your watch is exactly right. Every five min- 
 utes after that, mark the position (and time) of the end of the shadow until half-past twelve. 
 Then connect the points. Carefully measure (with dividers) the distance between the points 
 marked and the base of the rod. Which point is the shortest distance from the rod ? That 
 
 point marks the time of local noon. Why is that so? 
 
 Was it also noon by your watch? 
 
 If not, how much difference was there ? 
 
 Standard What objection is there to the use of local time? 
 
 time. 
 
 How have the difficulties been met? 
 
 Why should Greenwich be chosen as the place to start in reckoning standard time? 
 
 On what meridian is the standard time one hour later than at Greenwich? 
 Two hours? 
 
 Five hours? On the outline map of the United 
 
 States (Fig. 9) locate the meridians 75°, 90°. 105°, and 120° West Longitude. Why should these 
 
 meridians be chosen as the central meridians for our time belts? 
 
 37 
 
Fig. 9. — Outline Map of the United States. 
 
 On the map (Fig. 9) sketch in the four standard time belts of the United States. (See Fig. 
 556, p. 404 of Text-book.) Why are the actual boundaries irregular and not on the meridians? 
 
 In which of the standard time belts do you 
 
 live? 
 
 Where and how much would you change your watch in going from New York to San Francisco? 
 
 From Chicago to Boston ? 
 
 The date If a person should travel completely around the earth, going from east to west, how many times (and 
 
 line. in which direction) would he have to change his watch if he made the change every fifteen degrees ? 
 
 On his return how would his time agree with that of his starting place ? 
 
 Would he have gained or lost a day ? 
 
 What would be the case in traveling around the earth in an easterly direction ? 
 
 38 
 
If it is sunrise Monday where you live, would it also be Monday when the suu next rises at the Hawaiian 
 
 Islands? In China ? InLondon? InNew 
 
 York? What difficulty does this bring out ? 
 
 Where does Tuesday begin ? 
 
 Where would you begin it ? 
 
 What objections would there be to choosing a meridian running through a 
 
 country such as England, or Germany, or the United States ? 
 
 Fig. 10. — Map of World for plotting the International Date Line. 
 
 39 
 
Such a line would be called a date line. Find 
 
 the date line on your globe. What reason can you suggest for locating the date line where it is ? 
 
 Does the date line follow a meridian exactly ? Draw in the date line on the map of the 
 
 world (Fig. 10). If you crossed that line Monday, June 20, coming from the east, what would be the 
 
 day of the week and month on the other side of the line ? 
 
 What if you were coming from the west? 
 
 Indicate this on the map, showing both routes by arrows, and on each side of the date line writing the days 
 and dates going each way. 
 
 4 
 
 € 
 
 40 
 
Materials. 
 
 Purpose. 
 
 Local ob- 
 servations. 
 
 IX. —THE SEASONS 
 
 For Each Student. — Desk globe. Cotton string. Colored pencils. (Method of using string : 
 Tie tightly around globe at equator, then slip over globe in the positions indicated below.) 
 
 To understand how the earth's revolution around the sun, together with the inclination of the 
 earth's axis, determines seasons, zones, and length of day and night. 
 
 At what season is the sun highest in the heavens at noon where you live? 
 
 At what season lowest? 
 
 At what two opposite seasons is the sun halfway between the highest and lowest? 
 
 % At what seasons does the sun rise exactly in the east and set in the west ? 
 
 At what season does 
 
 it rise and set farthest south of true east and west ? 
 
 Farthest north of true east and west? 
 
 In a few sentences write a description of the changes in the sun's position for a year. 
 
 What is the cause of these changes ? 
 
 What is revolution? 
 
 How much is the earth's axis inclined ? 
 
 Winter Set your globe on the desk in front of you with its axis inclined 23^-°, and with the north- 
 
 season, pole end pointed away from you. (Your desk globe is probably set at this inclination.) Look at 
 
 the globe with your eyes on the level of the Tropic of Capricorn. Can you see the south pole ? 
 
 41 
 
The north pole ? If you held a lighted candle where your 
 
 eyes were, how much of the south polar region would be lighted? 
 
 Of the north polar region? 
 
 Where, on the surface of the globe, would the light fall most directly? 
 
 Place the string around the globe to show the limits of the lighted 
 
 part in this position. To what latitude does it extend in the north? 
 
 How far does it go beyond the south pole? 
 
 Now rotate the globe. Under these conditions is there any night in the 
 
 Antarctic region ? Is there any day in the Arctic region ? 
 
 Is there day and night in the equatorial region ? In which hemisphere is the 
 
 period of daylight longest as the globe rotates? 
 
 Letting the globe represent the earth, and the light the sun, in which hemisphere is the sun* 
 
 most nearly vertical? Is this period summer 
 
 or winter at your home ? What season is it in the southern hemisphere ? 
 
 Why is it warmer at the equator than in the Antarctic region ? 
 
 Why warmer in the Antarctic than in the Arctic? 
 
 Briefly describe the changes in the sun's posi- 
 
 tion, and length of day, that one would observe in passing from the south to the north pole at this 
 season. 
 
 Summer Swing the globe around to the desk behind you, as if your body were the sun, keeping the 
 
 season. ax | s always inclined in the same direction. Now the north pole points toward you. With your 
 
 42 
 
eyes at the same level as when you looked at the globe in the winter position, what part of 
 the globe is directly in front of them? 
 
 Again, imagine a lighted candle placed where your eyes are ; the light would fall most directly 
 on the Tropic of Cancer. Place the string around the globe to show the limits of the part that 
 would be illuminated if a strong light fell upon the globe when in this position. How much 
 
 of the north polar region would be lighted? 
 
 Of the south polar region ? Rotate the globe. 
 
 Is there any night in the Arctic region ? Is there any day in the Antarctic ? 
 
 What parts of the earth have day and night? 
 
 * In which hemisphere is the 
 
 period of daylight longest as the globe rotates ? 
 
 Letting the globe represent the earth, and the light the sun, in which hemisphere is the sun 
 
 most nearly vertical at this season ? What 
 
 season does this represent in the northern hemisphere ? In the 
 
 southern? . Why is it warm at the equator ? 
 
 Why is there no winter 
 
 there? 
 
 In which direction will a shadow fall at the equator at noon? 
 
 At the Tropic of Cancer? 
 
 At the Arctic circle ? _' At the Tropic of Capri- 
 corn? Where will the shadow be longest? 
 
 Explain why the sun rises and sets farther north at this season than in the winter. 
 
 Briefly describe the changes in the sun's position and the length of day that one would 
 observe in passing from the north to the south pole at this season. 
 
 43 
 
Spring and Swing the globe around to the desk on your left, with the axis still pointing as before. 
 
 autumn. This will represent March 21. With your eye at the same level as before, you now look 
 
 directly at the equator. Place the string on the globe to show the area lighted in this 
 
 position. What part of the surface must then receive vertical sun's rays ? 
 
 Does the north pole receive sunlight in this position ? 
 
 The south pole ? In what proportions does the string divide 
 
 the equator? 
 
 Kotate the globe. How many hours of sunlight would a place on the equator have ? 
 
 Therefore, how many hours of night? 
 
 Does the string divide other parallels equally? At this period, how long is 
 
 the day and night in all parts of the earth? Why is this called the 
 
 spring equinox ? . 
 
 Does the sun also rise and set in the Arctic and Antarctic regions at this 
 
 season ? How does the sun appear at the poles themselves ? 
 
 Swing the globe around to the desk on your right, with the axis still pointing as before. 
 Answer the same questions as for the last position. 
 
 Why should this period (Sept. 23) be 
 44 
 
called the autumnal equinox ? 
 
 By placing the globe in other positions, show that there is 
 
 no other season besides autumn and spring when the days and nights are equal all over the 
 
 earth. Where would they be equal on Dec. 21 ? 
 
 On June 21? : 
 
 Make a drawing (see Fig. 553, p. 401, in Text-book) to show the revolution of the earth about the sun, 
 fixing the position for June 21, Sept. 23, Dec. 21, and March 21, and shade the half of the globe to represent 
 night at each of these dates. 
 
 The zones. What reason can you give for placing the Tropic of Cancer, Tropic of Capricorn, 
 Arctic Circle, and Antarctic Circle where they are? 
 
 What is the latitude of each? 
 
 45 
 
What reasons can you give for the fact that the torrid zone is warm at all seasons? 
 
 For the fact that the temperate zones have warm summers and cold winters ? 
 
 For the fact that the frigid zones are cold even in summer? 
 
 On the outline map (Fig. 11) sketch in the five zones with different colored pencils, and write 
 in their names. Why would you not expect to find an abrupt change in going from one zone 
 
 to the next? 
 
 To find Place the string on the globe in the position of the equinox. What is the number of degrees of longi- 
 
 the length 
 of day and 
 night. 
 
 tude on the lighted side at the equator ? „__. At 45° ? 
 
 At 60° ? Remembering that 15° of longitude represents one hour of time, how 
 
 many hours long is the day at the equinox ? 
 
 The night? Shift the string to the position of midwinter 
 
 (Dec. 21). How many degrees are lighted at the equator ? At the Tropic of 
 
 Capricorn? At 45° N. latitude ? At 45° S. latitude ? 
 
 At your own home ? 
 
 What is the length of daylight at each of these parts of the earth en Dec. 21 ? , 
 
 summer position (June 21) make the same observations for that date. 
 
 46 
 
 .. With the string in the mid- 
 
 ♦ 
 
:priy7¥ 
 
 •> 
 
 4i_ 
 
 
 -Sii 
 
 SB} 
 w H m 
 
 47 
 
♦ 
 
 48 
 
Materials. 
 
 Purpose. 
 
 Introduc- 
 tory. 
 
 The rock 
 outcrop. 
 
 AUTUMN FIELD WORK 
 X. — FIELD EXCURSION FOR COLLECTION OF SPECIMENS 
 
 For Each Student. — A bag, or small basket, for carrying specimens. 
 
 For General Class Use. — One or more hammers. 
 
 To collect specimens (such as minerals, rocks, and fossils),' for later study in the laboratory ; 
 to gain a knowledge of the nature and characteristics of the bed rock ; and to study the soil. 
 
 For this excursion select the nearest rock outcrop within easy reach ; and, if possible, on 
 the way to it examine one or more bowlders. If different rock outcrops are accessible on this 
 excursion, examine several. 
 
 Describe the appearance of the outcrop 
 
 Was it revealed by the work of man, or of 
 
 water, or is it a hillside ledge with no soil on it? 
 
 . . What is the color of the rock? 
 
 Is it hard or soft ? (Try the effect of a hammer or 
 
 knife on it.) Is its texture coarse or fine- 
 grained? Can you see individual minerals in it? 
 
 If so, describe their appearance. 
 
 Is the rock in layers or not ? If in layers, what differences are there 
 
 between them? 
 
 • 
 
 Are the layers horizontal or inclined ? 
 
 49 
 
Are there any fossils? If so, collect specimens. After the teacher 
 
 has told you what a sedimentary rock is, tell whether this is a sedimentary or a crystalline 
 
 rock. How is a sedimentary rock distin- 
 guished from a crystalline rock? 
 
 There are many kinds of sedimentary and crystalline 
 
 rocks. The teacher will tell you the name of this one. Write a brief description of it. 
 
 Collect a specimen for study in the laboratory when you are studying minerals and rocks. 
 When a rock is subjected to strain, as is often the case in the earth's crust, it breaks, 
 
 forming a parting called a joint plane. Are there joint planes in the outcrop ? 
 
 Write down any other observations you make, or any facts that the teacher tells you about 
 this outcrop. 
 
 Soils. Is there soil resting on the rock outcrop? Examine and describe it, 
 
 stating whether it is coarse or fine ; whether it is different at the 
 
 top and bottom 
 
 50 
 
; whether it has pebbles in it or not ; 
 
 whether it grades down into the rock or is separated sharply from it 
 
 ; and any other observations 
 
 you may make. 
 
 Other On your way from the outcrop watch carefully for bowlders and pebbles. Do you find 
 
 minerals 
 
 and rocks. an y? Are they like the rock in the outcrop ? .__: If not, collect 
 
 specimens for study in the laboratory. 
 
 51 
 
Materials. 
 
 Purpose. 
 
 Introduc- 
 tory. 
 
 Effect of 
 expansion 
 and con- 
 traction. 
 
 XI. —EXCURSION FOR THE STUDY OF WEATHERING 
 
 For Each Student. — A small bag or basket for the collection of specimens. 
 For General Class Use. — One or more hammers. 
 
 To study in the field some of the processes by which rocks are disintegrated or broken down on 
 exposure to air. 
 
 The class should be taken to some rock outcrop, or failing that, to a bowlder. If several 
 outcrops are available, select the one at which it is possible to answer the largest number of 
 the following questions. Almost any outcrop will furnish opportunity to make some observa- 
 tions on weathering. 
 
 Is the rock of this outcrop composed of one or of several kinds of minerals? 
 
 Heat causes minerals to expand, and they 
 
 contract when cooled. Different minerals expand and contract at different rates. As this 
 outcrop is warmed in the day and cooled at night, what must be the changes in the rock as a 
 
 whole ? 
 
 What must happen as a result of the strains at the junction of minerals of different kinds ? 
 
 State briefly how changes in temperature aid in the disruption of rocks where they outcrop. 
 
 Effect of 
 frost. 
 
 Are there any visible cracks in the rocks? When might water enter the 
 
 rocks? 
 
 Does water expand or contract on freezing? 
 
 When the cracks are filled with water and the temperature falls below freezing point, what is 
 
 the effect of the freezing of the water in the cracks ? 
 
 Are there other smaller cracks in the 
 
 53 
 
rock, — for instance, between the mineral grains? What influence do 
 
 these have in aiding in the breaking up of the rock? 
 
 Write a brief paragraph stating the 
 
 effect of frost in rock disintegration. 
 
 Effect of Are there any lichens on the outcrop ? ■... How do they cling to the rock? 
 
 plants. 
 
 As the lichens grow, how do they aid in rock disintegration? 
 
 . Are there any bushes or 
 
 trees sending their roots down into the rock ? What effect will the 
 
 growth of these roots have on the rock? 
 
 Solution. As the rain water passes through the soil it takes with it certain substances (like 
 
 carbon dioxide and humic acids) supplied by plant decay. The water then has power to 
 dissolve some minerals. Where, in this rock outcrop, will water percolate most freely? 
 
 If it flows along a joint plane, what effect will it have on the rock on either side? 
 
 If it slowly percolates between the mineral grains, what effect will it have on them? 
 
 State how the work of solution aids rocks in crumbling. 
 
 54 
 
Have you ever seen an iron spring, or a sulphur spring, or other kind of mineral spring? 
 
 Why are such springs called mineral springs ? 
 
 How did the water obtain its load of dis- 
 solved mineral ? 
 
 "Hard water" is water with mineral matter in solution. How did this get in solution? 
 
 Decay of Percolating water not only dissolves some minerals, but it causes some to change greatly, 
 
 rocks. as i ron i s caused to change to rust. Break off a piece of the rock to see whether any of the 
 
 minerals show such a change. Describe the difference between the outer and inner parts of 
 
 the piece of rock. 
 
 Are any of the minerals rusted red or yellow on the outside? Are 
 
 any of them changed to dull whitish color? If one kind of a min- 
 eral in a rock decays, and the other does not, how does that weaken the rock as a whole? 
 
 State briefly how decay results in rock disintegration. 
 
 55 
 
Make a list of the agencies of weathering that yon have observed at this outcrop. 
 
 Add to the list any other agencies of weathering that you know about, but have not observed. 
 
 What As the rock of this outcrop disintegrates, what becomes of the fragments? 
 
 becomes 
 of the dis- 
 integrated 
 rock. 
 
 Do any fall 
 
 to the base of the cliff, forming a talus? Describe the talus and ex- 
 plain its formation. 
 
 Are any of the fragments carried off by streams? 
 
 Are any taken away by plants ? How ? 
 
 What becomes of the dissolved 
 
 mineral? 
 
 Make a brief statement to show what becomes of the products of rock weathering. 
 
 56 
 
The forma- If the slope of the bedrock is so gentle that the products of weathering are not all 
 
 tion of soil, removed, a mantle of soil is formed, called a residual soil. How would such a soil differ in 
 
 character from the surface to the bedrock? 
 
 t) 
 
 How would the roots of plants aid in making the soil finer ? 
 
 What effect would earthworms have on the texture of the soil? 
 
 Why would a residual soil 
 
 be different on different kinds of rocks, such as limestone, slate, and granite ? 
 
 Would a resid- 
 ual soil grade into the bedrock, or would there be a sharp line separating them? 
 
 ., What is the 
 
 nature of the soil on this outcrop? Describe it. 
 
 Is it a residual soil ? 
 
 57 
 
Other ob- Write down any other observations you have made on this excursion, or any other facts 
 
 servations. y Qu k ave leaded, if y 0U have ever noted the effect of weathering elsewhere, as on bowlders, 
 or on stone buildings, or on the headstones in cemeteries, state what you have observed. 
 
 58 
 
9 
 
 XII. — EXCURSION TO STUDY STREAM WORK 
 
 Purpose. To study the work of streams in eroding their valleys and forming deposits. 
 
 Introduc- The banks of a comparatively small stream whose current is alternately swift and slug- 
 
 tory. gi s h will best serve the purpose of this excursion. Any water course will, however, give an 
 
 opportunity for profitable work, even though some of the observations outlined cannot be made. 
 
 Failing a perennial stream, the course of a wet-weather stream along a roadside or elsewhere 
 
 will afford many illustrations of stream processes. 
 
 Transpor- Is the water clear or cloudy? If it is 
 
 tation of 
 
 sediment. not c ] earj w hat causes the cloudiness? 
 
 t) 
 
 .__ How are clay and other fine earthy particles carried 
 
 along by the current? 
 
 What is the nature of the bottom of the channel at this point? 
 
 Was the material of which it is composed brought by the current? If so, 
 
 was the current faster or slower at the time when the material was deposited ? 
 
 How do you know this ? 
 
 If the stream is flowing over bedrock, what does this fact indicate as to the transporting 
 power of the stream at this point? 
 
 59 
 
Examine, if possible, a place in the stream course where the water is shallow and flowing 
 rapidly. What kind (as to size and nature) of particles are being rolled along on the bottom? 
 
 Throw pebbles, sand, and clay into the current to see how coarse material can be transported. 
 
 Would larger or smaller particles be moved at flood times ? 
 Why? 
 
 What evidence of this is afforded by the bowlders and pebbles in the bed of the stream at 
 different points in its course ? 
 
 When may they be moved again ? 
 
 Erosional Have the bowlders and pebbles in the stream bed rounded or sharp corners ? 
 
 work of 
 
 streams. Why? 
 
 What does this indicate as to the way in which the material of a bowlder or pebble will 
 eventually reach the sea? 
 
 60 
 
• 
 
 What will be the effect on the bedrock as the pebbles and bowlders are rolled over it ? 
 
 What effect will the transportation of sand particles have ? 
 
 What will be the effect, in both cases, on the depth of the stream channel ? 
 
 What is the source of the material which the stream carries '/ 
 
 How does weathering assist the stream in securing this material ? 
 
 How are stream valleys deepened ? 
 
 Is the course of the stream a straight line ? 
 What is meant by a meandering course ? 
 
 61 
 
What work is the current doing where it swings toward the bank in a meander curve? 
 
 What effect will this have on the width of its channel ? 
 
 How does weathering aid in the widening of stream channels ? 
 
 What illustrations of this do you find here ? 
 
 Why have ripraps and embankments been built by man along many streams ? 
 
 Deposition Where are bars formed in the stream's course ? 
 
 of sedi- 
 ment. 
 
 . .Of what materials are they composed ? 
 
 62 
 
How do you account for their presence and composition in each case noted ? 
 
 When will this material be moved again ? 
 
 Where will it ultimately be deposited ? 
 
 Is sediment carried in one continuous journey from its starting place to the sea? 
 Describe the process. 
 
 What forms may the material take when deposited in the sea or a lake ? 
 
 What illustrations of 
 
 this do you find in the small pools or ponds in the stream course? 
 
 63 
 
 OF THE 
 
 UNIVERSITY 
 
 OF 
 
Write a short paragraph summarizing the work of streams in deepening and widening 
 their valleys and in forming sedimentary deposits. 
 
 ♦ 
 
 64 
 
• 
 
 XIII. — EXCURSION TO LAKE OR SEA COAST 
 
 Purpose. To study the waves and currents on a coast line; to note their importance in erosion, trans- 
 
 portation, and deposition; and to study some of the land forms resulting from their action. 
 
 Introduc- Even the shore of a very small pond will often illustrate the main phenomena which it is 
 
 tor y- the purpose of this excursion to study ; therefore, if a large lake or a sea coast are not access- 
 
 ible, this excursion may nevertheless be undertaken with profit. 
 
 The wave. Are there any waves on the water surface ? About how high are they ? 
 
 What is the cause of the waves? 
 
 At what time are the waves higher than now? 
 
 As the waves approach the coast, how do they change in form ' 
 
 Are there points where the waves reach the coast with greater vigor than others ? 
 What reason can you give for their greater vigor in such places? 
 
 Currents. Is there a tide on this coast ? If so, describe it. 
 
 Does the tide cause currents in any place? When the wind blows steadily 
 
 over a body of water, what other movement of the water is there besides that of the waves? 
 
 65 
 
Is a wind-formed current a rapid or a slow movement ? 
 
 How does such a current compare in power Avith the waves ? 
 
 Can it transport coarse sediment? Clay? •_ 
 
 Wave work Do the waves beat against a headland at any point on this coast ? 
 on head- 
 lands. j g ^ headland hard rock or unconsolidated material ? 
 
 Is it steep or gently sloping? What evidence 
 
 is there that the waves are working to erode the headland? 
 
 How does weathering assist in the work? 
 
 If this work of erosion continues, what change will take place in the form and position of the 
 headland? 1 
 
 Is such work most rapid in consolidated or in unconsolidated material? 
 
 As weathering and wave erosion remove material, 
 
 what becomes of the fragments? 
 
 Wave work Of what is the beach made? 
 
 on beaches. 
 
 As the waves wash up on the beach, what size 
 
 material — clay, sand, or pebbles — do they move? 
 
 What size material can the waves move in times of storm? . 
 
 66 
 
What relation, if any, is there between the beach material and the headlands ? 
 
 How was the beach material brought to its present position ? 
 
 As the waves move the beach material about, what change in size of particles results? 
 
 Where are the finer particles, such as clay, carried? 
 
 How do the wind-formed currents aid in this 
 
 transportation? 
 
 The undertow? 
 
 How does such transportation aid in explaining the absence of clay beaches? 
 
 In explaining the frequency of clay deposits in protected bays where currents enter? 
 In explaining the fact that clay often covers the bottom at a short distance from the beach? 
 
 Animal and Are there any animals or plants living in the zone reached by the waves ? 
 
 plant life. 
 
 What kinds? 
 
 Do they aid or retard the work of the waves or currents in any way ? 
 
 ^|ther What other phenomena are illustrated on this coast ? 
 
 ■^Reserva- 
 tions. 
 
 67 
 
Does ice, for instance, ever form here; and what effect does it have? 
 
 Is the coast line a place of rapid or slow change? 
 
 Are there ripple marks? Study their formation and explain them. 
 
 State any observations you may make on the work of the wind in drifting sand about. 
 
 What observations have you ever made on other coasts than this one ? 
 
 68 
 
• 
 
 Form of the Is the coastline straight or irregular? Is it a raised or a lowered coast? 
 
 coastline. 
 
 Have the waves and currents produced much 
 
 or little change on this coast? 
 
 Are they now causing much or little change ? 
 
 Briefly describe the coast as you have observed it; state how the agencies of denudation 
 are modifying it, and explain its present form so far as the facts you have seen enable you to 
 
 do so. 
 
 69 
 
♦ 
 
Materials. 
 
 Purpose. 
 
 Introduc- 
 tory. 
 
 Method of 
 study. 
 
 Color. 
 
 Hardness. 
 
 MINERALS, ROCKS, AND SOIL 
 
 XIV.— PROPERTIES OF MINERALS 
 
 For Each Student. — Fragments of quartz crystal, feldspar, hornblende, halite (salt), 
 biotite mica, calcite, gypsum. Steel knife or scratch point. Window glass (fragment). 
 
 For General Class Use. — Dilute hydrochloric acid, and several glass stirring rods ; or 
 acid- dropping bottles. 
 
 To learn the properties by means of which the more common minerals may be identified and 
 distinguished. 
 
 A mineral may be defined (in general terms) as any inorganic solid, formed in nature, 
 which is composed of certain elements in definite combinations. The nature of the elements, 
 the amounts of each present, and the way they are combined give each mineral its own pecu- 
 liar characteristics. Thus a mineral is a naturally formed solid which has the same composi- 
 tion and structure throughout its mass. 
 
 Number your specimens from 1 to 7. Then make the observations as directed below 
 and record the results. Refer to each specimen by the number you have given it. 
 
 Which specimens are light colored? 
 
 Which are dark? What is the color of No. 1? 
 
 Of No. 2? No. 3? 
 
 No. 4? No. 5? No. 6? 
 
 No. 7? 
 
 If one mineral scratches another, which is the harder, the one scratched or the one used 
 to scratch with? 
 
 • 
 
 Number of 
 Specimen 
 
 Numbers of Specimens 
 which it scratches 
 
 Numbers of Specimens 
 which scratch it 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 By using a sharp point or corner of each 
 specimen to scratch with, and selecting a flat 
 place to scratch on, try to scratch each mineral 
 with every other one and set down your ob- 
 servations in the table opposite. Be careful 
 not to press so hard as to break off the points 
 by mere weight. 
 
 71 
 
Cleavage ; 
 and crystal- 
 line or 
 amorphous 
 form. 
 
 Resume. 
 
 Observa- 
 tions on 
 crystal 
 faces and 
 cleavage 
 planes. 
 
 Which of the seven is the hardest specimen? Which is the softest? 
 
 Arrange the specimens in the order of their hardness, putting the hardest 
 
 first. 
 
 Hardest 
 
 Next Hardest 
 
 Third Hardest 
 
 Fourth Hardest 
 
 Fifth Hardest 
 
 Sixth Hardest 
 
 Softest ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Which numbers can you scratch with your finger nail? 
 Which with a piece of steel or glass? 
 
 Many minerals break more readily in certain directions than in others, thus giving these 
 minerals the property of cleavage. The smooth planes along which these breaks occur are 
 called cleavage planes. In other directions the mineral breaks with a rough or uneven surface. 
 
 Not all smooth faces seen in minerals are cleavage planes. If a mineral is built up under 
 proper conditions, and is free to grow in all directions, it takes a definite form known as its 
 crystal form. Such minerals have smooth outside faces, called crystal faces. 
 
 Cleavage planes and crystal faces can be distinguished by the fact that cleavage planes 
 repeat themselves, one parallel to the other, while crystal faces simply bound the outside of 
 the crystal. 
 
 If the proper conditions are not present when a mineral is forming, it will not become a 
 crystal but will appear as a lump of the substance without definite form. Such a mineral is 
 said to be amorphous, a word meaning "without form." Minerals in the amorphous state 
 have neither crystal faces nor cleavage planes. 
 
 Minerals are either crystalline or amorphous. Complete crystals of minerals have smooth 
 crystal faces. Parts of crystals may or may not show smooth cleavage planes. The presence 
 of a cleavage plane indicates that the mineral will split in that direction, with a- smooth face, 
 as finely as it can be divided. Not all crystalline minerals have cleavage planes, while some 
 have them in a number of directions. Amorphous minerals have no smooth faces. 
 
 Which of your specimens have crystal faces or crystal form ? 
 
 Which have cleavage planes? 
 
 Which have cleavage planes in more than one direction? 
 
 How many of them have cleavages at right angles to 
 
 each other? How many at inclined angles 
 
 to each other? Which of your specimens 
 
 are amorphous? 
 
 Suggested Growing crystals. — Dissolve as much salt as possible in a glass of hot water. Suspend a cotton string 
 home work so that its free end will extend below the surface of the solution. Allow the solution to cool as slowly as 
 for stu- 
 dents, possible. Note the results. 
 
 72 
 
• 
 
 Try this also with a solution of sugar. Of alum. Is there any difference in the form of the crystals ? 
 Try the effect of cooling a salt solution rapidly. 
 
 Make a cold solution of either 
 
 sugar or alum and allow it to evaporate slowly. Why should these crystals be so much larger and more 
 
 perfect than the others ? 
 
 Luster. The manner in which light is reflected from a mineral gives it an appearance that is 
 
 termed its luster. Thus from some minerals the light is reflected so that it appears like a 
 glassy surface. Such a mineral is said to have a glassy luster. Others have pearly, metallic, 
 oily, earthy, etc., lusters. Describe in these terms the luster of each of your specimens, and 
 set down in the table. 
 
 Acid test. 
 
 • 
 
 Specimkn 
 Number 
 
 Luster 
 
 Name of Specimen* 
 
 1 
 
 
 < 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 ». 
 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 7 
 
 
 
 Have the teacher tell you the name of each of your specimens and set it down in the third 
 column above, opposite its number. 
 
 Apply a drop of acid to each of your specimens. If any of them begin to bubble, you 
 have a chemical reaction ; that is, the mineral is changed by the acid. Which of the 
 
 minerals shows such a reaction ? 
 
 73 
 
XV. — COMMON ROCK-FORMING MINERALS 
 
 Materials. For Each Student. — Specimens of quartz, orthoclase feldspar, plagioclase feldspar, muscovite 
 
 mica, biotite mica, hornblende, iron pyrites or pyrite, calcite, dolomite. Steel scratcher. 
 
 For General Class Use. — If possible have large crystal specimens of the different minerals 
 named above for examination by the class. Hydrochloric acid and stirring rods. 
 
 Purpose. To learn the properties of the common rock-forming minerals. 
 
 Introduc- On the following page is a table with a column for each specimen named above. Deter- 
 
 tor y« mine the characteristics of each mineral and set down your observations in the proper place, 
 
 as indicated. The chemical composition of each is given by its chemical symbol and is also 
 (in general terms) written out. The teacher will describe those elements mentioned with 
 which you are not familiar. These minerals are the ones which make up the bulk of the 
 rock masses of the earth. Hardness is to be stated in terms of harder than steel, harder than 
 a finger nail, softer than a finger nail. 
 
 How many of the minerals have oxygen? How many have 
 
 silicon ? What does this indicate as to the abundance of these 
 
 elements in the earth's crust? 
 
 How many different elements are present in all the min- 
 erals in your list ? 
 
 75 
 
8 
 
 H 
 
 2 
 a 
 < 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 PS 
 
 g 
 
 S> 
 
 |J 
 
 ■< 
 X 
 
 H 
 
 - S5 
 
 o 2 
 
 So 
 
 •< 
 H 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ft 
 O 
 
 a 
 
 •< 
 «J >• 
 
 2 "* 
 
 A 
 
 H 
 
 N 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 I 
 M 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 h) 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 
 
 •< 
 
 M 
 H 
 
 C 
 
 o> 
 bo 
 
 O * 
 
 si o 
 
 03 r-H 
 
 g~ 
 
 £ ll 
 
 <D ^ g X 
 
 J ° m .2 ° 
 
 "» 02 co g~ 
 .a <tj -g o 
 
 £ & CL| ~ 
 
 H 
 
 o 
 
 Ph 3 _^ 
 
 « + 9 .g 
 
 corn's iU 
 ■Q, rf <j ^ bo 
 
 6 
 
 - o 
 S 2 
 
 ^'35 02 
 
 O w 
 
 08 $£, O 1 
 
 I dT * ' a 
 
 •ts jz bo za 
 
 £ w W .2 
 
 2 Biotite Mica 
 [(H.K) 2 (Mg.Fe) 2 Al 2 (Si0 4 ) 3 ] 
 (Hydrogen, Potassium, Mag- 
 nesium, Iron, Aluminum, 
 Silicon, Oxygen) 
 
 1 1 j 
 
 o. 8 • 
 
 co c3 bo 
 
 3J>i .2 g 
 
 w^^os 
 
 w 02 
 
 .■2 a 
 
 G o 
 
 S 
 
 bo 
 
 o 
 
 d 
 .-S 'S 
 
 •i' 3 
 
 g~ 
 
 .2 
 
 'co 
 
 a 
 
 bo 
 
 O _ bo 
 
 3 ip .3 o 
 
 7S JS at a 
 
 o o 
 
 Cm O. 
 
 as 
 
 a a, 
 
 Qo 
 
 Bl 
 
 <£ 2 
 
 i — 
 
 1-1 
 01 o 
 
 c 5 
 — ja 
 
 1 = 
 
 03 ^5 
 
 "5® 
 
 ES 
 
 - - 
 If 
 
 II 
 g 3 
 
 OS 
 
 76 
 
t 
 
 Materials. 
 
 Purpose. 
 Method and 
 
 XVI.— SOME OF THE MOST COMMON ECONOMIC MINERALS 
 
 For Each Student. — Specimens of hematite, magnetite, halite, gypsum. Steel scratcher. 
 
 For General Class Use. — If possible, some specimens of limonite, magnetite, gold, silver, copper, 
 lead, and zinc ores. (In some localities the teacher may find it desirable to have these minerals for 
 each student.) Hydrochloric acid and glass stirring rods. . 
 
 To learn the characteristics of a few important economic minerals. 
 
 Make observations and describe each of the above minerals ; putting the description of 
 results. each in the form of a sentence, as below. 
 
 Hematite (Fe and 0) has a color ; a hardness 
 
 ; crystal faces are 
 
 (or are not) present; cleavage planes are (or are 
 
 not) present; these are at angles to each other ; 
 
 its luster is ; and it does (or does not) respond to the acid test. It 
 
 is used as a source of 
 
 Magnetite (FeO) 
 
 • 
 
 Halite (NaCl) (CI = Chlorine) 
 
 77 
 
Gypsum (CaSO< + H 2 0) 
 
 Examine the specimens (if any) which the teacher distributes and set down the most striking 
 characteristic of each. 
 
 78 
 
• 
 
 XVII.— COMPARISON OF CHARACTERISTICS OF COMMON MINERALS 
 
 Materials. For Each Student. — The specimens of the rock-forming and economic minerals previously 
 
 studied. 
 
 Purpose. To learn to distinguish between minerals having simUar properties. 
 
 Refer to the table of properties you have already made, and reexamine the specimens. 
 
 Comparison In what characteristics do quartz and feldspar resemble each other? 
 
 of minerals. 
 
 , How can they be 
 
 told apart ? 
 
 Examine the cleavage faces of the orthoclase and the plagioclase 
 
 feldspar. Which kind has the fine parallel lines ? i . 
 
 How do the two micas differ in color ? 
 
 Would the fact that iron is present in the biotite sug- 
 gest any explanation for this ? 
 
 In what properties does hornblende resemble the feldspars? 
 
 In which does it differ ? 
 
 Is its cleavage as easy to see as that of the feldspars?. 
 
 How may hornblende and mica be distinguished? 
 
 How would you most quickly recognize pyrite ? 
 
 . What resemblances have calcite and dolomite? 
 
 79 
 
How may they be distinguished from each other ? 
 
 In what ways does halite resemble quartz? 
 
 Taste both. What is the result? 
 
 What would happen to halite if it were present near the 
 
 surface of the earth in a humid climate ? 
 
 How could you most readily identify hematite ? 
 
 What is the most noticeable property of 
 
 gypsum? _ 
 
 ♦ 
 
 80 
 
• 
 
 Materials. 
 
 Purpose. 
 
 Igneous 
 rocks. 
 
 XVIII. — GENERAL CLASSIFICATION OF ROCKS 
 
 For Each Student. — Specimen of granite, sandstone, fossiliferous limestone, schist. Fine- 
 pointed steel scratcher, or knife point. 
 
 For General Class Use. — Hydrochloric acid and glass stirring rods. 
 
 To learn the cfiaracteristics of the four great classes of rocks. 
 
 Examine your specimen of granite. Of how many different minerals is it composed ? 
 
 Are the minerals crystalline or amorphous ? 
 
 Identify each mineral, and make a list of them in the order of importance as to amount present. 
 
 How are the minerals arranged with respect to one another ? 
 
 This kind of rock is known as an Igneous (= Fire) Bock because of the fact that it is formed by the 
 cooling of a hot molten mass of rock magma which rises from within the earth. If such a molten mass cools 
 slowly, the minerals can separate out into crystal grains of good size, as in the granite you have examined ; if 
 they cool very quickly, the rock which results is like a black glass, or furnace slag. There are all gradations 
 between these two extremes. Then again, the molten magmas are of different composition ; some have 
 elements that others lack. Consequently, minerals that are present in one igneous rock may be absent in others. 
 
 Sedimen- 
 tary rocks. 
 
 What mineral composes the bulk of your sandstone specimen? 
 
 Are other minerals visible? If so, what proportion of the mass do they 
 
 form ? 
 
 Eub your finger (or a knife) with some pressure over the surface of the specimen. What is the 
 shape of the particles you break off? 
 
 What differences do you see between the sandstone 
 
 and the granite ? 
 
 81 
 
Sandstone is a Sedimentary Bock ; that is, it is one of the great class of rocks which are formed by 
 deposition, generally in water. The material, or sediment, of which they are composed, is usually brought by 
 streams which have gathered it along their courses and carried it in their currents to their mouths, where they 
 must deposit it, because the current ceases. Sedimentary rocks are all alike in the fact that they have been 
 formed by deposit from a current, usually a water current ; but wind, for example, may also act as a carrier 
 and depositor of sediment. 
 
 Organic What traces of animal life does your limestone specimen show ? 
 
 rocks. 
 
 Where do such animals 
 
 live? 
 
 What becomes of their shells when they die ? 
 
 Does the acid affect this rock? How might such a rock be formed? 
 
 Limestone such as this is an Organic Bock. Organic limestones, however, grade into those which have 
 formed chemically (as a deposit of salt would form in a glass if you dried up a salt solution) . When limestones 
 are chemically formed, they are generally classed with the sedimentary rocks. 
 
 Metamor- Of what minerals is your schist specimen composed? 
 
 phic rocks. 
 
 How are these arranged? 
 
 How does this affect the rock's strength? 
 
 Why is it not as strong as a granite?. 
 
 82 
 
• 
 
 Along the lines of what mineral does it break most readily ? 
 . Why? 
 
 Schist is one of the great class of Metamorphic (changed) Bocks. Originally they were igneous, sedi- 
 mentary, or organic rocks ; but later they were heated and compressed in the earth's crust, so that they have 
 acquired altogether different characteristics than they had originally. Such a change in rocks is called 
 metamorphism. 
 
 Does solid rock appear at the surface anywhere near your home? To 
 
 which of these four classes of rocks does it belong ? 
 
 At the next period bring a specimen from the rock outcrop. 
 
 83 
 
• 
 
 ( 
 
Materials. 
 
 Purpose. 
 
 Steam a 
 cause of 
 porous 
 lavas. 
 
 XIX. — CLASSIFICATION OF IGNEOUS ROCKS 
 
 For Each Student. — A specimen of pumice, cellular lava, obsidian, rhyolite, granite, trachyte, 
 syenite, gabbro, basalt. 
 
 For General Class Use. — Small pieces of rock, unlabeled. . 
 
 To become familiar with the general types of igneous rocks, and the characteristics by which 
 they are distinguished. 
 
 When water is boiling, in what form does the steam rise from the bottom of the vessel to 
 
 the surface ? What is meant when we say that the 
 
 liquid which is boiling "froths over" ? 
 
 If this " froth " were hardened just as it rises over the rim of the vessel, what would be the 
 appearance of the mass formed ? 
 
 Classifica- 
 tion by 
 texture. 
 
 If molten rock were being " frothed over," or blown out of the crater of a volcano by the 
 steam and gases that rise from it (see Fig. 203, Text-book), what would be the nature of the 
 
 rock that is formed on its cooling? 
 
 Which of your specimens shows evidence 
 
 of having had such a history ? Which one shows 
 
 evidence of less violent steam action ? 
 
 If the molten rock flowed over the volcano rim very quietly (like molasses candy being 
 poured from a kettle), and then cooled quickly, which of your specimens do you think it 
 
 would most resemble ? If there were no steam 
 
 or gas in the lava, which specimen would result? 
 
 Why is artificial glass similar in appearance to this specimen? 
 
 85 
 
Find the specimen which you think has cooled a little more slowly than the obsidian. 
 
 What specimens give evidence of the following condition of cooling : First, the lava cooled 
 slowly for a time, at a rate which permitted some of the minerals to separate out and form 
 visible crystals ; then it cooled rapidly and the rest of the mass made a rock of fine texture ? 
 
 What minerals have separated out in your specimens of these (porphyritic) rocks ?. 
 
 Which rocks formed in the places indicated in Fig. 12 would cool rapidly ?. 
 
 Fig. 12. — To illustrate the Origin of Igneous Rocks. 
 
 Would this give rise to coarse or fine grained rocks? 
 
 In what position would such rocks as granite, syenite, and gabbro be formed ? . 
 
 Classifica- 
 tion by 
 composi- 
 tion. 
 
 The observations you have made above give a basis for a classification of igneous rocks 
 by structure, or texture. Pumice, obsidian, and some other lavas are glasses. Khyolite and 
 trachyte are porphyries. Basalt is a finely crystalline igneous rock. Granite, syenite, and 
 gabbro are coarsely crystalline igneous rocks. 
 
 The glasses cannot be further subdivided (because they are too fine grained) ; but all the 
 other rocks are also grouped according to their composition. 
 
 Refer to your table of the properties of minerals. Which minerals are light in color ? 
 
 86 
 
• 
 
 Which are dark ? 
 
 In which of these two groups are the minerals which have the most 
 
 metallic elements (iron, magnesium, calcium, sodium, and potassium)? 
 
 ' Which is the darker, 
 
 orthoclase or plagioclase feldspar ? Which has the most metals 
 
 in its composition? What do you observe as to the relation be- 
 tween color of mineral and the presence of metallic elements ? 1 
 
 Arrange all your specimens 
 
 (except the glasses) in a row, putting those lightest in color at the left-hand side. Write 
 
 down the order in which you have arranged them. 
 
 What sort of a rough grouping have 
 
 you now made of the rocks ? 
 
 Now make two rows of your specimens, putting the porphyries and basalts in the lower 
 row, but still keeping the specimens in the same order as to color. Write down the order of 
 
 the specimens in each row. 
 
 87 
 
Examine your granite specimen (which should be first in the upper row). What minerals 
 
 does it contain (look very carefully) ? 
 
 Examine the syenite (the next in order). What 
 
 prominent mineral of the granite does it lack? Which kind of 
 
 feldspar has it ? Examine the gabbro. Which kind of feldspar has 
 
 it? What other minerals does the gabbro contain ? 
 
 A rock is said to be acid when it is made up mainly of the light-colored minerals, which 
 have the lesser amounts of the metal elements. The rocks in which the minerals have metallic 
 elements are said to be basic. Thus quartz is the most acid, and pyrite the most basic of 
 those rock-forming minerals that you have studied. Which of the rocks in your collection 
 
 are acid ? 
 
 Which basic ? 
 
 Whether a rock is acid or basic gives a basis for a second method of classifying igneous 
 rocks ; namely, a classification according to composition. In the following table write in the 
 names of each of your specimens, keeping in mind the two kinds of classification : — (1) com- 
 position; (2) texture. 
 
 88 
 

 ACID END 
 
 
 BASIC END 
 
 >- 
 
 
 
 Has quartz and or- 
 thoclase feldspar 
 
 Orthochase feldspar 
 but no quartz 
 
 Has plagioclase feldspar 
 and other basic minerals 
 
 Coarsely 
 Crystalline 
 
 
 
 
 Finely 
 Crystalline 
 
 
 
 Basalt 
 
 Porphyries 
 
 
 
 
 Glasses 
 
 . 
 
 By means of this table identify the specimen you have collected from the home locality if it belongs 
 among the Igneous Rocks. Identify the small pieces of rock given you by the teacher, telling (a) the minerals 
 in each ; (6) whether acid or basic ; (c) its texture ; (d) its name. 
 
 t 
 
 89 
 
Materials. 
 
 Purpose. 
 
 Sedimen- 
 tary and 
 organic 
 rocks. 
 
 XX. — CLASSIFICATION OF SEDIMENTARY, ORGANIC, AND 
 METAMORPHIC ROCKS 
 
 For Each Student. — Specimens of conglomerate, sandstone, shale, limestone, coal, gneiss, 
 schist, quartzite, slate, marble. 
 
 For General Class Use. — Hydrochloric acid and glass stirring rods. Small pieces of rock, 
 unnamed. 
 
 To become familiar with the more common types of these classes of rocks, and to learn how to 
 distinguish between them. 
 
 Assume a stream flowing into the sea and carrying along in its current small pebbles, 
 sand grains, and clay particles. It also has carbonate of lime in solution. All this material 
 the stream has secured along its course by the breaking up of some kind of rock, through the 
 action of the agents of weathering and erosion. 
 
 When such a stream empties into the ocean, will its current continue unchecked in 
 
 velocity? ___. Will the current continue at all for any great distance 
 
 from the shore? What then will become of the rock material that the 
 
 current is carrying? 
 
 Which part of the load that the current carries will be deposited first? 
 
 Why? ._ 
 
 • 
 
 Which of your specimens is formed of such 
 
 materials ? Which kind of material will be 
 
 deposited a little farther out from the shore? '. 
 
 What kind of rock does this make ? Which of your specimens might 
 
 result from the deposit of the clay particles ? 
 
 Which of your specimens might have resulted from the deposit of the lime solution? 
 
 How might the sea animals, whose traces 
 
 are shown in your limestone, aid in its formation? . 
 
 91 
 
Would there be a sharp line between the place of deposit of sandstone and conglomerate ? 
 Between the sandstone and the shale? Draw a diagram 
 
 illustrating deposit of sediment in the sea to show how variation in texture would occur 
 from the shore outwards. 
 
 Limestone is often formed from the remains of lime-secreting animals. Plant remains also 
 form organic rocks. Coal is such an organic rock formed of plant remains accumulated in 
 
 ancient swamps. Are there any traces of plants left in your specimen? How 
 
 could you test whether a black rock was coal ? 1--, 
 
 In what ways do sandstone and limestone differ? 
 
 Shale and limestone (use acid test) ? 
 
 Shale and sandstone? 
 
 92 
 
Sandstone and conglomerate? 
 
 Identify the unlabeled specimens. 
 
 Metamor- By means of the acid test find which of your metamorphic specimens was changed from 
 
 phic rocks. 
 
 a limestone. Compare it with limestone and 
 
 note the natur*e of the change. 
 
 Which of the metamorphic rocks most nearly resembles shale? 
 
 How does it differ from shale? 
 
 Micaceous minerals are abun- 
 dantly present in slate, and you may be able to see them in your specimen. Why would the 
 
 presence of such minerals cause the slate to split so regularly? 
 
 • 
 
 What two specimens have 
 
 been so metamorphosed as to resemble the igneous rocks ? 
 
 93 
 
Assuming both these to have been originally clay rocks, which has apparently 
 
 been changed most? What is the arrange- 
 ment of like minerals in each? 
 
 Why is it easier to split the schist than the gneiss ? 
 
 What metamorphic specimen is yet unclassified? From what is 
 
 this derived? How has it been changed? 
 
 Identify the unlabeled specimens. If the specimen of rock from your home locality was not an igneous 
 rock, identify it among the sedimentary, organic, or metamorphic rocks. 
 
 94 
 
 C 
 
# 
 
 Materials. 
 
 Purpose. 
 
 Origin of 
 soil. 
 
 XXI.— THE SOIL 
 
 For Each Student. — Specimen of rock with lichen attached. Several rounded stream pebbles. 
 Residual soil from granite. Residual clay from limestone. Field soil secured from beneath sod. 
 Small fragment of limestone. Hydrochloric acid. Test tube. Glass plate. 
 
 For General Class Use. — Hand specimens of minerals and rocks. 
 
 To study the origin and nature of soils and their significance to man. 
 
 From your study of minerals, what few make up the larger part of the rock masses of 
 
 the earth's crust? 
 
 Which of these minerals have cleavage planes? 
 
 If you poured water over minerals, some with cleavage planes and some 
 
 without, which ones would absorb the water most readily ? 
 
 What would happen if the water-soaked minerals were to freeze ? 
 
 , How would a 
 
 rock composed of cleavable minerals be affected if first soaked by rain, and then exposed to 
 a freezing temperature? 
 
 When the mercury in a thermometer tube is heated, why does it rise ? 
 
 Most substances have this property, but the amount of expansion 
 
 for the same degree of heat is different for different substances. Thus different minerals 
 expand different amounts under the same heat. What would be the effect on the rock itself 
 
 if the minerals in a granite expanded at different rates? 
 
 If you put salt in water, what happens ? 
 
 If you put acid on limestone, what happens ? 1 
 
 Other acids have a similar effect. Rain water obtains carbon dioxide from the air and from 
 plant remains. The combination of the water and carbon dioxide forms carbonic acid. When 
 
 95 
 
this acid soaks down to the soluble limestone, what will happen ? 
 
 Examine the rock specimen with the lichen growing on it. By what means does the 
 
 plant cling to the rock ? 
 
 If its roots grow after penetrating a tiny crevice in the rock, what 
 will be the effect of their growth on the rock ? 
 
 State clearly the general effects of these weathering agents on all minerals and rocks 
 exposed to the air. 
 
 Have all minerals cleavage planes ? Are all minerals 
 
 dissolved by acid? Are all rocks made up of the same amounts, or of the 
 
 same kinds of minerals ? What bearing have these differences on the rate at 
 
 which different rocks are broken down ? 
 
 Why is almost all the earth's surface covered with 
 
 "dirt," sand, and clay, while bedrock is seen only occasionally ? 
 
 Examine the stream pebbles. Have they sharp edges and corners? 
 
 What has happened to the pebbles since they were broken off from the bedrock ? 
 
 What becomes of the particles which are ground off? 
 
 What kind of deposits do they form in 
 
 stream beds ? 
 
 96 
 
Residual Examine the residual soil from granite by spreading a small portion on your glass plate. 
 
 soils. 
 
 What mineral of the granite has remained unaltered? What mineral 
 
 composes the greater mass in a granite rock? 
 
 What material seems most abundant in this residual soil of granite? 
 
 What has happened to the feldspar of the granite? 
 
 Put a small fragment of limestone in a test tube half full of hydrochloric acid. What 
 
 happens ? What sort of material remains in 
 
 the test tube after the bubbling ceases? _. 
 
 Examine the residual clay from the limestone. 
 
 How does it differ in composition from the residual material of granite? 
 
 Why is there 
 
 this difference? 
 
 The original limestone rock from which the clay has been derived may 
 
 be gray, brown, or black. What is the color of the residual clay ? 
 
 To what is the color due? 
 
 What material of the limestone rock remains behind as residual clay ? 
 
 Which rock would 
 
 give the greater amount of residual material, granite or limestone? 
 
 Why? 
 
 97 
 
il- Examine the sample of field soil. How does it differ in appearance from the pure resid- 
 ual soils? 
 
 Put a small portion of the soil in a test tube f full of water ; shake, and then allow to settle. 
 
 What kind of material floats? What is the 
 
 source of the organic matter? : 
 
 What part of the soil remains suspended for a long time? 
 
 What material quickly settles to the bottom ? 
 
 How does the field soil differ in composition 
 from the pure residual soils? 
 
 What is the effect of the presence of plant roots on the texture of the field soil? 
 
 The presence of organic matter, and the 
 greater porosity of field soils, gives them fertility and enables them to support plant life. 
 The subsoil, in which plants have never grown, is quite infertile. Why then would it be 
 unwise to plow up soil below the depth to which plant roots usually penetrate ? 
 
 Why are manures placed on poor soils ? 
 
 Where do growing plants secure their water ? 
 
 Will plants grow well in a very compact soil? (See suggested home experiment.) 
 What is the effect of plowing the soil ? ,. 
 
 W 
 
 98 
 
What kinds of food do cattle eat? What 
 
 kinds of food does man eat? Traced back 
 
 to its original source, what is the real basis of supply of food for man ? 
 
 State clearly the 
 
 importance of soil to the life of human beings. 
 
 Suggested Secure four pans about three inches deep and eight inches long. Into two of these put clayey field soil, 
 
 home or loosely, and in each, during the process of filling, plant 20 grains of corn at a depth of one inch. Keep one 
 
 general of these pans moderately moist, the other very wet, and let both stand in a warm place. 
 
 class work. Into the remaining two pans put the same kind of field soil, but pack it very firmly ; and, during the 
 
 process of filling, plant 20 grains of corn in each at a depth of one inch. Keep one of these moderately moist, 
 the other very wet. After ten days observe how many plants are growing in each pan. Under which treat- 
 
 ment did the greatest number of seeds grow ? 
 
 The least ? 
 
 What was the effect of the different treat- 
 
 ments of the soils on the entrance of air between the soil grains ? 
 
 • 
 
 What is the effect on plant life of pre- 
 
 venting the entrance of air into the soil ? 
 
 Give a reason why fields are plowed. 
 
 Why a field should be 
 
 drained of its surplus water. 
 
 99 
 
( 
 
A 
 
 i 
 
 SCALE. 
 Fig. 13. — Contour Interval. 
 
OF THE 
 
 UNIVERSITY 
 
 OF 
 s£4UF0RNVf 
 
 MAKING AND INTERPRETATION OF TOPOGRAPHIC MAPS 
 
 XXII. — CONSTRUCTION OF AN AREAL MAP 
 
 (With tank and land model, see page viii) 
 
 Materials. For Each Student. — Ruler. Pencil (well sharpened). 
 
 For General Class Use. — Land model and tank. Yardsticks. 
 
 Purpose. To make an areal map of a miniature land form. 
 
 Scale. What is the length of the platform on which the land model rests? 
 
 What is its width? What is the length of the accompanying sheet 
 
 of paper (Fig. 13) ? Its width? If your 
 
 platform were five feet long and four feet wide, and your paper ten inches long and eight 
 inches wide, what would be the greatest amount of space that you could allow for every foot of 
 the platform, if you were asked to draw an outline of the shape of the platform on your paper ? 
 
 . What explanation would you need to put on 
 
 such a drawing so that others could understand what the size of the original was ? 
 
 What 
 
 is meant by the scale of a drawing or map ? 
 
 Why would it be more convenient to adopt a 
 
 scale one half that of the largest possible scale for drawing the 5x4 foot platform on paper 
 
 10 inches by8 inches in size? 
 
 What does the phrase 1 inch = 1 mile (printed on many maps) 
 
 signify ? 
 
 From your measurements of your own platform and paper, decide what will be 
 
 the most convenient scale for you to adopt for the map you are to make, and write it down 
 opposite the word " scale " on the sheet of paper (Fig. 13). 
 Orientation Turn your drawing paper so that the arrow printed or* the sheet points to the north. 
 
 Mark an N above it. Mark S for south, and E and W at the proper ends of the other lines. 
 
 Which side of the model will you draw on the north side of your map? 
 
 Holding a map so that its directions correspond with the actual 
 
 directions is called " orienting " the map. Why should this be done, whenever possible, when 
 
 101 
 
using a map of any kind ? 
 
 Areal 
 mapping. 
 
 Draw an outline of the platform according to the scale you have adopted. Then beginning 
 on the side assigned by the teacher (different members of the class begin on different sides), 
 measure with the yardstick the distance from the edge of the platform to different points 
 where the water touches the land model (as a-b, Fig. 14). Measure only to the prominent 
 points, such as the ends of the capes, the heads of the bays, etc. Measure also, each time, the 
 
 WATER 
 
 MEASUREMENT OUT 
 - TO LAND FORM 
 
 MEASUREMENT ALONG PLATFORM 
 
 =* 
 
 16 
 
 Fig. 14. — Diagram to show Method of making Measurements for Areal Map. 
 
 distance from a corner of the platform along the edge of the platform to the point from which 
 you measure out to the land model. These two measurements are diagrammed in Fig. 14 as 
 a-b and b-c. 
 
 Then, in the same way, locate the position of the highest points of mountains, and mark 
 these on your map by little triangles ( = A ). Next, locate the course of the main streams (as 
 indicated by blue yarn on the model), and trace a line on the map to show each of these. Lo- 
 cate other points as indicated by the teacher. 
 
 The work you have done so far is similar to the work that topographers do when making 
 an areal map of a similar island in nature, except that in actual land mapping you would 
 measure with instruments from point to point on the island. Also, you would need to locate 
 more points. Areal mapping means locating the position of prominent points, streams, roads, 
 etc., in a given area, with reference to each other and to the cardinal directions ; and also de- 
 termining their latitude and longitude. Could you tell the height of a mountain from such an 
 
 areal map? Could you tell whether a mountain had a steep slope on one 
 
 side or a gentle slope on the other? Could you determine the form of a 
 
 mountain ridge ? What two features shown on the model are not expressed 
 
 on the map as you have made it up to this point ? 
 
 102 
 
• 
 
 Materials. 
 
 Purpose. 
 
 Base level, 
 or datum 
 plane. 
 
 XXIII. — CONSTRUCTION OF A CONTOUR MAP 
 
 For Each Student. — Ruler and brown pencil, well sharpened. 
 
 For General Class Use. — The model used in the previous exercise [and if plaster model is 
 used, a number of boards of uniform thickness as directed on page ix of this manual]. 
 
 To express the relief features of a miniature land form on a map by means of contour lines. 
 
 What line on the areal map that you have drawn (Fig. 13) shows the contact of water 
 
 and land? 
 
 What is its level, with reference to the water surface? 
 
 What kind of surface has a body 
 
 of standing water? Why are all elevations 
 
 on the earth's surface expressed by their height in feet (or meters) above sea level ? 
 
 Why is the mean (or average) sea level often referred to as the datum plane, or base level ? 
 
 Contour 
 interval. 
 
 The water in the tank may be considered as a miniature sea. 
 
 What is the elevation of any point along the outline of the map you have drawn, with 
 
 reference to this sea level, or datum plane ? 
 
 . Lower the model and its platform a certain 
 
 depth into the water, equally on all sides. How much did you lower it ? 
 
 Has the water level changed? Where does the water surface come into 
 
 contact with the land now ? (Express in general terms.) 
 
 103 
 
Draw (with brown pencil, on Fig. 
 
 13) the new outline of the contact of the land surface and the water (making measurements 
 and plotting, as done previously on the areal map you have made). Does this new outline 
 
 come outside or inside the original outline ? 
 
 If now the model were lifted back to its original position with reference to the water level, 
 and a path were traced around the model in the position fixed by the second outline, would 
 
 this path go uphill, remain always at the same level, or go downhill ? 
 
 "What then is the 
 
 relation of the second outline to the first outline ? 
 
 Such a line, drawn on a map through all 
 
 points at the same elevation above sea level, is known as a contour line. Why should the dif- 
 ference in elevation between the sea level and the contour line you have drawn be known as a 
 
 contour interval ? 
 
 Contour Does the contour line that you have drawn extend farthest in from the sea-level line at 
 
 lines and points where the slope of the model is steep or gentle ? 
 
 slope. 
 
 Succeeding 
 contours. 
 
 Lower the model again, the same distance as the first time. Locate and plot the new 
 
 contour line. What is the contour interval you have adopted ? 
 
 Write it down on the line opposite the words "Contour Interval" printed 
 
 on your map (Fig. 13). Number your contour lines on the map to show what elevation 
 above the original sea level they represent. Lower the model equal distances until the 
 highest points are submerged, and draw the contour lines for each interval. What is the form 
 
 of the cdntour line showing the highest elevation of the mountain ? 
 
 How do the contour lines bend when they enter a valley? 
 
 W 7 hen they come to a headland? ___2 
 
 "Where are they farthest apart, on steep or gentle slopes? 
 
 What reason can you give for using a brown pencil 
 
 in drawing the contour lines? _ 
 
 Use of a 
 contour 
 map. 
 
 W 7 hat does a contour map show that the areal map did not ? 
 
 Why are such maps 
 
 104 
 
• 
 
 called topographic maps? 
 
 Why would a topographic map be much more useful than 
 
 a simple areal map to a man who wished to make a road between two points ? 
 
 How could one find out from a topographic map how many feet a river descended from its 
 source to its mouth? 
 
 105 
 
€ 
 
 € 
 
• 
 
 Materials. 
 Purpose. 
 
 XXIV. — MAKING A CROSS SECTION OF A CONTOUR MAP 
 
 For Each Student. — Ruler. Sharp pencil. Sheets of plain paper. 
 
 To teach the making of cross sections from contour maps. 
 
 • 
 
 Fig. 15. — Contour Map of Miniature Land Form made by a Student in Physical Geography. 
 
 Study of a Figure 15 is a contour map of a miniature land form made by a student in physical 
 
 simple con- geography, 
 tour map. 
 
 What is the scale of this map? 
 
 107 
 
What is the contour interval? How can you tell which slopes on 
 
 the land form were steep and which were gentle? 
 
 : On which sides of the miniature land form 
 
 were the shores steep? 
 
 On which sides did it have gentle slopes? 
 
 , • What was the 
 
 highest elevation on the land form? Why was this figure printed 
 
 in on the map? T 
 
 Which contour lines are heavier than others? 
 
 What aid does this heavier printing of some contour lines give when 
 
 reading the map? 
 
 By what other means are 
 
 these heavier contours distinguished from the rest? 
 
 On the northern side of the map, the two-inch contour line bends far inland. If you crossed 
 the miniature land form in an east and west direction, would you find the land inside the 
 
 bend higher or lower than two inches? 
 
 What would be the case if the contour bent outward toward the sea? 
 
 Find and note an illustration of a contour line bending outward. 
 
 Meaning of Note the line A-B on the map, Fig. 15. What are the elevations of the two highest points 
 
 cross 
 
 section. it crosses ? What is the elevation of the lowest 
 
 point it crosses between these high points ? Make a drawing (on Fig. 
 
 16) to show how your path would go uphill and downhill if you were to cross the land form 
 along the line A-B, starting at A. 
 
 -x 
 
 A B 
 
 SEA-LEVEL Fig. 16. SEA-LEVEL 
 
 The drawing you have made is a crude cross section of the land form along the line A-B. 
 If a cross section is accurately made from a contour map, it shows clearly, in diagram form, 
 
 108 
 
Plotting 
 | intersec- 
 tions of 
 contours. 
 
 the elevations, depressions, and level places of the region along the line on which the cross 
 section is made. 
 
 To make an accurate cross section along the line A-B proceed as follows : Fold a sheet of 
 your plain paper through the middle so that you have a smooth, folded edge at least six inches 
 long. Next lay this paper over the map so that it covers the southwest corner of the map, and 
 
 \ i, L I hi y i I 
 
 fc NOT < 
 
 .-* COMPLETED ^ 
 
 B 
 
 FOLDED SHEET 
 
 
 OF PAPER 
 
 
 Fig. 17. 
 
 Plotting 
 the inter- 
 sections 
 on cross- 
 section 
 paper. 
 
 so that the folded edge rests on the line A-B, leaving this line visible. At A and B draw short 
 (£") vertical lines down from the folded edge of the paper, and mark A and B, respectively, at 
 their ends. A and B are each at sea level, or elevation. With sharp pencil mark on the 
 folded sheet (with similar short vertical lines) the exact point of intersection of each contour 
 line with the folded edge. Begin at A and continue to B. Below each vertical line indicate 
 by a figure the elevation of the contour line whose intersection it marks. When this operation 
 is partly completed, the edge of your folded sheet should be similar to Fig. 17. 
 
 On the accompanying cross-section paper (Fig. 18) draw a pencil line along one of the 
 lower horizontal ruled lines, so that it stands out distinctly from the rest. This is to be your 
 line or sea-level, or base-level line. At the left-hand end of the zero line, draw a line per- 
 pendicular to it, and 13 small squares high. Number the horizontal lines which this perpen- 
 
 INCHES 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 11 
 10 
 9 
 8 
 7 
 f 
 6 
 4 
 3 
 2 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 | 1 
 1" 2" 
 \ 
 
 JJ'e"! H" i." J" 6"i„ ^ NOT COMPLETED 
 
 3" 
 
 1 
 
 Fig. 19. — To illustrate Method of making Cross Section from Contour Map. 
 
 109 
 
dicular crosses, from 1" to 13"; the 1" line being the one next above the zero or sea-level line. 
 Mark this end of the drawing A. 
 
 Now lay the folded edge of the sheet, on which you have marked the intersections of the 
 contours along the sea-level line, so that the point A on the folded edge coincides with the 
 point A on the horizontal line of the cross-section paper. Next make a dot with your pencil 
 on the 1" horizontal line of the cross-section paper, at a point exactly above the place where 
 you have marked the intersection of the 1" contour line on the folded edge. For. the 2" con- 
 tour intersection put a dot on the 2" horizontal line; and so on until you have put dots on the 
 proper horizontal lines for all the contour intersections, and have reached sea level again at B. 
 Next connect the dots by means of a smooth curved line, avoiding sharp angles. When 
 partly drawn, your cross section should be similar to Fig. 19. 
 Horizontal The scale of the map was 1 inch = l foot. Therefore the horizontal scale of your cross 
 
 and vertical section is the same, and you should print or write this below your cross section, thus : Hori- 
 scale. 
 
 zontal Scale 1 inch = 1 foot. What is the vertical scale of your cross section? 
 
 Above the cross section, write "Cross Section, along the line A-B 
 
 on Map, Fig. 15." Always mark the vertical and horizontal scale, and the line along which 
 it is taken, on every cross section you make. 
 
 110 
 
1 1 1 _ 1 , I i 1 —J __- . ( 1 1 1 1 1 1 . ' 1 ' 1 — 
 
 . . 1 , , ___ ___ _ . 
 
 i l—J 1 . i 1 , 1 1 1 I 1 — 1 ' 
 
 — — — ■ — I. i ■ — — — | — i i — — — i — i i i i j , i L_J , , __ i 
 
 — __ , , __ . 
 
 »' — I — ' — • — ' — ' ' ' 1 — • 1 — < — i 1 • — ' 1 1 — 1 — . 1 — i — 1 — I — i — i , i - , i i ; 
 :____: zzEffi 
 
 , 
 
 
• 
 
Streams 
 
 RELIEF 
 
 
 Contours 
 
 Figures 
 
 (showing heights above (showing height above 
 
 mean sea level instru- sea < horizontal form, 
 
 mentally determined) and steevness of slope 
 
 Depression 
 contours 
 
 of the surface) 
 
 Cliffs 
 
 Falls and 
 rapids 
 
 Intermittent 
 streams 
 
 Mine dumps 
 
 WATER 
 
 A 
 
 Canals and 
 ditches 
 
 Levees 
 
 Sand and 
 sand dunes 
 
 Aqueduct 
 
 Aqueduct 
 tunnel 
 
 I 
 
 Lake or 
 pond 
 
 Intermittent 
 lake 
 
 
 
 Glacier 
 
 Spring 
 
 Salt marsh Fresh marsh 
 
 CULTURE 
 
 A 
 
 Submerged 
 marsh 
 
 = — ii it i fin 
 
 I I I I I I I I I 
 
 I I I I I I *=*= 
 
 Tidal flat 
 
 City or 
 village 
 
 Roads and Private or 
 
 buildings secondary road 
 
 Trail 
 
 Railroads 
 
 Electric railroad 
 in roadway 
 
 i 
 
 n 
 
 ,x* 
 
 v ~— ««> 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ford 
 
 Dam 
 
 Locks 
 
 U.S.township and State line 
 section lines 
 
 County line Civil township 
 line 
 
 U'1I< 
 
 Boundary 
 monument 
 
 Bench mark 
 
 Church or 
 schoolhouse 
 
 Coke ovens 
 
 Oil wells 
 
 Mine or 
 quarry 
 
 Prospect 
 
 
 Tunnel 
 
 Wharves 
 
 Breakwater 
 and jetties 
 
 Drawbridges 
 
 Bridges 
 
 Ferry 
 
 Reservation 
 line 
 
 Land-grant City.village,or Park or 
 
 line borough line cemetery line 
 
 Triungulation 
 station 
 
 U.S. mineral 
 monument 
 
 $, LS 
 
 %LH 
 
 Shaft 
 
 Mine tunnel Mine tunnel Light-ship 
 
 (showing direction) (direction unknown) 
 
 Lighthouse 
 
 Life-saving 
 station 
 
 Fig. 20. — Conventional Signs used on Atlas Sheets of the United States Geological Survey's Topographic Maps. 
 
 1 
 
XXV.— MAKING A CROSS SECTION AND A STREAM PROFILE 
 FROM A UNITED STATES TOPOGRAPHIC MAP 
 
 Materials. For Each Student. — Ruler. Pencil. Several sheets of plain paper. Montross sheet. Maryland- 
 
 Virginia. 
 
 Purpose. To teach the understanding of the conventional signs used on a topographic map, and the 
 
 making of cross sections and profiles from such maps. 
 
 Conven- Figure 20 illustrates the conventional signs used on the United States Geological Survey 
 
 tions of a 
 
 topographic topographic maps. What color is used for contour lines? > What is 
 
 map. 
 
 meant by Relief? 
 
 What color is used for road, county, and state lines, and for buildings and cities ? 
 
 Why should these features be called cultural features? 
 
 What color is used to indicate water ? 
 
 Cross sec- Make a cross section (on accompanying sheet of cross-section paper) of part of the 
 
 tionofa Montross sheet along a line between Stony Hill and Montross, proceeding as you did in 
 topographic making the cross section of the simple contour map in the preceding exercise. A very sharp 
 ma P- pencil and even greater care will be necessary. In making the cross section note carefully 
 
 whether you are crossing a valley or a divide between valleys. 
 
 Exaggera- What is the horizontal scale of the map ? 
 
 tion of 
 
 relief in a What is the contour interval? '_ What is the vertical scale of your 
 
 cross 
 
 sec ion. cross section ? If the horizontal scale of your 
 
 cross section is one inch = one mile, and your vertical scale is \ inch = 20 feet, how much is 
 
 your vertical scale exaggerated? (5280 feet = l 
 
 mile, therefore 5280 feet = linch horizontal scale. 8 x20 = 160 feet, therefore 160 feet = 1 inch 
 vertical scale. Therefore in the cross section 160 feet vertical scale equals 5280 feet in 
 the horizontal scale.) 
 
 Why would it have been much better to use a vertical scale \ inch = 80 feet ? .... 
 
 J 
 
 Plot the same cross section on this scale. What is the exaggeration of the vertical scale in 
 
 111 
 
this case ? Always endeavor to avoid too great 
 
 exaggerations of the vertical scale in making cross sections and profiles. 
 Profile of On the map locate the main stream, which occupies the valley between Chilton and 
 
 a stream Stratford, and is crossed by the road which connects these villages. Trace this stream from 
 va ey ' its source to the point where it flows into the lake. 
 
 How many contour lines does the main stream cross in that distance? 
 
 How many feet, therefore, does it descend? In about how many 
 
 miles ? 
 
 Make a profile of this valley between its source and its entrance into the lake. The method 
 is the same as for making a cross section, except as follows : Start at the left-hand end of 
 the folded paper in marking the intersections of the contours. As often as the stream bends 
 appreciably, swing your folded edge of paper so that it is continually parallel to the stream's 
 course. Be careful to keep the pivot point on the map and on the folded edge of the paper 
 identical when swinging the paper to a new direction. Plot the results on the cross-section 
 paper, using this time a vertical scale of \" = 40 feet. 
 
 Where is the stream's profile steepest? 
 
 In what portion of its course is it most gentle? 
 
 What is its average descent per mile near its source ? 
 
 In the middle of its course? 
 
 What information regarding a region can be gained at a glance from a cross section ? 
 
 Of what practical use would a profile of two possible roads, that he might follow, be to a 
 farmer intending to haul grain to town ? 
 
 112 
 
9 PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE LANDS 
 
 XXVI. — PROCESSES OF EROSION AND DEPOSITION 
 
 Materials. For General Class Use. — Tank and land model. Spray, nozzle, and hose. (The nozzle should be 
 
 of the kind used in spraying trees for insects.) Water under pressure. 
 
 Purpose. To study some of the erosional and depositional processes of nature by actual observation of 
 
 their progress in miniature. 
 
 The land This land form is supposed to have been newly uplifted from beneath the sea, and no 
 
 form. rain has as yet fallen upon it. It is composed of alternate layers of sediment, formed of 
 
 different kinds of material. 
 
 With reference to the compass directions, describe the topography of the land form. 
 
 Where is it hilly? 
 
 Where has it plains? 
 
 Are there any mountain ranges ? 
 
 Are there plateaus ? Any isolated peaks? 
 
 what material is the surface layer composed? 
 
 Of 
 
 Character- Turn the spray upon the land surface. Have it of sufficient volume to develop streams, 
 
 istics of a b u fc avoid having the drops of water too coarse. This spraying is to simulate, as nearly as 
 
 young land poggikig the rainfall of nature, 
 
 surface. r 
 
 What determines the courses of the streams as they flow at first? , 
 
 . Why are such 
 
 streams called consequent streams? 
 
 Do any lakes form ? What is the 
 
 origin of their basins? 
 
 Are the divide areas between the stream courses flat or ridgelike ? 
 
 What age condition of a land surface does the presence of consequent 
 
 streams, lakes, and flat-topped divides indicate? 
 
 Examine the stream currents carefully. Are they carrying sediment ? 
 
 113 
 
Transpor- If so, where do they get it? 
 
 tation and 
 
 erosion 
 
 processes. 
 
 Are they carrying sand particles? How are 
 
 the sand particles moved along? 
 
 How much larger stream do you think would be required 
 
 to move a pebble as big as your fist? How 
 
 are clay particles carried along? , 
 
 Can you tell whether the streams are carrying any material 
 
 in solution? 
 
 As the currents transport the sand and clay particles, what is the effect on the stream 
 
 valleys? 
 
 Where are they deepened most? 
 
 What is meant by headwater erosion? 
 
 Do the main streams follow straight courses ? What causes them to meander ? 
 
 What is the effect of this meandering on the width of their valleys ? .. 
 What is meant by lateral cutting of a stream? 
 
 By undercutting f .. 
 
 114 
 
What is the shape of the cross section of the stream valleys as they are first cut ? 
 How is this "gorge-form " cross section changed by the lateral cutting? 
 
 Do tributary streams first deepen their valleys near their sources or at their junction 
 
 with the main valleys? How do you explain 
 
 this? 1 
 
 What effect has the development of tributary valleys on the flat-topped divides? 
 
 Waterfalls. Have any waterfalls developed in the stream valleys? What is their 
 
 cause? 
 
 Why does a deep pool form beneath them ? 
 
 Why do the waterfalls not remain stationary in position ? 
 
 In which direction do their crests move ? 
 
 Deposi- Are the sand particles, which the currents are rolling along, carried uninterruptedly to the 
 
 tional 
 
 processes. still water at the mouths of the main streams ? Where do they lodge ? 
 
 What do they form? Are river bars permanent? 
 
 115 
 
What is the effect of the formation of a bar on the course of a stream? 
 
 What large river do 
 
 you know of which has many sandbars? 
 
 Why are these dangerous to navigation ? 
 
 Which can carry the most sediment, a slow current or a fast one? 
 
 Where are currents fastest, on steep or on gentle slopes ? 
 
 If a stream has much sediment in the upper, steep part of its 
 
 course, what becomes ' of this sediment when the stream flows over a gentler slope ? 
 
 Examine the streams on the land form to find 
 
 such a condition. What kind of a topographic feature results? 
 
 Describe and make a small sketch of an alluvial fan. 
 
 Watch the stream course as it flows over the alluvial fan ; why does it shift its position ? 
 
 Does the building up of the alluvial fan make the slope of the stream steeper or more gentle 
 at this point? What is the grade of a stream ? 
 
 116 
 

 What becomes of the sediment that the stream carries when it enters the still water ? 
 
 Where are the sand particles deposited? 
 
 Where are the clay particles deposited? 
 
 Which kind of deposit, sand or clay, covers 
 
 the larger area of the bottom of the still-water basin? 
 
 What topographic form do the sand particles build up as they are deposited in the still 
 
 water? Is the slope of the top of the delta steep or gentle? 
 
 How does the delta compare and contrast with the alluvial fan in 
 
 outline and slopes? . 
 
 117 
 
• 
 
 XX VII. — INTRODUCTION TO THE STUDY OF LAND FORMS 
 
 Purpose. 
 
 Types of 
 land forms. 
 
 Factors in 
 the devel- 
 opment of 
 land forms. 
 
 Topo- 
 graphic 
 provinces 
 of the 
 United 
 States. 
 
 To teach the simple origin of land forms, and the factors which give them complexity. 
 
 Note: — This section should be carefully studied before going on with the study of the land in its topo- 
 graphic and cultural relations. 
 
 Most land forms are the result of the processes of denudation operating on the rocks 
 of the earth's crust. 
 
 The nature and configuration of these forms are dependent primarily and fundamentally 
 on the position and structure of the rocks. There are two fundamental types occupying large 
 areas : — 
 
 1. The Plain-plateau Type: The rocks are in horizontal or nearly horizontal beds. 
 
 2. The True-mountain Type : The rocks are folded, faulted, and tilted, or are massive 
 crystalline rocks. 
 
 Most lesser land forms are resultant upon variations in the conditions and nature of the 
 denudation of these simple, original forms. 
 
 The following factors condition the variation : — 
 
 (a) The nature of the rock, whether consolidated, or unconsolidated, or partly consolidated. 
 
 (6) The length of time that the region has been exposed to denudation. 
 
 (c) The elevation of the region above sea level, and its distance from the sea. 
 
 (d) The climate, — whether humid or arid. 
 
 (e) Accidents which have interfered with the normal development of the region. Glaci- 
 ation and volcanic disturbances, for example, may be considered as such accidents. 
 
 With a knowledge of the primary type, whether Plain-plateau or True-mountain, and a 
 consideration of the degree to which the five factors enumerated above have been operative, 
 we can interpret most land forms. Or, by a consideration of the land forms, we can appreciate 
 the factors which determine their present condition. 
 
 That part of North America which comprises the United States is capable of being divided 
 into a comparatively small number of areas, each of which constitutes a physiographic unit, or 
 province. Moreover, these units bear a most interesting physiographic relation to each other ; 
 and, taken collectively, they illustrate practically the whole science of the physical geography 
 of the land. Again, in each of these physiographic provinces the United States Geological 
 Survey has made very fine contour maps, and from these may be chosen one or more which 
 are typical of the province. 
 
 The United States, therefore, offers to the American student an excellent opportunity to 
 become acquainted with the science of physical geography of the land in some of its most in- 
 teresting phases, and to gain a knowledge of the physiographic provinces, and the influence 
 their topography and structure have had on the development of the land, its present industries, 
 and its future possibilities. 
 
 The following sections constitute such a study of the regions of the United States. The 
 studies go from the simple to the complex, and, when they are completed, the student should 
 have a comprehensive knowledge of the location of the broader physiographic divisions of the 
 country ; and an understanding of the topographic, climatic, and cultural relations of each. 
 
 119 
 
3 
 
 
 Bill! 
 22 
 
 I "• 
 
 1 1 
 
 
 
 °OC< 
 
 III 
 
 a, 
 
 S 
 
 
 u 
 
 §•5 
 
 
 *3* 
 
 1 
 
 M 
 
 
 ^3 2 
 J ft, 
 
 5 
 
 + + +• 
 
 
 °: 
 
 11 
 S-s 
 
 4 
 
 e 1 
 
XXVI II.— GLACIAL-LAKE PLAINS 
 
 Materials. 
 
 Purpose. 
 
 Introduc- 
 tory. 
 
 Extent of 
 the Glacial- 
 Lake areas. 
 
 For Each Student. — United States Geological Survey Map of the United States (size 18x28 
 inches) with contours. Fargo sheet, North Dakota-Minnesota. Colored pencils. 
 
 To study a very young plain and the influence it exerts on human habitation and industrial 
 development. 
 
 When the Continental Glacier of the Glacial Period was receding, after the last (or Wis- 
 consin) advance of the ice (Text-book, Chapter VIII), and had melted back to points near the 
 northern boundary line of the United States, there were times when the ice front remained 
 stationary for a considerable interval. During this long period of recession the ice mass 
 dammed up the north-flowing rivers (for example, the Red River of the North), and their 
 waters spread out and formed huge lakes. (See Text-book, pp. 78 and 149.) Into these lakes 
 much sediment was poured by the streams from the glacier and from the land, and this sedi- 
 ment was deposited on the lake bottom. Finally, after the glacier had melted away com- 
 pletely, the lake waters drained off and the bottoms of the lakes became dry land. 
 
 Figure 21 is a diagram map of the United States on which have been outlined the 
 different physiographic regions studied in this and succeeding sections. The areas which are 
 marked " G. L. P." on the map were formerly bottoms of glacial lakes. Plot the outlines of 
 these Glacial-Lake Plains on your contour map of the United States. Latitude and longitude, 
 the position of state boundary lines, and the location of cities offer the best aids in locating 
 the outline. Extend the Glacial-Lake Agassiz outlines into Canada. 
 
 Examine the areas as you have outlined them on your map of the United States. About 
 what proportion of the area of the United States was once covered by glacial lakes ? 
 
 What two places along the outlines seem to 
 
 have been outlets to these lakes? 
 
 What is the highest contour bordering each of these out- 
 
 flow channels ? 
 
 Why was there an island in the Glacial-Lake Agassiz ? 
 
 With green pencil, color in lightly 
 
 (on your contour map of the United States) the regions of the Glacial-Lake Plains. Fill in 
 (with green also) a square for a legend, as indicated on the outline map. Label this square 
 
 Study of a « Glacial-Lake Plains." 
 
 of the Gla- Examine the Fargo (N. D.) sheet. What is the most northern degree of latitude shown ? 
 
 cial-Lake 
 
 Plains. The most southern? Between what 
 
 121 
 
degrees of longitude is the area included? 
 
 Locate this area on your United States map and outline it with ink. Letter or write in the 
 name of the sheet beside the rectangle you have drawn. How much larger is the horizontal 
 
 scale of the topographic map than that of the United States map ? 
 
 What is the contour interval of the topographic sheet ? 
 
 A typical Make a cross section between the S of Sabin and the H of Horace, using the same hori- 
 
 cross sec- zontal scale as that of the map, and allowing one vertical division of the cross-section paper 
 
 tion. £ or everv 20 feet of elevation. On each cross section you make always mark the name of the 
 
 sheet, the points between which it is taken, the horizontal scale, and the vertical scale adopted. 
 
 What, in general, is the nature of this land surface, as shown by the distance apart of the 
 
 contour lines and the cross section you have made? 
 
 What is the shape of • the stream 
 
 valleys as shown by your cross section ? 
 
 How deep are they ? 
 
 How wide? 
 
 Are this 
 
 shape and size characteristic of an old or young valley? 
 
 What is the nature of the divides between the stream 
 
 valleys ? Why would rain water run off 
 
 very slowly from this region? In which 
 
 direction do the main streams flow? ;._ What 
 
 is the difference in elevation between the highest and lowest points on the map ? 
 
 Where is the highest point ? 
 
 The lowest point ? 
 
 What are the directions of the wagon roads in this region ? 
 
 What is their pattern, or 
 
 arrangement ? Why is it possible for the 
 
 railroads to have such straight courses? 
 
 What kind of deposits are laid down in still water, fine or coarse grained? 
 
 What two reasons can you give why this should be a fine agricultural region? 
 
 122 
 
Why are many farmers now crossing into Canada to the region north of this part of the 
 United States? 
 
 Count the number of houses in ten adjoining squares. Allowing 
 
 five people to each house, what is the average population per square mile in this section ? 
 
 What is the position of the houses with 
 
 respect to the roads ? ' 
 
 Write a short paragraph, below, explaining why the deposit of sediment over a lake 
 bottom would, on the disappearance of the lake waters, give a region of this nature, and tell 
 why such a region encourages agricultural industry. 
 
 123 
 
XXIX.— THE MISSISSIPPI FLOOD PLAIN AND DELTA 
 
 Materials. For Each Student.— Geological survey map of the United States, used in preceding exercise. 
 
 Donaldsonville (La.) sheet. Colored pencils. 
 
 For General Class Use. — Chart No. 14. Mississippi River Commission. The Fargo (N. D.) sheet. 
 
 Purpose. To study a very young plain in process of formation by liver deposit; and the conditions affect- 
 
 ing human occupation of this plain. 
 
 Introduc- 
 tory. 
 
 Extent of 
 the Missis- 
 sippi Flood- 
 plain and 
 Delta area. 
 
 The Mississippi River, in its lower course, carries enormous amounts of sediment in its 
 waters. In places it deposits some of this sediment, in others it secures more. At its mouth 
 it deposits all its load. The flood plain and delta of the Mississippi are built up of such sedi- 
 ment deposits, and the river is continually modifying the flood plain, and extending the delta. 
 (See Text-book, pp. 61-66, 325-328.) 
 
 On your contour map of the United States plot the outline of the area marked M. Fl. P. 
 and D. on Fig. 21. About what proportion of the area of the United States does the Missis- 
 sippi Flood-plain and Delta region constitute? What is the approximate 
 
 length of this area in miles? 1 What is its 
 
 average width? What is the pattern of the 
 
 smaller streams on the flood plain and delta? 
 
 Study of 
 Mississippi 
 liver 
 Jhart 
 "No. 14. 
 
 Are they many or few as compared to adjoining regions ? 
 
 At the mouth of the Ohio River the altitude of the Mississippi River is 294 feet above the sea. 
 The distance from the mouth of the Ohio to the mouth (head of passes) of the Mississippi is 
 1060 miles. What is the average descent (in feet per mile) of the Mississippi between the 
 
 mouth of the Ohio and its mouth at the Gulf of Mexico ? 
 
 With blue pencil, color in lightly on your contour map of the United States the area of 
 the Mississippi Flood-plain and Delta region. Fill in (with blue pencil also) a legend square, 
 as indicated on the outline map (Fig. 21). 
 
 What is the scale of this chart? 
 
 What is the nature of the river's course as shown on this chart? 
 
 125 
 
How long are the river bends? 
 
 . On which side of the bends is the river depositing material? 
 
 Do these bars have a constant shape and position ? (See red lines and legend explaining them.) 
 
 Which is the shortest course, around the bends or across the necks of land between them ? 
 
 Why does the river often change its course, especially during a 
 
 flood when part of the waters can flow over such necks of land? 
 
 What does the abandoned portion of the river become after a new course is established? 
 
 Give an example of such a change as shown 
 
 on the chart. 
 
 Why must the river be often resurveyed' 
 
 Study of a The Donaldsonville (La.) sheet shows, in detail, typical conditions of this region. Locate 
 
 typical Mis- and plot the area of this sheet on your United States map, outlining it with ink. Letter or 
 
 sissippi wr ite in the name of the sheet. 
 
 Flood-plain 
 
 and Delta 
 
 area W T hat is the contour interval on this sheet ? Why was not a 
 
 larger interval used? 
 
 Make a cross section between Bayou Verrette and the nearest point of the swamp on the 
 opposite (east) side of the river. Allow one vertical division of your cross-section paper for 
 every ten feet of elevation. On the cross section, indicate the line along which it is made, and 
 also the horizontal and vertical scale. 
 
 126 
 
As shown by your cross section, where are the highest points in the flood plain ? 
 How do you explain this condition? (Natural levee, Text-book, p. 62.) 
 
 In what direction do the small streams near the Mississippi flow? 
 
 Why can not the large 
 
 swamps be drained? 
 
 Why does the Mississippi so readily change its course in flood times ? 
 
 What is the stage of the development of drainage conditions here, as compared to those in 
 the Glacial-Lake Plains regions? 
 
 Is this, then, a younger or older region in development than the Glacial-Lake Plains areas ? 
 
 Human Describe the position and course of the main roads of this area, 
 
 occupation. 
 
 How do you account for their arrangement ? 
 
 127 
 
What is the direction of the secondary roads ? 
 
 .Where do they end ? 
 
 What is the average width of the habitable area of the inner flood plain, as shown on this 
 
 sheet? 
 
 Where are the majority of the houses located? 
 
 About how many houses are there along a 
 
 mile of river bank? What population per 
 
 square mile does this indicate? 
 
 Does such a population indicate that the flood plain is rich or poor agricultural land ? 
 
 Why is a region with such large areas of swamp land not healthful? 
 
 Write a short paragraph summarizing the conditions along the Mississippi River in its 
 lower course. 
 
 128 
 
XXX.— THE COASTAL PLAIN 
 
 Materials. For Each Student. — The contour map of the United States. Winterville (N.C.) sheet. Colored 
 
 pencils. 
 
 For General Class Use. — Fargo (N.D.) sheet. Donaldsonville (La.) sheet. 
 
 Purpose. To study a young plain recently uplifted above sea level, and to compare the conditions on it 
 
 with that of other young plains previously studied. 
 
 Introduc- 
 tory. 
 
 Extent of 
 the Coastal 
 Plain. 
 
 The region of the United States bordering the eastern and southern coast, from New 
 York City southward to Mexico, except where broken by the Mississippi flood plain and 
 delta, is a Coastal Plain. That is, it consists of layers of sediment deposited on the ocean 
 floor and then, by a change in the level of the land, lifted out of the water. (Text-book, pp. 
 72-75, 305-306.) 
 
 On your contour map of the United States plot the outlines of the areas marked Coastal 
 Plain in Fig. 21. Estimate what proportion of the area of the United States the Coastal Plain 
 
 region constitutes. Of what states does it 
 
 form the larger part? 
 
 Broad Southern Florida is different from the rest of the Coastal Plain in that it is underlain by 
 
 relations. limestone. How may this fact account for the many lakes mapped on its surface ? (Text- 
 
 book, p. 60.) 
 
 What other region having many lakes have you studied? 
 
 What does the presence of lakes and swamps indicate as to drainage conditions ? 
 
 Along the inland margin of the Coastal Plain, on the Atlantic coast, the soft, loose sedi- 
 ments of the plain rest against more resistant crystalline rocks, such as granites, schists, and 
 gneisses. The rivers of this region flow down across these hard rocks, and then on to the soft 
 strata of the Coastal Plain. In which of these classes of rock can streams erode the more 
 
 rapidly? Why would the •" Fall Line" 
 
 (as this contact line of the hard and soft rocks is called) be an especially favorable site for 
 
 129 
 
the growth of cities ?. 
 
 Make a list of the important cities located along the "Fall Line," and the river on which they 
 are situated. 
 
 On your contour map of the United States color in lightly, with yellow pencil, the area of 
 
 the Coastal Plain regions. Fill in a legend square (with yellow pencil also) as indicated on 
 
 the diagram map (Fig. 21) and mark it Coastal Plains. 
 
 Study of a The Winterville (N.C.) sheet presents, in detail, typical conditions of the Coastal Plain 
 
 typical sec- area. Locate and plot the area of this sheet on your United States map, outlining it with ink. 
 
 tion of the Letter or write in the name of the sheet. 
 
 C 03. S tell 
 
 plain What would be the surface topography of a coastal plain just after it was lifted above the 
 sea? 
 
 What has happened to this part of the plain since its uplift above the sea ? 
 
 What areas have 
 
 conditions resembling the original surface? 
 
 What do such divides between streams indicate 
 
 as to the age of the region where they occur ? 
 
 [ What is the contour interval of this sheet ? 
 
 What is the present average elevation of the region above the sea 
 
 level ? 
 
 130 
 
Profile of a Make a longitudinal profile (in the manner directed in exercise No. XXV) of the valley 
 
 Coastal f Hardee Creek from its mouth at the Tar River to its source. Where is the slope of the 
 ^Plain 
 
 ^^^ ' valley greatest, near its mouth or its source? 
 
 What does this indicate as to the kind and position of the erosion which the stream is 
 
 accomplishing? 
 
 How deep is this valley at a point about two miles from its mouth? 
 
 How wide? 
 
 What form of cross section has it? 
 
 i_ How will this cross section be modified as time passes ? 
 
 Comparison What similarities in valley form have the streams on this sheet with those of the Fargo 
 with drain- 
 age condi- sheet ? 
 tions on 
 other young 
 plains. 
 
 What differences in the conditions in the valley bottoms ? 
 
 How may the greater elevation 
 
 of the Fargo region help to account for the less swampy conditions on it ? 
 
 What is the 
 
 elevation above sea level of the major portion of the area of Donaldsonville, Louisiana sheet ? 
 
 How does the amount of swamp land there 
 
 compare with that on the Winterville sheet ? 
 
 What similarity in the nature of the divides exists between the Fargo region and the Winter- 
 ville Coastal Plain region? 
 
 131 
 
Human What is the pattern of the roads on the Winterville sheet as compared to the Fargo sheet ? 
 
 occupation. 
 
 Is this difference wholly or partly due to a difference in topography ? 
 What areas do the roads on the Winterville sheet especially avoid ? 
 
 On comparing the 
 
 courses of the railroad lines and the wagon roads on the Winterville sheet, what reasons can 
 you suggest for the greater irregularity of the wagon roads? 
 
 How does the density of population in this area compare with that indicated on the Fargo 
 sheet and the Donaldsonville sheet? 
 
 How do you account for the difference ? 
 
 What do 
 
 such place names as " Green's Mill Run," " Harris Mill Run," " Plank Road," " Gum Swamp," 
 and the comparative sparseness of the population suggest as to the industry of the region ? 
 
 Write a short paragraph summarizing the topographic conditions which characterize the 
 Coastal Plains province and the nature of its settlement. 
 
 132 
 
XXXI. — THE GREAT PLAINS 
 
 Materials. For Each Student. — Contour map of the United States. Mt. Carrizo (Col.) sheet, Syracuse 
 
 (Kan.) sheet, Kearney (Neb.) sheet. Colored pencils. 
 
 Purpose. To study the development of topography, and its influence on settlement, in a region of high 
 
 plains which has an arid climate. 
 
 Introduc- 
 tory. 
 
 Location 
 and extent 
 of the Great 
 Plains. 
 
 The plains studied in the preceding exercises were of comparatively low elevation, and in 
 a humid climate. The Great Plains region has, in general, a much greater elevation and a 
 much more arid climate. The rocks, however, are similar in origin and position to those of 
 the Coastal Plains, — that is, they are sediments laid down in former seas, and still lie in 
 nearly horizontal position ; but, being more firmly consolidated, they are more resistant to 
 denudation than the rocks of the Coastal Plains. Therefore, in the Great Plains we study the 
 topography resulting when a region of plains has been subjected to a marked uplift, and 
 exposed to the agents of weathering and erosion in an arid climate; also, the effects of such a 
 climate on the human occupation of the region. (Text-book, pp. 77, 326-327.) 
 
 On your contour map of the United States outline the area of the Great Plains, as shown 
 on the diagram map (Fig. 21). What meridian marks the general eastern limit of the Great 
 
 Plains? What determines their western 
 
 boundary? What is their approximate ele- 
 vation above the sea, as shown by the contour lines on the United States contour map ? 
 
 How does this compare with the elevation of 
 
 the Coastal Plains ? 
 
 Parts of what states are included in the area of the Great Plains ? 
 
 • 
 
 How do the Great Plains compare in extent with the regions previously studied ? 
 
 What is 
 
 the general industrial and agricultural development of the Great Plains, as indicated by the 
 number of important cities on them, and as compared in this respect wifh the regions previ- 
 ously studied? 
 
 133 
 
Color in lightly (with brown pencil) the area of the Great Plains as you have outlined it 
 
 on your United States contour map. Also color in a legend square with brown, and mark it 
 
 Great Plains. 
 
 Study of Locate the position of the Mt. Carrizo (Col.) sheet on the United States map and outline 
 
 typical with ink the area it includes. Also letter or write in the name of the sheet on the map. 
 
 areas of the 
 
 Great Near which border of the Great Plains is this area located ? 
 
 Plains. 
 
 What is the elevation of this border as compared to the Mississippi 
 
 Valley in the same latitude ? 
 
 What average slope (approximately) would this give to 
 
 streams flowing toward the east ? 
 
 How would such a slope affect their power of erosion? 
 
 Topog- Make a cross section along a line extending from a point 2 inches southeast of the last 
 
 raphy of « a " in Animas, through the " z " in Mt. Carrizo, and continuing for 3£ inches in the same 
 the western diction. Use the same horizontal scale as that of the map, and let one division of the cross- 
 section paper equal one hundred feet in the vertical scale. 
 
 What is the nature of the stream valleys as shown by this cross section ? 
 
 What does the fact that the streams are marked by dotted blue lines indicate ? (See Fig. 20.) 
 If after a long dry period, a heavy rain occurred, why would the water drain off quickly ? 
 
 What would be the effect of this rapid run-off on 
 
 the stream valleys? 
 
 Why would erosion be more effective than weathering in this region? . 
 
 134 
 
What is the topogra- 
 phy of the divide areas between streams ? 
 
 Describe the shape, slopes, and top of Mount Carrizo as shown by the map and your cross 
 section. 
 
 Is it a true mountain ? What kind of a land form is it ? 
 
 Why do mesas develop extensively in arid and not in humid regions, 
 
 even though both have horizontal strata? 
 
 What is the difference between a butte and a mesa 
 
 as illustrated in Potato Butte and Fowler Mesa? 
 
 Human Some habitations are undoubtedly located in this area, but they are not shown on this 
 
 occupation map. What, however, does the small number of roads indicate as to the extent of settlement ? 
 along west- 
 
 What two conditions would prohibit dense set- 
 tlement in this region ? 
 
 Topog- Locate the position of the Syracuse (Kan.) sheet on the United States map and outline 
 
 raphy of with ink the area it includes. Also letter or write in the name of the sheet on the map. 
 
 the Central What reasons can you suggest why the southern part of this area is much less dissected 
 
 Great 
 Plains. 
 
 than the Mt. Carrizo region? 
 
 Make a cross section of the country on a line between Gognac 
 
 in the southeast corner, and Edwin about twelve miles to the northwest. What is the general 
 
 topography of the country as shown by this cross section ? 
 
 135 
 
This is typical of wide expanses 
 
 of the Great Plains. Why is there much greater dissection in the northern part of the sheet ? 
 
 What effect has this greater dissection on the course of the roads? 
 
 What is the significance 
 
 of the small areas inclosed by saw-edged brown lines (Fig. 20) ? 
 
 Human How does this region compare in density of population (as indicated by roads and towns) 
 
 occupation 
 
 in Central w i tn that of the Mt. Carrizo region ? 
 
 Great 
 
 What does the scattered location of the houses suggest as 
 
 to the agricultural possibilities of this region ? 
 
 What curious relation do you note regarding 
 
 the number of houses and streets in the towns of Johnson and Kendall ? 
 
 Topog- Locate the position of the Kearney (Neb.) sheet on the United States map, and outline 
 
 raphy of with ink the area it includes. Also letter or write in the name of the sheet on the map. 
 
 the eastern What is the character of the eastern portion of Platte River, as shown by this map ? 
 
 border of r ' * 
 
 the Great 
 
 Plains. 
 
 What causes this braided channel condition ? 
 
 What is the source of the sediment supply ? 
 
 Why is it deposited in this eastern portion of the river? 
 
 What is the nature of the topogra- 
 
 136 
 
phy to the north of the Platte River ? 
 
 To the south? 
 
 These numerous depressions and small, 
 
 low summits are the topography of a sandhill area. What is the source of the sand supply ? 
 
 What must be the prevailing wind direction? 
 
 Human What difference is shown on this sheet in the extent of continuously flowing streams 
 
 occupation 
 
 o eastern ag com p are( j to those of the Central and Western Great Plains areas ? 
 
 border. r 
 
 What does this indicate 
 
 as to the difference in climate from west to east? 
 
 What is the effect of this difference in 
 
 climate on the density of settlement? 
 
 What difference in the nature of agricultural industry, 
 
 in the western and eastern parts of the Great Plains, does this difference in density of popula- 
 tion indicate? 
 
 Write a short paragraph summarizing the origin and nature of the topography, and the 
 human occupation of the Great Plains region. 
 
 137 
 
* 
 
 ( 
 
XXXII.— THE APPALACHIAN PLATEAU 
 
 Materials. 
 
 Purpose. 
 
 Introduc- 
 tory. 
 
 Location 
 and extent 
 of the 
 region. 
 
 For Each Student. — The contour map of the United States. The Centerpoint (W.Va.) sheet. 
 Colored pencils. 
 
 For General Class Use. — The Mt. Carrizo (Col.) sheet. 
 
 To study the topography and settlement in a region of elevated horizontal strata (a high plain 
 or plateau) where the climate is humid, and ivhich has been denuded for a long period. 
 
 The Appalachian Plateau bears the same relation to the Appalachian Mountains that the 
 Great Plains do to the Eocky Mountains, — that is, the Appalachian Plateau is a region of 
 elevated, horizontal strata, located on the inland side of the Appalachian Mountains. The 
 Appalachian Plateau contrasts with the Great Plains in that it lies in a humid climate, has 
 been denuded longer, and is made up of harder rocks than the Great Plains. (Text-book, 
 p. 84.) 
 
 On your contour map of the United States outline the area of the Appalachian Plateau, 
 as shown on the diagram map (Fig. 21). What is the size of this region as compared to that of 
 
 the Great Plains? What parts of what 
 
 states are included in it? 
 
 • What is the approximate elevation of the Appalachian Plateau? 
 
 How does this compare with the Great Plains 
 
 region ? 
 
 Color in, with ruled brown lines (as indicated by the pattern of the legend square on the 
 diagram map, Fig. 21), the area of the Appalachian Plateau as you have outlined it on your 
 United States contour map. Add the proper legend square, and mark it, Appal. Plat. 
 Study of a Locate the position of. the Centerpoint ( W. Va.) sheet on the United States map and out- 
 
 typical sec- ii ne w ith ink the area it includes. Also letter or write in the name of the sheet. 
 tion of the g et ( j own t he height of ten different hill summits from different parts of the sheet. 
 
 chian 
 
 Plateau. 
 
 a 
 
 139 
 
How do they compare in height? 
 
 If the valleys were all filled in, what would be the 
 
 appearance of this region ? 
 
 What was the original topography of this region as suggested 
 
 by the uniform height of the hills ? 
 
 What has taken place since? 
 
 Make a cross section along a line running northwestward between the towns of Cascara 
 and Roberts. Use the same horizontal scale as that of the map, and let one division of the 
 cross-section paper equal sixty feet in the vertical scale. (This will give a cross section com- 
 parable (nearly) to the one made of the Great Plains.) In making this cross section it will 
 not be necessary to mark all the intersections of the contour lines ; those showing the eleva- 
 tion of the hilltops and the valley bottoms will be sufficient to give good results. 
 
 What is the form of the valley cross sections in this region as compared with those of the 
 
 Great Plains ? 
 
 How do the divides between streams compare in form in the two regions ? 
 
 What is the age stage of a region which has V-shaped valleys and ridge divides ? 
 
 Is this a more arid or more humid region 
 
 than the Great Plains? Why would greater 
 
 humidity accelerate weathering and the formation of ridge divides? 
 
 140 
 
Human What determines the course of the roads in this region ? 
 
 occupation. 
 
 Why is this the case ? 
 
 Where are the houses and towns located ? 
 
 Why are there so few houses on the ridges and 
 the valley slopes? 
 
 Would this region be easier or more difficult to cross than the Great 
 
 Plains region ? If transportation is so much 
 
 more difficult, why is there a so much greater population than in that part of the Great Plains 
 
 that lies near the mountains ? 
 
 Why do extensive forests still remain in this region ? 
 
 Where the forest is cleared off is the land better suited to sheep raising or the raising of crops ? 
 
 What would be the effect of the discovery 
 
 of coal or iron on the settlement of such a region as this? 
 
 Write a short paragraph describing a plateau region in a humid climate having mature 
 drainage conditions ; and tell why such a region is difficult of settlement and development. 
 
 141 
 
XXXIII. — THE CENTRAL PLAINS REGION 
 
 Materials. For Each Student. — The contour map of the United States. Caldwell (Kan.) sheet, Fargo 
 
 (N.D.) sheet, Centerpoint (W.Va.) sheet. Colored pencils. 
 
 Purpose. To study a plams region in which the erosion cycle has advanced to the old age stage. 
 
 Introduc- The Fargo and Centerpoint sheets are typical of plains regions in which the topography 
 
 tory. and drainage conditions are respectively young and mature. The Caldwell sheet of the 
 
 Central Plains province typifies a plains region where the erosion cycle has continued until 
 
 the country has acquired the characteristics of a plains region in old age. Thus the three 
 
 regions, of which these sheets are typical, illustrate the stages in the development of plains 
 
 topography from youth to old age. (Text-book, pp. 76-78 and 310-314.) 
 
 Location On your contour map of the United States outline the area of the Central Plains province 
 
 and extent as shown on the diagram map (Fig. 21). What proportion of the area of the United States 
 of the Cen- 
 
 province ^ oes tQ is re ^ on constitute? fc What is its 
 
 approximate elevation above sea level? 
 
 What large cities are located in the Central Plains province? 
 
 What reasons can you give to account for the great importance of this region in the develop- 
 ment of the country? 
 
 What is the general slope of the region? 
 
 What are its secondary slopes? 
 
 Color in, with ruled blue lines, (as indicated by the pattern of the legend square on the 
 diagram map, Fig. 21), the area of the Central Plains region as you have outlined it on your 
 
 143 
 
United States contour map. Also add the proper legend square and mark it Central Plains 
 
 region. 
 Study of a Locate the position of the Caldwell (Kan.) sheet on the United States map, and with ink 
 
 typical sec- outline the area it includes. Letter in the name of the sheet. 
 tion of the In wlmt part of the Central Plains is this area located ? 
 
 Central —————— 
 
 Plains in 
 
 the south- Judging by your previous study of regions to the east and west of the 
 
 era part. 
 
 Central Plains, would this area have more or less rainfall than parts of the Central Plains to 
 
 the east? What indications of light rainfall 
 
 do you find on the Caldwell sheet? 
 
 What indications are there, however, that the rainfall 
 
 is sufficient for successful agriculture? 
 
 How many square miles of land are shown on the Caldwell sheet? 
 
 What is the highest point on the sheet? 
 
 The lowest? What is the average direction of slope ? 
 
 .__ Whatthen 
 
 is the general topography of the area ? 
 
 Make a cross section (along a north-south line) between the station Doster, on the 
 St. Louis, Kansas, and Southwestern Railroad, and the Sante Fe Railroad. Use the same 
 horizontal scale as that of the map, and let one section of the cross-section paper equal forty 
 feet vertical scale. 
 
 Make a profile of Pall Creek from its intersection with the St. Louis, Kansas, and South- 
 western Railway to its source, using the same vertical scale as in the cross section. 
 
 What are the shapes of the valley cross sections? 
 
 How do they differ from those of 
 
 the Fargo sheet? 
 
 How are they different from those of the Centerpoint sheet ? 
 144 
 
How do these three regions compare as to the amount of elevation above sea level ? 
 
 By what processes of denudation might the valleys of the Centerpoint sheet be modified so 
 that they would resemble those of the Caldwell sheet? 
 
 Would a long time or a short time, 
 
 physiographically speaking, be required to bring about such a modification? 
 
 Why are there no swamps in the stream bottoms of the Caldwell sheet, although the 
 
 stream courses are meandering? L 
 
 What is meant by saying that a stream has reached grade ? 
 
 What is the character and outline of the divides between the streams ? 
 
 How do these differ from those of the Fargo 
 
 sheet, on the one hand, and the Centerpoint sheet on the other? 
 
 Diagram the pattern of 
 
 145 
 
the drainage system on the Caldwell sheet, showing how a large stream is fed by tributaries, 
 and these in turn by smaller tributaries, and so on. 
 
 Why is such a drainage system called dendritic? 
 
 1 Is the angle between 
 
 a tributary and a main stream acute or obtuse on the upstream side? 
 
 What are the conditions on the Fargo sheet in this respect? 
 
 Human What is the pattern of the wagon roads on the Caldwell sheet ? 
 
 occupation. 
 
 Why is such a pattern possible here ? . 
 
 Do the railways attempt to follow the lines of the divides or of the stream valleys ? 
 
 Are the bends in the course of the Wichita 
 
 and Western division of the Missouri-Pacific Railroad necessitated by the topography, 
 
 or by a desire to touch at every small town ? 
 
 .__ Why would such a course be impossible on 
 146 
 
the Appalachian Plateau ? 
 
 What determines the location of towns in the region of the Caldwell sheet ? 
 
 Why have some towns grown to a larger size than others? 
 
 No houses are plotted on 
 
 this sheet. Would you infer from this that this is a sparsely settled region? 
 
 What do the number of small towns, the number and pattern 
 
 of the roads, and the number of railroads indicate in this connection? 
 
 Write a short paragraph comparing and contrasting the topography, drainage, and 
 human occupation in plains regions in youth, maturity, and old age, as studied in this and 
 the preceding exercises. 
 
 147 
 
c 
 
XXXIV. —THE AREA OF CONTINENTAL GLACIATION IN THE UNITED STATES 
 
 Materials. 
 
 Purpose. 
 
 Introduc- 
 tory. 
 
 Location 
 and extent 
 of the area 
 of conti- 
 nental gla- 
 ciation in 
 the United 
 States. 
 
 For Each Student. — The contour map of the United States. The Whitewater (Wis.) sheet, 
 the Caldwell (Kan.) sheet. 
 
 To gain an appreciation of the area of the United States that was affected by the continental 
 glacier daring the glacial period; and to study a portion of the glaciated area where the effects of 
 the ice advance and retreat were very pronounced. 
 
 In the preceding exercises, plains regions, whose structure was in every case horizontally 
 bedded sediments, have been studied to bring out the variation in their topography and devel- 
 opment as dependent on their age, their elevation, and their location in a humid or arid climate. 
 The erosion cycle in each of the regions thus far studied may be considered as having con- 
 tinued uninterruptedly. However, it may happen that what can be termed an unexpected 
 factor is introduced at some stage in this cycle ; and, in that case, the drainage of the region 
 is said to have suffered an accident. Such an accident was the occurrence of the period of 
 continental glaciation in northern United States. 
 
 In regions where the topography was irregular and well defined, as, for example, in moun- 
 tainous or dissected plateau regions, the effect of the glaciation was not of a dominating char- 
 acter on the appearance of the region as we know it to-day. On regions like the Central 
 Plains area, on the other hand, which had advanced to the gentle relief of an old-age stage, the 
 effect of the glacial advance was very marked and striking. (Text-book, pp. 148-149 and 
 154-156.) 
 
 The line of dashes and circles on the diagram map (Fig. 21) marks the outline of the 
 greatest extension of the ice sheet of the Wisconsin advance of the continental glacier. Plot 
 this outline in ink on your contour map of the United States, using the same symbols. Fill 
 in also a legend square, as indicated on the diagram map (Fig. 21). 
 
 Where did the continental glacier advance farthest south? 
 
 What effect did the presence of 
 
 the Appalachian Plateau have on the advance of the ice in the eastern part of the United 
 
 States? 
 
 Why did the region around the western end of Lake Superior have a similar effect? 
 
 What comparison can you make regarding the number of lakes within and outside the area 
 of glaciation ? 
 
 149 
 
What suggestion as to the origin of the basin of Lake Michigan do you find on 
 
 comparing the direction of its extension and that of the ice lobe that covered this region ? 
 
 To which of the other Great Lakes might this explanation be also applied ? 
 
 Is the region of 
 
 densest population of the United States within or outside of the area of continental glaciation ? 
 
 Study of a The Whitewater (Wis.) sheet illustrates conditions which are more or less common in 
 
 section of ^ a ^ p ar ^ f ^ e Central Plains within the area of continental glaciation. Locate the position 
 
 Plains ela- °^ *^ e sheet on your United States map, and outline its area with ink. Letter or write in the 
 
 ciated area. name of the sheet - 
 
 Is there any system to the topographic features shown on this sheet ? 
 
 What is the condition of the drainage of the area ? 
 
 Have the streams any general direction of flow? How can these drainage 
 
 conditions be accounted for by assuming the former presence of a great ice sheet ? 
 
 What would be the effect, on a region in an old-age stage of development, of dumping great 
 masses of debris without regard to order or system in arrangement, or amount deposited, in 
 
 any one place? : 
 
 150 
 
Why is the drainage system in a glaciated area said to have suffered an accident? 
 
 What is the origin of the many lakes ? 
 
 The band of low hills and depressions which extends across the southeastern portion of 
 the sheet is a terminal moraine. Make a cross section of it on a line between the northern 
 end of Lauderdale Lake and the word " Prairie " of the Prairie du Chien division of the Chi- 
 cago, Milwaukee, and St. Paul Railroad. Let one section of the cross-section paper equal 
 twenty feet in the vertical scale. 
 
 Describe the topography of a moraine ridgeUs shown by this cross section. 
 
 What is the cause of the small lakes and ponds on the moraine ridge ? 
 
 Human What pattern of roads was attempted in this area ? 
 
 occupation. 
 
 What features interfered with carrying it out? 
 
 What reasons seem to justify the building of wagon roads across the large swamps ? 
 
 • 
 
 How are the courses of the roads affected in crossing the moraine ridge ? 
 
 How could large areas of this region be reclaimed for agricultural purposes ? 
 
 151 
 
XXXV. —A REGION OF DRUMLINS 
 
 Materials. For Each Student. — The contour map of the United States. The Weedsport (N.Y.) sheet. 
 
 Purpose. To study a striking topographic phenomenon due to continental glaciation. 
 
 Introduc- Over several large areas within the region of continental glaciation in the United States 
 
 tor y- {e.g. in Massachusetts, New York, and Wisconsin), the ice sheet produced remarkable clusters 
 
 of low hills, to which the name drumlin has been given. Their height, shape, and alignment 
 
 afford evidence as to the direction and nature of the ice movement. So far as known the 
 
 drnmlins are, in the main, composed of unstratified clay and bowlders, called till. (Text-book, 
 
 pp. 152-153.) 
 
 Study of a The Weedsport (N.Y.) sheet shows a typical drumlin area. Locate this area on your 
 
 drumlin United States map, and outline it with ink. Letter or write in the name of the sheet beside 
 
 area. ^he rectangle. 
 
 What is the most striking topographic feature of this sheet? 
 
 What is the pattern, or arrangement, of the many hills ? 
 
 What is their general compass direction? 
 
 What would you infer from the arrangement and development of the drumlin hills as to the 
 
 direction of movement of the ice mass which made them ? 
 
 How do the drumlins influence courses of streams ? 
 
 Study of Are the lakes and swamps in this area due to the presence of the drumlins ? 
 
 • individual 
 drumlins. Draw, freehand, small longitudinal profiles and width cross sections of a number of 
 
 drumlins in the space provided on the next page. 
 
 153 
 
On which end have they the steepest slopes? What variation is there 
 
 in the slope and shape of the other end? 
 
 Does the slope of the two sides also vary in any one typical drumlin ? 
 
 What is the height (from base to top) of six different drumlins on different parts of the 
 
 sheet ? 
 
 What is their average height ? What is their average width ? 
 
 How do they vary in length? 
 
 Human Why would tillage be difficult on all parts of drumlins ? 
 
 occupation. 
 
 What conditions interfere with agricultural pursuits in many of the depressions between the 
 
 drumlins? How have the drumlins affected 
 
 the courses of the wagon roads and railroads? 
 
 154 
 
Materials. 
 Purpose. 
 
 Introduc- 
 tory. 
 
 General 
 features of 
 the Niagara 
 River. 
 
 Upper 
 Niagara. 
 
 Lower 
 Niagara 
 River and 
 the Niagara 
 Escarp- 
 ment. 
 
 • 
 
 XXXVI. — THE NIAGARA REGION 
 
 For Each Student. — The Niagara Falls and vicinity sheet, published 1901. 
 
 To study the course and physiographic relations of the Niagara River. 
 
 The Niagara River is a stream which owes its existence to the effects of the continental 
 glacier. Before the glacial period the drainage of this region was of an altogether different 
 nature, and there was then no important stream having the course of the present Niagara. 
 Therefore the Niagara River may be studied as a young river whose course is due to the acci- 
 dent of glaciation. (Text-book, pp. 330-334.) 
 
 What is the source of the Niagara River ? 
 
 Where is its outlet? What is its approximate 
 
 length? What is its average width (considering both arms) above 
 
 the Falls? Below the Falls ? 
 
 In which part must it be deeper and more rapid ? _. 
 
 What is the topography of the region over which the upper Niagara flows ? 
 
 Make a cross section on a line between Inland and Pull- 
 man (near Buffalo). Let one section of the cross-section paper equal forty feet in the vertical 
 
 scale. What is the nature of the banks of the upper Niagara River? 
 
 How does this cross section compare with that of the Mississippi? 
 
 Why is the upper Niagara River free from sediment ? 
 
 Why is it free from floods? 
 
 '. What is the elevation (approximate) of the upper 
 
 Niagara Plain (Erie Plain)? 
 
 What is the elevation of the Lower Niagara River Plain (Ontario Plain) near Lewiston? 
 
 By w r hat topographic feature are the two plains separated ? 
 
 How 
 
 high is the Niagara Escarpment ? How steep is its , slope near the 
 
 Niagara River? 
 
 155 
 
In what direction does the escarpment extend ? 
 
 Make a cross section across the lower Niagara River on a line between 
 
 Four Mile Creek and the Michigan Central Railroad. Use the same vertical scale as in the 
 
 cross section of the Upper River. How do the two cross sections compare ? 
 
 The gorge How long is the gorge section of the Niagara River ? 
 
 section of 
 
 theNiagara What marks the limit of its upstream extension ? 
 
 River. 
 
 What marks the limit of its downstream extension ? 
 
 At which end is it growing longer? 
 
 What was the first position of the Falls ? (Text-book, p. 332.) 
 
 If 
 
 the cataract receded at the same rate as at present (about 5 feet per year), during all the 
 
 period of its existence, how long did it take to cut the gorge? 
 
 Why are hachures, instead of contour lines, used on the gorge section of the 
 
 Make a cross section of the gorge (extending two miles on either side) on a line 
 parallel to the Niagara Escarpment and one mile south of it. Use the same vertical scale as 
 in the preceding cross section, and assume that the gorge is as deep as the escarpment is high. 
 Describe this cross section and compare it with those of the upper and lower Niagara River. 
 
 Why is the river so much narrower in the gorge than on either plain ? 
 
 156 
 
What evidence is 
 
 there that the northwest bank of the Whirlpool is made of softer material than other parts of 
 
 the gorge wall ? 
 
 The Falls. How high are Niagara Falls ? What is the 
 
 outline of the crest of the Canadian Falls? _• 
 
 The American Falls ? Why has the Niagara 
 
 Eiver a greater sediment load below than above the Falls ? 
 
 In what way does the presence of Niagara Falls and Gorge affect navigation ? 
 
 How does 
 
 this account for the location of Buffalo ? 
 
 Why is there not a city of equal importance at the 
 
 southern end of Lake Huron ? 
 
 Where does the Erie Canal begin ? . 
 
 What reasons can you 
 give for the location of Tonawanda ? 
 
 157 
 
Why is the shipping of Lake Ontario of less impor- 
 tance than that of the upper Great Lakes ? 
 
 Why are there many manufacturing establishments at Niagara Falls City ? 
 
 How will the 
 
 further development of Niagara power affect the surrounding region ? 
 
 What other reason 
 
 can you give for the location of a city at Niagara Falls ? 
 
 t 
 
 158 
 
XXXVII. — PLAINS CITIES AND THEIR ENVIRONS 
 
 Materials. For Each Student. — The Cleveland and Vicinity sheet, the St. Louis sheet, the Denver quadrangle. 
 
 Purpose. To gain an appreciation of the factors which influence the location and growth of cities, and 
 
 the effect of the cities on, and their response to, their physiographic environment. 
 
 Introduc- i Cities on the seacoast, and in mountains, which grow to a large size, owe their growth, in 
 tor y- the main, to some especially favorable factor of environment which dominates all other dis- 
 
 advantages the site may have. In the case of plains cities, however, there is a wider variety 
 of possible locations, and the large city becomes established because of a variety of interacting 
 lesser influences combining to give one site an advantage over its rivals. (Text-book, pp. 166, 
 312, 315, 375-377.) 
 Broad Examine the topographic sheets for the cities of Cleveland, St. Louis, and Denver. What 
 
 relations. jg the one dominating factor which made possible the growth of Cleveland and St. Louis ? 
 
 What topographic feature prevented the growth of a large city farther to the west than is 
 
 Denver ? 
 
 Why are transportation conditions of such supreme importance in fixing the sites of great 
 
 cities ? 
 
 What are the chief industries of cities ? 
 
 Of what advantage is it to a city to have a rich 
 
 agricultural country immediately tributary to it? 
 
 Cleveland and St. Louis ? 
 
 How would this fact affect the growth of Denver as compared to 
 
 159 
 
Is Denver of more importance as a commercial center, or as a 
 
 manufacturing center? 
 
 Note that the growth of Denver has been a radial one, — that is, from the center outwards. 
 What is the significance of this' in regard to the favorableness for habitation of the surround- 
 
 ing area? 
 
 Cleveland has grown outwards from the diameter of a circle. What reasons can you assign 
 for this fact? 
 
 Why, on the other hand, has the growth of St. Louis been focused on the circumference of a 
 circle ? 
 
 What are the two great interior waterways of the United States ? 
 
 On which of these is 
 
 St. Louis located? Cleveland? 
 
 What advantage has Cleveland with regard to the location 
 
 of the eastern coalfields which enables it to compete with Chicago ? 
 
 Why can St. Louis 
 
 successfully compete with Chicago in marketing her manufactures in the Southern States ? 
 
 160 
 
What is the elevation of the land on all sides of Denver as compared to the site of the city 
 itself ? What advantage does such a site offer 
 
 m 
 
 ^^ as compared to the adjacent areas? 
 
 Exact Why is St. Louis located on the west, and not on the east side of the river ? 
 
 location. 
 
 Why have no extensive suburban districts been built on the east side ? 
 
 What was the influence of the Cuyahoga Kiver in determining the exact site of the early 
 Cleveland? , „ 
 
 Why has the city grown more to the east and west than to the south ? 
 
 What advantage does Denver derive from being on the South Platte River ? 
 
 What advantage from being near the base of the mountains rather than farther out on the 
 plains ? ! 
 
 Environs of What effect has the presence of a city on the direction of the main roads in the surround- 
 
 cities. 
 
 ing region ? 
 
 161 
 
 OF THE 
 
 UNIVERSITY 
 
Which, St. Louis or Cleveland, is the objective point of the greatest number of railway lines ? 
 
 What does this suggest as to the relative 
 
 importance of railway transportation to the commerce of these two cities ? 
 
 From what directions do most railway lines enter Denver? ^ 
 
 Why so few from the west? 
 
 Why are there generally many short roads, numerous houses, and small towns in the 
 immediate vicinity of large cities? 
 
 What is the nature of the agricultural products raised on farms near large cities ? 
 
 What is the significance of the many short, canal-like branches which extend from Clear 
 Creek and Ealston Creek near Denver? 
 
 Write a short paragraph, stating some of the important factors which influence location 
 and growth of large cities, and the effect of the presence of the cities on the surrounding 
 
 country. 
 
 162 
 
Materials. 
 
 Purpose. 
 
 Introduc- 
 tory. 
 
 Location 
 and extent 
 of the 
 Folded Ap- 
 palachians. 
 
 XXXVIII.— THE FOLDED APPALACHIANS 
 
 For Each Student. — The contour map of the United States. The Monterey (Va.-W.Va.) 
 sheet, the Delaware Water Gap (Pa.-N.J.) sheet. Colored pencils. 
 
 To study a mountain region ivhose topography is the result of the upfolding of sedimentary 
 rocks, and their later denudation. 
 
 True mountains are either regions where rocks which were once horizontal have later been 
 folded, faulted, and metamorphosed ; or regions in which the rocks are crystalline in character, 
 and generally with a very complex structure. These crystalline rocks often constitute a core 
 underlying mountains made of folded sediments, and are exposed to weathering and denuda- 
 tion only after the overlying masses have been worn away. 
 
 The Appalachian mountains are interesting in that they include both types : (1) moun- 
 tains composed of folded sediments; and (2) mountains which are made up wholly of crystal- 
 line rock. Moreover, the most eastern belt of the Appalachians consists of crystalline 
 mountains which have been worn down until only their roots remain, and their surface resem- 
 bles a plain in topography. 
 
 This exercise is a study of the western belt of the Appalachian Mountains, which are 
 made up of folded and then denuded sedimentary strata. (Text-book, pp. 101-105.) 
 
 Figure 21 shows the province of the Folded Appalachians, marked " Folded Appalachians." 
 Plot the outlines of the Folded Appalachians on your contour map of the United States. 
 
 What parts of what states are included in this province? 
 
 What is the general trend of these mountains? 
 
 How do you account for the fact that 
 
 they do not appear in the Mississippi Valley, but reappear in Arkansas? 
 
 Estimate the length 
 
 of the whole system. What is its average 
 
 width? What proportion of the area of the 
 
 United States east of the Mississippi do the Folded Appalachians constitute ? 
 
 163 
 
Appalachian Ridges on the Monterey (Va.-W.Va.) Sheet 
 On a Line from Southeast to Northwest across the Map 
 
 No. 
 
 Namk of Ridge 
 
 Elevation 
 
 No. 
 
 Name of Eidge 
 
 Elevation 
 
 1 
 
 Mill Mountain 
 
 2500 ft. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 If they are so narrow, and occupy so small a relative area, why is it that they have so much 
 importance, as compared to plains regions, in the popular mind? 
 
 _• What is the average (ap- 
 proximate) elevation of the Folded Appalachians as shown by the contours on the United 
 
 States map ? 
 
 With red pencil color in (with parallel ruled lines extending from northeast to south- 
 west) the province of the Folded Appalachians. Fill in a legend square, as indicated on the 
 diagram map, and mark it Folded Appalachians. 
 
 164 
 
Study of 
 a typical 
 area in the 
 Folded 
 Appala- 
 chians. 
 
 Locate the Monterey (Va.-W.Va.) sheet on your United States map and outline its area 
 in ink. Letter in the name of the sheet. What is the most pronounced topographic feature 
 
 of the Monterey sheet ? 
 
 What is the general trend or direction of the ridges ? 
 
 Starting at the southeast corner, and following 
 
 a diagonal line to the northwest corner of the map, set down in the table on page 309, and in 
 order, the names of the ridges you cross and the elevation of their tops. 
 
 In which part of the area are the ridges highest ? 
 
 Where are they lowest? What is the nature of the 
 
 variation in elevation shown by the intervening ridges ? 
 
 _. If the valleys were all filled up to 
 
 the level of their bounding ridges, what would be the topography and slope of the country ? 
 
 W T hat is a peneplain ? (Text-book, p. 102.) 
 
 Develop- Just before the last great mountain uplift (in Tertiary time) the province of the Folded Appalachians 
 
 ment of was probably a plain, having a general slope from northwest to southeast. Although the surface of the plain 
 
 the present was comparatively smooth, the rock structure beneath the surface was made up of great folds of rocks varying 
 
 topography very mucli in the degree of their resistance to weathering and denudation. 
 
 of the 
 Folded 
 Appala- 
 chians. 
 
 Make a cross section along a line between the towns Clover Creek and Mill Gap. Let one section of the 
 cross-section paper equal 100 feet in the vertical scale. What would be the direction of flow of the principal 
 
 streams on a plain sloping as stated above ? Would this 
 
 direction of flow be parallel to or across hidden folds? . 
 
 Would the valleys of such streams be widened most rapidly where the folds had brought hard rocks near the 
 
 surface, or where they had brought up soft rocks ? 
 
 Which tributary valleys would be cut most rapidly, those 
 
 flowing along the hard surfaces or the soft ? What kind of 
 
 rocks (hard or soft) do the present ridges mark ? Why are 
 
 the valleys between ridges so wide as compared to the ridges themselves ? 
 
 Name several places where the 
 
 streams have cut across the ridges. . 
 
 Why are their valleys so narrow at these points ? 
 
 What is a water gap? (Text-book, p. 103.) 
 
 165 
 
Why are the main streams now flowing southwestward, between the ridges, instead of flowing to the south- 
 east in accordance with the former slope of the plain ? 
 
 Human What are the main lines of travel in this region, as indicated by the direction of the roads 
 
 occupation. 
 
 and the location of the towns ? 
 
 Where do roads cross the ridges ? 
 
 What reasons can you 
 
 suggest for the general absence of railroads ? '. 
 
 Examine the Delaware Water Gap sheet. 
 
 Where do the railroads cross the Kittatinny Range ? 
 
 Why is this water gap more important 
 
 as a transportation route than those on the Monterey sheet ? : 
 
 ■ Examine your United States 
 
 contour map. What other large streams have cut across the Folded Appalachians ? 
 
 166 
 
Why have these large water gaps been so important in the history and development of the 
 United States ? 
 
 167 
 
Materials. 
 
 XXXIX. — THE CRYSTALLINE APPALACHIANS 
 
 For Each Student. — The contour map of the United States. The Mt. Mitchell (N. C.-Tenn.) 
 sheet, the Monterey ( Va.-W. Va. ) sheet. Colored pencils. 
 
 Purpose To study the topography and settlement of a mountain region of crystalline rocks in a mature 
 
 stage of dissection. 
 
 Introduc- 
 tory. 
 
 Location 
 and extent 
 of the 
 province of 
 the Crystal- 
 line Appa- 
 lachians. 
 
 The Crystalline Appalachians lie to the east of the Folded Appalachians, and include 
 the highest peaks of the Appalachian system. They were lofty mountains before the Folded 
 Appalachians were formed, and had been so long subjected to denudation that they were worn 
 to a condition of low relief. Then, in the uplift which elevated the region of the folded Ap- 
 palachians, these crystalline mountains were also reelevated, and it is to this later uplift that 
 they owe their present height. (Text-book, pp. 298 and 308.) 
 
 On your contour map of the United States plot the outline of the province of the Crystalline 
 Appalachians as shown on the diagram map. What important section of the country is al- 
 most wholly included within the province of the Crystalline Appalachians ? 
 
 What notable irregularities in the width of this province are 
 
 apparent? 1 
 
 In what sections of the province are the greatest elevations ? 
 
 Which section has the lowest 
 
 altitudes? How does the amount of elevation 
 
 affect the density of settlement as indicated by the cities? 
 
 Study of an 
 area in the 
 
 ^Crystalline 
 Appalachi- 
 ans. 
 
 Color in, with red pencil (using crosses as indicated on the legend square of the diagram 
 map), the province of the Crystalline Appalachians. Fill in the proper legend square and 
 mark it Crystalline Appalachians. 
 
 The Mt. Mitchell, (1ST. C.-Tenn.) sheet is chosen to illustrate the topography of the Crys- 
 talline Appalachians. Locate the position of this sheet on your contour map of the United 
 States and outline its area with ink. Letter in the name of the sheet. 
 
 169 
 
What pronounced difference in the distribution and character of summit areas is apparent 
 on comparing the Mt. Mitchell and the Monterey sheets? 
 
 • 
 
 What is the highest elevation shown on the Mt. Mitchell sheet? 
 
 What is the elevation of the lowest peaks ? 
 
 Is there any regularity in the 
 
 distribution of peaks of a certain elevation? What reasons can you suggest to 
 
 account for this? 
 
 How does the size of the streams shown on this sheet compare with those on the Monterey 
 sheet? 
 
 Why should the Mt. Mitchell region be a divide area ?. 
 
 Make a cross section along a line (N. W. and S. E.) between Laurel Knob and Big Tom 
 Wilson's, crossing Mt. Mitchell. Let one section of the cross-section paper equal 100 feet 
 in the vertical scale. Compare this cross section with the one from the Monterey sheet. 
 
 What difference in the width of the valleys and ridges is shown? 
 
 170 
 
^^ Human How do the courses of the roads in this region compare with those shown on the Mon- 
 
 occupation. 
 
 terey sheet? ___. 
 
 Why have the roads on the Mt. Mitchell sheet so many short, sharp turns? 
 
 How does the 
 
 topography influence the course of the railroad? 
 
 Why has this region extensive forests? 
 
 As indicated by some of the place names on the map, 
 
 what kinds of timber grow here ? 
 
 What is the most important town on the Mt. Mitchell sheet? 
 
 In a general way (as 1000, 2000, etc.) estimate the number of its inhabitants. 
 
 Why are there no more important towns in the area? 
 
 Suggest a reason why the New England section of the Crystalline Appalachians has more im- 
 portant towns. 
 
 171 
 
Materials. 
 
 XL. — THE APPALACHIAN PIEDMONT AREA 
 
 For Each Student. — The contour map of the United States. The Farmville (Va.) sheet, 
 the Mt. Mitchell (N.C.-Tenn.) sheet. Colored pencils. 
 
 p To study the topography of a very old mountain region, and its adaptation to settlement 
 
 and agriculture. 
 
 Introduc- 
 tory. 
 
 Location 
 and extent 
 of the 
 Piedmont 
 Area. 
 
 The rocks underlying the Piedmont Area are crystalline, and are complexly folded and 
 faulted. They vary greatly in structure and hardness ; but the region has been so long de- 
 nuded that its summits have all been worn down to a low relief, and its drainage system is 
 perfectly developed. More recently there has* been a slight elevation of the region, reju- 
 venating the streams. Over the hard crystalline rock lies a thick mantle of residual soil, 
 giving opportunity for agricultural development. The region is one which was occupied and 
 settled very early in the history of the country. (Text-book, p. 307.) 
 
 On your contour map of the United States plot the outline of the Piedmont Area as shown 
 on the diagram map. Why is the Piedmont Area most important in the Southern States ? 
 
 What province does it adjoin on the east? 
 
 What line separates the two provinces? 
 
 What important crop is raised on both the Piedmont and the Coastal Plain provinces ? 
 
 By (approximately) how much do these two provinces differ in general 
 
 elevation? 
 
 What similarity of topography have they? 
 
 __. What is the rock structure which underlies each ? 
 
 Color in lightly and uniformly, using red pencil, the area of the Piedmont Province as you 
 have outlined it on your United States map. Fill in the proper legend square • and mark it 
 Appalachian Piedmont. 
 
 173 
 
Study of a Locate the position of the Farmville (Va.) sheet on your United States map and outline 
 
 typical sec- its area with ink. Letter in the name of the sheet. 
 
 tion of the What is the nature of the topography shown on the Farmville sheet ? 
 
 Piedmont r r J 
 
 Area. 
 
 What regi on 
 
 previously studied does it most resemble? 
 
 How do you account for this similarity? 
 
 Why should this region, which is so like a plain, be called an old mountain region ? 
 
 The topography of the Farmville sheet was once as rugged as that of the Mt. Mitchell sheet. 
 What can you say regarding the amount of time which must have elapsed since it had such a 
 
 topography ? 
 
 State why the Piedmont Area is called a peneplain. 
 
 What is a monadnock ? (Text-book, p. 298.) 
 
 What example of a monadnock do you find on the Farmville sheet? 
 
 How many feet does the Appomattox River descend within the area 
 
 of the map ? .Why has it such a meandering course ? 
 
 174 
 
• 
 
 : Why are the 
 
 small tributary streams eroding their valleys ? 
 
 Human What is the pattern of the roads in this region? 
 
 occupation. 
 
 Does it coincide with that of the drainage lines ? Does it coincide with the 
 
 divides? _._ Why? 
 
 • 
 
 What indication do the 
 
 number, size, and location of the towns (individual houses are not shown on this sheet) and 
 
 the number of the railroads give that this is a rich agricultural region? 
 
 Write a short paragraph describing the nature of the country, with respect to topography, 
 agriculture, and drainage conditions, that you would see looking from an elevated point, like 
 Willis Mountain. 
 
 175 
 
t 
 
Materials. For Each Student. 
 
 Colored pencils. 
 
 XLL— THE LAURENTIAN HIGHLANDS 
 
 The contour map of the United States. The Lake Placid (N.Y.) sheet. 
 
 Purpose. To study the topography of the old crystalline mountam areas known as the Laurentian High- 
 
 lands; and the utilization of the Adirondack portion of these as a vacation and resort country. 
 
 Introduc- 
 tory. 
 
 Location 
 and extent 
 of the 
 Laurentian 
 Highlands. 
 
 To the north of the eastern part of the United States is found a great area of crystalline 
 rock, known as the Laurentian Highlands, which is considered to be made up of some of the 
 oldest rocks of the earth's crust. The Lake Superior Highlands and the Adirondack Mountains 
 are outlying masses of these Laurentian Highlands, which at these points project into the 
 territory of the United States. (Text-book, pp. 107 and 302.) 
 
 Outline, on your contour map of the United States, the areas of the Laurentian Highlands, 
 as shown on the diagram map. 
 
 What is the relative importance of the Laurentian Highlands in the United States with 
 
 respect to the amount of territory they comprise ? 
 
 Why does their location further lessen their im- 
 
 portance ? 
 
 What well-known city is situated in the Lake Superior Highland region ? 
 To what conditions does this city owe its importance? 
 
 Why was Lake Champlain, in the 
 
 eastern part of the Adirondacks, so important in the early history of the United States ? 
 
 On your United States map color in with red pencil (using circles as indicated on the 
 legend square of the diagram map) the areas of the Laurentian Highlands in the United States 
 as you have outlined them. Fill in the proper legend square. 
 
 177 
 
Study of a Locate the position of the Lake Placid (N.Y.) sheet on your United States map, and out- 
 
 section of jj ne jt s area with ink. Letter in the name of the sheet. What is the shape and arrangement 
 
 the Adiron 
 dacks. 
 
 of the mountain masses shown on this sheet ? 
 
 How do they differ in shape from the Folded 
 
 Appalachians ? 
 
 From the Crystalline Appalachians? 
 
 Which is the highest mountain 
 
 shown on this sheet, and what is its elevation? 
 
 What is the elevation of several other important peaks? 
 
 What do the contour lines show as 
 
 to the nature of the outline of the -mountains, — are they sharp and rugged or smooth and 
 
 flowing? What does this condition indicate 
 
 as to the age of the mountains ? 
 
 What is the evidence on this point of the number and 
 
 shape of the valleys on the mountain slopes? 
 
 How may differences in rock account for the 
 
 wide valleys between the mountains ? 
 
 What is the elevation of the mountains as 
 
 compared to the approximate general elevation of the wide valleys between them? 
 
 178 
 
- Do the 
 
 mountains appear high or low ? How do you 
 
 explain the presence of so many lakes and swamps in a mature mountain region ? 
 
 If the swamps were formerly lakes, what must have happened to them since ? 
 
 Human What do you observe as to the density and distribution of the settlement of this region ? 
 
 occupation. 
 
 Why are the roads so comparatively numerous in this mountain region ? 
 
 • 
 
 Near what great 
 
 centers of population are the Adirondack Mountains ? 
 
 What is the bearing of this fact on 
 
 its development as a resort region? 
 
 What is the attraction of the mountains for city people ? 
 
 What recreation and sport do the lakes and rivers afford? 
 
 179 
 
Why is there an especially large 
 
 settlement around Mirror Lake and Lake Placid ? 
 
 Write a short paragraph summarizing the attractions of the Adirondack Mountains as a 
 resort country. 
 
 180 
 
Materials. 
 
 Purpose. 
 
 Introduc- 
 tory. 
 
 Location 
 and extent 
 of the 
 Rocky 
 Mountain 
 province. 
 
 XLIL — THE ROCKY MOUNTAINS 
 
 For Each Student. — The contour map of the United States. The Saw Tooth (Idaho) sheet. Colored 
 pencils. 
 
 For General Class Use. — A wall map of the United States showing railroads. 
 
 To gain an appreciation of the topographic features of the Rocky Mountains, and of the man- 
 ner in which the presence of ores and open valleys in the mountains has affected their settlement. 
 
 The Rocky Mountains constitute the most easterly member of the Western Cordillera, a 
 general term given to all the mountainous section of the United States which lies, for the most 
 part, west of the 105th meridian. Because of its physiography, the Western Cordillera, as a 
 whole, is a sparsely settled region ; but local conditions, in places, attract a comparatively 
 large population. (Text-book, pp. 106-107, and 314-315.) 
 
 On your United States map outline the area of the Rocky Mountain province as shown on 
 the diagram map. 
 
 What is the north-south length of the Rockies? 
 
 How do they compare in this respect to the Appalachians? 
 
 What other factors 
 
 make the Rockies a more complete barrier to travel than the Appalachians ? 
 
 By consult- 
 ing the wall map of the United States, locate and plot on your United States map the route 
 followed by the transcontinental railroads in crossing the Rockies. As shown by the topog- 
 raphy on your United States map, what factors determine the location of these routes? 
 
 How has the presence of the railroads affected settlement in the Rockies ? 
 
 What impor- 
 
 181 
 
tant cities are located on these routes ? 
 
 Color in, with red pencil (using the angle symbol 
 
 shown in the legend square), the province of the Rocky Mountains as you have outlined it on 
 
 your map. Fill in the proper legend square and mark it Rocky Mountains. 
 
 Study of Locate the position of the Saw-Tooth (Idaho) sheet on your map of the United States, 
 
 an area in anc i outline its area with ink. Letter in the name of the sheet, 
 the Rocky 
 
 Mountains. What is the approximate general elevation of this area? 
 
 What are the elevations of some of the higher peaks! 
 
 What are the ele- 
 vations of the bottoms of the larger valleys? 
 
 As indicated by these conditions, do the indi- 
 vidual ranges and peaks constitute the mountain uplift, or does the region as a whole ? 
 
 By what processes are the lesser ranges and peaks 
 
 developed ? 
 
 Does the topography of this region indicate young, mature, or old conditions? 
 
 Describe the topography of the country as it 
 
 would appear to an observer stationed on the summit of Big Peak. 
 
 182 
 
What evidence indicative of former glaciation of this region do you note? 
 
 .+ In what por- 
 tion of the map are lakes especially conspicuous? 
 
 Where else do very small lakes occur? 
 
 What is the significance of the occurrence and location of these smaller lakes? 
 
 How might 
 
 deposits from glacial streams account for the wide, level-floored valley in the northern part of 
 
 this area? 
 
 Human Locate the one road of the area which continues unbroken across one of the mountains. 
 
 occupation. 
 
 How many feet must one climb between Galena and the summit of the divide? 
 
 In how many miles? Why has the road in this section 
 
 several very sharp turns? 
 
 What two sections of the area have invited settlement? 
 
 What was the reason for the 
 
 settlement in each case? 
 
 183 
 
Suggest a reason why the mines in the southeast section are closely 
 grouped. 
 
 What is the probable method of transportation between the Silver Star mine and 
 the King of the West mine? 
 
 About how many square miles of land are available for agriculture in the large valley to 
 
 the north? What is the nature and importance of Rocky Mountain 
 
 Parks? (See Text-book, p. 95.) 
 
 Write a short paragraph summarizing the significance of the Rocky Mountains as a bar- 
 rier to transportation and travel, and the reasons for their settlement in isolated areas. 
 
 184 
 
Materials. 
 Purpose. 
 
 Introduc- 
 tory. 
 
 Location of 
 the area. 
 
 XLIII. — MOUNTAIN GLACIERS AND THE CONTINENTAL DIVIDE 
 
 For Each Student. — Contour map of the United States. Chief Mountain (Mont.) sheet. 
 
 To study the topography of a mountain region having existing glaciers, and the evidence it 
 presents of former more extensive glaciation. 
 
 The mountain region shown in this sheet has topographic characteristics of a stage 
 between youth and maturity. The normal topography of weathering and stream erosion has, 
 however, been modified very much by glacial erosion. The glaciers which exist to-day are 
 but remnants of former much greater ones, as is indicated by the topography. The region has 
 a further interest in that it is along the line of the Continental Divide. This map, and those 
 used in the exercises on the Colorado Plateau and Canyon, and the Yosemite, are commended 
 for their excellence of topographic expression; they illustrate the possibilities of contour 
 maps in expressing land forms. (Text-book, pp. 137-139, 141-142.) 
 
 Locate the position of the Chief Mountain (Mont.) sheet on your contour map of the United 
 States, and outline the area with ink. Letter in the name of the sheet. 
 
 In what physiographic province is the Chief Mountain region? 
 
 What is the latitude of the northern edge of the sheet? 
 
 What boundary line does it mark? 
 
 Continental Examine the Chief Mountain sheet. What determines the line of the Continental 
 
 Divide. 
 
 Divide? '_ 
 
 What is the eventual destination of the precipitation that falls on the eastern side of the 
 
 divide? u 
 
 On the western side? 
 
 What is the effect of the presence of forests on the rate of the run off of rain and snow water 
 from a land surface? 
 
 Why has this area been made a " Forest Beserve" ? 
 
 185 
 
Why is the pres- 
 ence of forests desirable at the headwaters of streams ? 
 
 Existing Name the larger glaciers mapped in this area, 
 
 glaciers. 
 
 What is their general distribution? 
 
 On which side of the divide are the greater number ? 
 
 What explanation can you offer to account for this fact ? 
 
 Which glacier is largest? 
 
 What is its length in miles and fractions of a mile ? 
 
 Its width? How does this compare with the 
 
 dimensions of Alpine glaciers? (See Text-book, p. 137.) 
 
 What is the lowest altitude to 
 
 which the glaciers descend? How many of the glaciers descend to 
 
 about the 7500 foot level ? What reasons can you suggest for this uni- 
 formity in the altitude of their melting ends? 
 
 186 
 
Evidence What provinces of the United States, which you have previously studied, were character- 
 
 of former 
 
 # g f ea . te L r . ized by the presence of many lakes ? 
 glaciation. ' . r J 
 
 What is the significance of the many lakes in this 
 
 region ? 
 
 Describe the shape of the depressions occupied by the existing glaciers. 
 
 What is a cirque? (See Text-book, p. 142.) .. 
 
 Identify other cirques in this region besides those 
 occupied at present by glaciers. 
 
 Make a cross section of the valley of Swiftcurrent Creek (emptying into the Sherburne 
 Lakes) on a line (N.W.-S.E.) between Point Mt. and Appekunny Mt. Let one division of 
 the cross-section paper equal 200 feet in the vertical scale. What is the shape of this valley 
 
 cross section? ■_ 
 
 How does it differ from the shape of the cross sections of valleys in the Appalachian Plateau? 
 
 What is the significance of a U-shaped valley ? 
 
 187 
 
Locate and name other valleys on this sheet 
 
 which have similarly shaped valleys. 
 
 What are hanging valleys ? (Text-book, p. 142.) 
 
 Why are waterfalls present at the mouths of hanging valleys ? 
 
 Locate examples of hanging 
 
 valleys; for example, in St. Mary River valley. 
 
 What is the evidence of the presence of 
 
 lakes, cirques, the U-shape of the valley cross sections, and hanging valleys on the question 
 
 of the former greater extension of the glaciers ? 
 
 188 
 
 ( 
 
XLIV. — THE COLUMBIA LAVA PLATEAU 
 
 Materials. For Each Student. — The contour map of the United States. The Spokane (Wash.-Idaho) sheet. 
 
 The Denver (Colo) sheet. Colored pencils. 
 
 Purpose. To study the topography and settlement of the Columbia Lava Plateau. 
 
 Introduc- The region of the Columbia Lava Plateau is made up of great sheets of lava, which, in a 
 
 tory. comparatively recent geological period, welled up from fissures in the earth's crust, and spread 
 
 over the country as immense floods of molten rock. Since then the plateau surface has been 
 much dissected by denudation ; and a thick mantle of residual soil covers large portions of its 
 area. (Text-book, pp. 125-126.) 
 
 Location On your contour map of the United States plot the area of the Columbia Lava Plateau as 
 
 and extent 
 
 of the area, outlined on the diagram map. What states are partly included in this province ? 
 
 i What 
 
 range of altitude do you note? 
 
 What portion of the province is most plateau-like in its 
 
 topography? 
 
 • Why is the portion of the province which adjoins the course of the Colum- 
 bia River most dissected ? r 
 
 Color in, with brown pencil (using the symbol indicated in the legend square on the dia- 
 gram map), the province of the Columbia Lava Plateau. Fill in the proper legend square and 
 mark it Columbia Lava Plateau. 
 
 Study of a Locate the position of the Spokane (Wash.-Idaho) sheet on your map of the United States, 
 
 section of and outline its area with ink. Letter in the name of the sheet. 
 
 the Colum- What physiographic province borders the Columbia Lava Plateau on the east? 
 
 along its What portion of the area mapped on the Spokane 
 
 eastern « 
 
 margin. sheet is to be included in the Pocky Mountain Province ? 
 
 What was the approximate general altitude of this part of the Columbia Lava 
 
 Plateau before dissection, as shown on this sheet? What are the 
 
 physiographic characteristics of Five Mile Prairie? 
 
 189 
 
What physiographic term would you 
 
 apply to it? Locate other similar areas. 
 
 Are mesas most com- 
 mon in a region of little or great rainfall ? In 
 
 regions of horizontal or of inclined strata? 
 
 What does this indicate regarding the position of the strata and the rainfall conditions on the 
 
 Columbia Lava Plateau? 
 
 Account for the 
 
 presence of so many permanent streams in this section of the Columbia Lava Plateau. 
 
 Human Is there more agricultural settlement on the level areas, such as the mesa tops, or on the 
 
 occupation. 
 
 valley slopes? The soil of the Columbia 
 
 Lava Plateau is residual, — that is, it is formed by the decay of the lava rocks, and rests 
 directly on them. Why should there be a greater depth of this soil on the uplands than on 
 
 the valley sides? 1 
 
 What is the significance of the location of Spokane with reference to.the Spokane Valley 
 as a highway? 
 
 Eemembering that the Great Northern is a transcontinental railroad, what 
 influence has the location of Spokane had on the course of railroads ? „ 
 
 190 
 
There is a waterfall 
 
 in the Spokane River where its course passes through Spokane. What is the bearing of this 
 
 fact on the exact location and growth of Spokane? 
 
 Write a short paragraph contrasting and comparing the sites and environs of the cities of 
 Denver and Spokane. 
 
 191 
 
• 
 
 XLV. — THE GREAT BASIN REGION 
 
 Materials. For Each Student. — The contour map of the United States. The Granite Range (Nev.) 
 
 sheet. Colored pencils. 
 
 Purpose. To gain an appreciation of the physical geography of the Great Basin, Region. 
 
 Introduc- 
 tory. 
 
 Location 
 and extent 
 of the Great 
 Basin. 
 
 The Great Basin is a region of interior drainage. (Text-book, p. 324.) Its area is encom- 
 passed by more elevated mountain and plateau barriers, and the precipitation of the present 
 climate is not sufficient in amount to enable the basin to fill up and overflow at some point on 
 its rim. In recent geological times, however, the climate of the Great Basin Region was 
 more humid, and a large lake, Lake Bonneville (Text-book, pp. 163-164) occupied a great 
 extent of its area, the mountain ranges projecting as islands above its level. 
 
 A region to the southeast marked " Open Basins " has similar conditions to those of the 
 Great Basin, except that most of the drainage escapes to the sea. 
 
 On your contour map of the United States plot the outline of the area of the Great Basin 
 as indicated on the diagram map. What state and parts of states does it include within its 
 
 limits? 
 
 What is the general nature of its 
 
 topography ? 
 
 What is the most important stream within the Great Basin ? 
 Where is its source? 
 
 Its mouth? 
 
 In what respects are the courses of the smaller streams similar 
 
 to that of the Humboldt River ? 
 
 What is the general trend of the mountain ranges ? 
 
 Figure 301 of the Text-book is a map of the extent of the former Lake Bonneville. 
 Outline its extent, approximately, on your contour map of the United States, using a dotted 
 line. Mark the area, thus inclosed, Lake Bonneville. 
 
 193 
 
Where was the probable region of outflow of former Lake Bonneville, as indicated by the 
 contour lines on your United States map ? 
 What approximate proportion of its area does the 
 
 present Great Salt Lake occupy ? What does 
 
 the location of Great Salt Lake indicate as to the deepest portion of the former Lake Bonne- 
 ville ? ' 
 
 Suggest a reason why the main settlement of the Great Basin region centers 
 about the present lakes within its area. 
 
 Color in, with yellow pencil (using ruled lines as indicated in the legend square of the 
 diagram map), the area of the Great Basin region as you have outlined it on your United 
 States map. Fill in the proper legend square and mark it Great Basin. 
 
 Studv of a Locate the position of the Granite Range (Nev.) sheet on your map of the United States 
 
 typical area and outline its area in ink. Letter in the name of the sheet. 
 
 within the What three prominent features make up the physiography of this area ? 
 
 Great 
 
 Basin. 
 
 What is the 
 
 general trend of the mountain ranges? 
 
 The Selenite Range is typical of many of the Basin Ranges. What is the approximate 
 
 length of the Selenite Range ? Its elevation ? 
 
 How do these dimensions and its isolation compare with ranges of the Rocky Mountain region ? 
 
 Where are the sources of the small streams? 
 
 Why do they disappear when they reach 
 the level places? 
 
 What becomes of the dissolved material they are carrying ? (Text-book, 
 
 pp. 87 and 169.) . 
 
 191 
 
• 
 
 Where are such deposits being formed in this area ? 
 
 What becomes of the 
 sediment they carry? 
 
 What suggestion does this give as to thexn-igin of the fiats between the 
 mountain ranges ? 
 
 What would be the bearing of the former greater extent of Pyramid 
 
 Lake on the question of the origin of these flats ? 
 
 Human Why are there no cities within this area ? 
 
 occupation. 
 
 * What one industry is indicated by a place 
 
 name? Why should salt be found in such 
 
 a situation? (Text-book, p. 163.) 
 
 195 
 
• 
 
 XLVL— THE COLORADO CANYON AND PLATEAU 
 
 Materials. For Each Student. — Contour map of the United States. The Bright Angel (Ariz.) sheet. Col- 
 
 ored pencils. 
 
 Purpose. To study the erosional ivork of a great river, cutting through thick horizontal strata in an 
 
 arid plateau region. 
 
 Introduc- 
 tory. 
 
 Location 
 and extent 
 of the 
 province. 
 
 The Colorado Kiver has its source among, and is fed by, the melting snows of the moun- 
 tains of the lofty central Rocky Mountains, being formed by the junction of the Green and the 
 Grand rivers. The river waters are abundantly supplied with sediment by the weathering of 
 the mountain slopes, yet are not overloaded. Consequently, in flowing across the plateau to 
 the south and west, the river has been able, by means of its rock tools, to carve the remark- 
 able canyon which bears its name. The Colorado Plateau Province itself consists of a series 
 of rock platforms, level in topography and separated one from the other by fault and weather- 
 ing escarpments. (Text-book, pp. 81-82 and 322-323.) 
 
 On your contour map of the United States plot the outline of the area of the Colorado 
 Plateau as shown on the diagram map. 
 
 What states lie partly in this province ? 
 
 Colorado Plateau, excluding the Canyon ? 
 
 What is its approximate elevation ? 
 
 What is the nature of the topography of the 
 
 Approximately how many feet does the Colorado River descend between the point of junction 
 of the Green and Grand rivers and the point where it first touches the Nevada state 
 
 boundary line ? About how long is this portion of its course ? 
 
 \ How does its average descent per mile compare with that of the 
 
 Mississippi below Cairo? (See exercise on Mississippi Flood-plain and Delta Province.) 
 
 Why has the Colorado River such great erosive power ? . 
 
 197 
 
On your contour map of the United States color in with green pencil (using the symbol 
 
 shown in the legend square) the area of the Colorado Plateau. Fill in the proper legend 
 
 square and mark it Colorado Plateau. 
 
 Study of Locate the position of the Bright Angel sheet and plot the outline of its area on your 
 
 the Grand United States map. Letter in the name of the sheet. What is the general direction of slope 
 
 Canyon and Q £ ^ e Colorado Plateau as shown by the areas named the Kaibab Plateau to the north of the 
 adjacent 
 
 areas Canyon, and the Coconino Plateau to the south? 
 
 . What effect has this had on the course of 
 
 small streams on the plateau surface? : 
 
 How may these conditions account for the longer slope of the north side of the Grand Canyon 
 at this point ? 
 
 What is the scale of the Bright Angel sheet? 
 
 What is the approximate width of the Grand Canyon on a line directly north from Grand 
 
 Canyon station? What is the greatest depth of the canyon 
 
 shown? How does this width and depth compare with the dimen- 
 sions of the Niagara Gorge? 
 
 What condition of slope is indicated where the contour lines are run together to form a 
 
 ribbon of solid brown? ___•_ 1 
 
 What kind of rock layers, hard or soft, would be marked by vertical 
 
 cliffs? L Account for the isolated monu- 
 ments, like the Isis Temple, left standing as outliers of the canyon wall. 
 
 198 
 
Name various illustrations of stages in the process of formation of such buttes and mesas. 
 
 In what kind of rock is the river cutting at present, as indicated by the name of the 
 
 inner gorge ? Why is there no alternation 
 
 of vertical cliffs and gentler talus slopes in this inner gorge? 
 
 What is the nature of the river's flow here, as shown by the conventional 
 
 sign ? 
 
 Human How many houses are mapped on this area ? What two 
 
 occupation. 
 
 factors account for this very sparse settlement? 
 
 Why is a railroad built to the Grand Canyon ? 
 
 Why is this canyon an even greater barrier to travel than a high mountain range ? 
 
 Write a short paragraph telling what you would expect to see if you were standing at 
 Yavapai Point and looking out over, and down into, the Grand Canyon. 
 
 199 
 
# 
 
 Materials. 
 
 Purpose. 
 
 Introduc- 
 tory. 
 
 Location 
 of the 
 Yosemite 
 Valley. 
 
 XLVII. — THE YOSEMITE VALLEY 
 
 For Each Student. — The contour map of the United States. The Yosemite (Cal.) quadrangle. 
 Map of the Yosemite Valley, California. 
 
 To gain an appreciation of the setting, scenic magnificence, and topographic relations of the 
 Yosemite Valley. 
 
 The four preeminent scenic resources of the United States are Niagara Falls, the Grand 
 Canyon of the Colorado, the Yellowstone National Park, and the Yosemite Valley. Three of 
 these, and the fourth in part, owe their origin and interest to the results of the erosive work of 
 water, active either as a running stream or in the form of glacial ice. The features of the 
 Yosemite Valley are the resultant of both ice and water work on a jointed, granite rock. During 
 the Glacial Period huge glaciers radiated from the higher summits of the Yosemite region, 
 and, moving downward toward the lowlands, scoured out and differentially eroded their valley 
 channels, leaving the smaller valleys hanging at their mouths, far above the floor of the main 
 valleys. As a result of this differential glacial erosion, waterfalls were born when the valleys 
 were eventually freed of ice, so that the streams could again flow. 
 
 Locate the position of the Yosemite sheet on your contour map of the United States, and 
 outline its area with ink. Letter in the name of the sheet. 
 
 As indicated by the contours on the United States map, why is the Yosemite Valley said 
 
 to be in the " High Sierras"? 
 
 Topo- 
 graphic 
 relations. 
 
 What is the approximate general elevation above sea level of 
 
 the summits in the Yosemite region as shown on the Yosemite quadrangle ? 
 
 Of the valley bottoms? Explain the absence of railroads 
 
 in this region. 
 
 In what respect does the Yosemite Valley differ markedly from other valleys in the region ? 
 
 What other valley has similar features on a lesser scale ? 
 
 What distinct difference in the valley form of the Hetch Hetchy Valley and 
 
 the Grand Canyon of the Tuolumne (both of the Tuolumne River) do you note ? 
 
 201 
 
Which of these forms is most characteristic of glacial erosion? -. 
 
 Is the form of the Yosemite Valley typical of glacial or stream erosion ? 
 
 Examine the map of Yosemite Valley. What particularly striking topographic forms are 
 indicated by the many areas of crowded contour lines? 
 
 How high is the cliff of El Capitan? Describe the 
 
 Half Dome as to height above base, shape, and steepness of sides. 
 
 What are joint planes? 
 
 (Text-book, p. 38.) 
 
 How would the presence of such joint planes in massive granite rock 
 
 aid in the development of precipices? 
 
 How would such jointing in the rock affect the erosive action of a glacier moving down 
 the valley of the Merced River? 
 
 What evidence of such action is apparent on the map ? 
 202 
 
 " 
 
 ( 
 
Why would a large valley glacier erode deeper than a small one ? 
 
 Since there were glaciers 
 
 in the valleys of both the Merced River and the Yoseinite Creek, why is the valley floor of 
 
 the latter now so high above that of the Merced River? 
 
 , What is the height of the upper 
 
 Yosemite Falls? . In what way have weathering and erosion since 
 
 the Glacial period combined to give the Merced River a flat valley floor? 
 
 What has been 
 
 the effect of this on the course of the river? 
 
 Why has this region been made a National 
 
 Park? :_ 
 
 203 
 
Write a short paragraph telling what scenic and physiographic phenomena you would 
 anticipate seeing on a visit to the Yosemite Valley. 
 
 < 
 
 204 
 
XL VIII.— MT. SHASTA AND SURROUNDING REGION 
 
 Materials. For Each Student. — The contour map of the United States. The Shasta (Cal.) and the 
 
 Shasta Special sheets. 
 
 Purpose. To study a volcanic cone and a region of former volcanic activity. 
 
 Introduc- Mount Shasta is the cone of a volcano which has been dormant or extinct for many centuries. 
 
 tory. In the region adjoining Mt. Shasta there is other evidence of former volcanic activity. Since 
 
 the cessation of eruptions from Mt. Shasta, erosion and weathering have to some extent modi- 
 fied the original outline and contour of the cone. (Text-book, p. 121.) 
 
 Location of Locate the position of the Shasta (Cal.) sheet, and outline its area with ink on your 
 
 Mt. Shasta. United States map. Letter in the name of the sheet. Mark the position of Mt. Shasta with 
 a cross (x). 
 
 Mt. Shasta Examine the Shasta (Cal.) sheet. What is the difference in outline and topography 
 
 and the 
 
 adjoining between Mt. Shasta and the adjacent mountain regions? 
 
 region. 
 
 What is the altitude of 
 
 Mt. Shasta? How does this elevation compare with that of the 
 
 highest points in the surrounding region? 
 
 Why is Mt. Shasta a dominating feature of 
 
 the landscape in Northern California? 
 
 Assume the floor of the valley from which Mt. Shasta rises to represent the original level of 
 the country, and on this basis calculate the approximate number of cubic miles of volcanic 
 
 material which has been ejected to build up the cone. 
 
 Shastina, a minor summit to the west of the main Mt. Shasta summit, is a secondary 
 cone. What other near-by mountains are of volcanic origin, as suggested by their form or the 
 
 names given them ? 
 
 205 
 
Topog- Make a cross section of Mt. Shasta on a line passing through Butteville and Shastina, and 
 
 If^Sluu t exten ding to the eastern edge of the map. Let one division of the cross-section paper equal 
 600 feet in the vertical scale. This will give a vertical exaggeration of about four times. 
 
 What is the general shape of a volcanic cone as shown by this cross section ? , 
 
 Are its slopes, in general, steep or gentle as compared to other mountains? 
 Explain why they are so much steeper near 
 
 the summit. 
 
 In what way does the cross section of Shastina suggest that it is a secondary cone? 
 
 Topo- Examine the Shasta Special sheet. In what two respects does Mt. Shasta depart 
 
 graphic 
 
 details of from f t ? 
 
 Mt.Shasta. y 
 
 Suggest a reason why the shape of the lava flows very much 
 
 resembles that of the glaciers. 
 
 On which side of the cone are valleys developed most 
 
 markedly? What is the general pattern of the drainage? 
 
 Suggest a reason for the origin of the buttes 
 
 on the south side of the cone. 
 
 206 
 
What do the place-names Cinder and Ash suggest as to the 
 
 material where they occur? 
 
 Why should the larger glaciers be on the north side of the cone ? 
 
 Write a short paragraph summarizing the topographic characteristics of a volcanic cone 
 composed partly of ash and partly of lava. 
 
 207 
 
Materials. 
 
 Purpose. 
 
 Introduc- 
 tory. 
 
 Location 
 and extent 
 of these 
 regions. 
 
 XLIX. — PIEDMONT VALLEYS OF THE PACIFIC SLOPE 
 
 For Each Student. — The contour map of the United States. The Cucamonga (Cal.) sheet. 
 Colored pencils. 
 
 To study the formation of alluvial fans of large area, and the relation of such fans to the 
 adjacent topography. 
 
 The mountains of the west coast are still rising, and being, therefore, young mountains, the 
 processes of denudation are very active on their slopes and summits. In consequence, the 
 streams which flow down their slopes carry heavy loads of sediment, and the intermont areas 
 of this region, like the Valley of California, owe their level floors to filling up with this waste 
 from the mountains. (Text-book, pp. 66-68.) 
 
 On your map of the United States outline the areas of the larger Piedmont valleys of 
 the Pacific Slope, as indicated on the diagram map. (It is to be understood that there are 
 many other smaller areas of similar conditions in this region.) 
 
 Between what mountain ranges are these valleys located? 
 
 What is the approximate 
 
 area of each in square miles ? 
 
 Color in with blue pencil (using the symbol indicated in the legend square on the dia- 
 gram map) the areas of the Piedmont valleys of the Pacific Slope. Fill in the proper legend 
 square and mark it Pd. Val. Pac. Slope. 
 
 Study of an Locate the position of the Cucamonga (Cal.) sheet on your map of the United States and 
 
 alluvial fan outline its area with ink. Letter in the name of the sheet. 
 
 on the edge What is the nature of the country shown in the northern part of the Cucamonga sheet? 
 
 Piedmont 
 
 valley. 
 
 In the southern part? 
 
 What is the approximate average slope per mile of the stream in 
 
 i Cucamonga Canyon between its source and the point of its disappearance at the edge of the 
 
 mountains? What is the average slope 
 
 "209 
 
per mile of the country for five miles to the south of the mountain base? 
 
 How do these two slopes compare in steepness? 
 
 Over which slope could the stream carry the greater amount of sediment ? 
 
 "Why would such a mountain stream be abundantly supplied 
 
 with sediment? 
 
 Why could this sediment load not be carried far beyond the edge of the 
 
 mountains? 
 
 What portion of the load (i.e. what kind of material) would be deposited 
 
 first? Why does the stream disappear at 
 
 a short distance beyond the mountains? 
 
 Account for its reappearance farther south. 
 
 What is the significance of the dotted brown patches and streamers ? 
 
 Describe the 
 conditions that you think would be observed in this region at a time when a great flood poured 
 
 out from the canyon. 
 
 210 
 
Why are such deposits as these called alluvial fans 9 
 
 On what portion of their surface 
 
 are their slopes steepest? Why there? 
 
 Why do the contours bend farthest outward directly opposite the stream mouths? 
 
 Is the 
 
 climate on the alluvial fans arid or humid? 
 
 Why, then, is there such dense settlement? 
 
 What is the source of the water that these communities need ? 
 
 Human Give two reasons why the towns are located near the base of the alluvial fans and away 
 
 occupation. 
 
 from the foot of the mountains. 
 
 Write a short paragraph comparing and contrasting the mode of origin and the slopes 
 and topography of a delta and an alluvial fan. 
 
 211 
 
L.— THE PACIFIC RANGES AND SAN FRANCISCO HARBOR 
 
 Materials. For Each Student. — The contour map of the United States. The San Francisco (Cal.) sheet. 
 
 The Tamalpais (Cal.) sheet. Colored pencils. 
 
 Note. — It will be well to mount the two topographic sheets on cloth so that they form one continuous 
 map. 
 
 Purpose. To study the physical geography of a mountain region along an ocean coast. 
 
 Introduc- The mountain systems of the Pacific Slope, west of the Columbia and Colorado Plateaus 
 
 tor y- and the Great Basin, are still being uplifted and, in consequence, have the topography and 
 
 characteristics of very young mountains. The uplift is not a simple elevation, but is made up 
 of a complex of movements, both up and down vertically, and including also lateral shifts of 
 the mountain blocks. Those parts of the region which are adjacent to the ocean show the 
 evidence of these movements most clearly, because the ocean furnishes a permanent level, or 
 datum plane. (Text-book, pp. 206, 321.) 
 
 Location On your contour map of the United States outline the region of the Pacific Ranges as 
 
 and extent indicated on the diagram map. 
 
 ofthe What parts of what states are included in this region ? 
 
 region. 
 
 What notable differences are there between the Pacific and Atlantic coasts of the United 
 States? 
 
 Give a reason why there is no broad coastal plain along the Pacific Coast. 
 
 How does the total area of all the high mountain provinces of the United States compare 
 (approximately) with the area of the plain and plateau provinces? 
 
 213 
 
Did you, previous to taking this course, conceive the mountain regions of the United States to 
 
 be wider or narrower than you have outlined them? 
 
 What reason can you give for your answer? 
 
 Color in with red pencil (using the symbol indicated in the legend square of the diagram 
 
 map) the region of the Pacific Ranges. Fill in the proper legend square and mark it Pacific 
 
 Ranges. 
 
 Study of Locate the position of the San Francisco and Tamalpais (Cal.) sheets, and outline with 
 
 a section of j_ n ^ the area they include. Letter in the names of the sheets. 
 
 f^h° Have the mountains shown on these sheets a rugged or a gentle topography ? 
 
 Pacific 
 
 ranges. Have the streams steep or gentle slopes ? 
 
 Are the small streams tributary to any large system, or inde- 
 pendent? What do these facts indicate 
 
 regarding the topographic age of the region? 
 
 Is the coast line of California, in general, high and rocky, or low and sandy ? 
 
 Is it, in general, straight or indented? 
 
 What does such a large irregularity as San Francisco Bay indicate 
 
 as to the most recent change of land level in this part of the coast? 
 
 How do you account for the flats on which 
 
 Oakland and Berkeley are built ? 
 
 What is the origin of the narrow neck of land which cuts off the mouth of the Bolinas 
 Lagoon ? 
 
 214 
 
What does its position indicate as to the prevailing direction of currents on this coast? 
 
 Human Why is San Francisco Bay an exceptionally favorable site on the Pacific Coast for the 
 
 occupation. 
 
 growth of cities? 
 
 How is the site affected by the fact that the adjacent mountains are growing ? 
 
 Which has the greater number of docks for ships, Oakland or San Francisco ? 
 
 Suggest a reason why San Francisco, on a peninsula, has grown more than Oakland, on the 
 
 mainland, which has more direct railroad connections. 
 
 What effect has the presence of the cities had on the settlement of the adjacent mountain 
 
 regions? 
 
 Why was a railroad built to the summit of Mt. Tamalpais? 
 
 Suggest reasons for the building of several of the 
 
 difficult mountain roads of the region. 
 
 Write a short paragraph citing the factors which make San Francisco Bay a very impor- 
 tant harbor. 
 
 215 
 
LI.— COAST LINE CORRELATION 
 
 Materials. For Each Student. — The contour map of the United States. The Boothbay (Me.) sheet. The 
 
 Barnegat (N.J.) sheet. The Port Orford (Ore.) sheet. 
 
 For General Class Use. — Mt. Mitchell (N.C.-Tenn.) sheet. 
 
 Purpose. To gain an appreciation of the variation in conditions along the coasts of the United States 
 
 and the main causes for this variation. 
 
 Introduc- There are four general variations in the nature of coast lines, dependent on four variable 
 
 tory. conditions: Whether the coast line is being elevated or depressed, and whether the coast 
 
 topography is low, or bold and rugged. The length of time that a given condition has existed 
 
 also exerts a decided influence in determining the character of the coast line, as do the nature 
 
 of the adjacent land areas and the exposure to waves and currents. 
 
 Study of a Locate the position of the Boothbay (Me.) sheet on your contour map of the United States 
 
 bold, rocky, an( j outline its area in ink. Letter in the name of the sheet. (Text-book, pp. 208-210.) 
 
 indented 
 
 coast. 
 
 Topog- 
 raphy. 
 
 In what physiographic province is this area located ? 
 
 What was the rock structure of this province, as noted in your previous study ? 
 
 In what respects does the topography of the Boothbay area differ from that of the part of this 
 province previously studied? 
 
 Which has the older topography ?_ 
 
 What is the most notable characteristic of this coast ? _ 
 
 What is the general direction of 
 
 the extension of the long bays ("Rivers")? 
 
 Are the shores along this coast steep or low? What does this suggest 
 
 as to the depth of the water offshore ? 1 
 
 What is the approximate average elevation of the islands in, and the ridges between, the 
 
 217 
 
long bays? Are these elevations continuous ridges 
 
 or isolated knobs? Would there be a greater or 
 
 lesser number of islands if the land surface were raised 50 feet? 
 
 If it were depressed 50 feet? 
 
 How does this apply in explanation of the present conditions along this coast ? 
 
 Why should this be called a drowned coast ? 
 
 Human Give reasons why you think this region is attractive as a summer vacation resort, 
 
 occupation. 
 
 What protection do the deep inlets afford vessels ? 
 
 Why are lighthouses necessary ? 
 
 What does their location suggest as to which is the most important harbor of this part of the 
 
 coast? Give a reason why on this coast of 
 
 many fine harbors there is no large city. 
 
 Study of a Locate the position of the Barnegat (N.J.) sheet on your United States contour map and 
 
 low, sandy outline its area in ink. Letter in the name of the sheet. (Text-book, pp. 205 and 212-215.) 
 coast. 
 
 °^ )g " In what physiographic province is this area located? 
 
 Is the coast line bold or low ? What is the condition of the valleys of 
 
 the larger streams? 
 
 218 
 
• 
 
 Does this suggest recent submergence, or uplift, of the land along this coast ? 
 
 What would be the effect of a continued movement in the same direction ? 
 
 In the other direction ? 
 
 What is the origin of Island Beach ? 
 
 What is the nature of the small hills on its surface ? 
 
 Explain why the ocean side of Island Beach is so straight and its land side so irregular. 
 
 What do the blue-lined (straight) areas represent? (See Fig. 20.) 
 
 s. What, then, is taking 
 
 place in the bay between Island Beach and the mainland ? 
 
 Why is a hook, extending west- 
 ward, formed at Barnegat Light? 
 
 219 
 
What does its position and extension suggest as to the 
 
 direction of the current which carries the sand supply? 
 
 Does the action of the currents and 
 
 waves tend to straighten a coast line, or make it irregular? 
 
 Human What evidence is given by the map that the water between the mainland and Island 
 
 occupation. 
 
 Beach is quite shallow? 
 
 r What kind of return justifies the building of a railroad to this 
 
 barren sand bar? 
 
 Give some reasons why ocean bathing is much more pleasant here than at 
 
 Boothbay, Me. 
 
 Why is this Barnegat shore especially dangerous to navigation ? 
 
 What recognition of this fact do you find on the map ? 
 
 Why are the broad mouths of the 
 rivers not available for harbors? 
 
 220 
 
Study of a Locate the position of the Port Orford (Ore.) sheet on your United States map and out- 
 
 bold, reg- line its area with ink. Letter in the name of the sheet. (Text-book, p. 206.) 
 ular coast. 
 
 fTopog- In what physiographic province is this area located? 
 
 raphy. 
 
 What are the general characteristics of that province ? 
 
 To what extent are they shown on 
 
 the Port Orford sheet? x 
 
 What is the nature of the coast line bordering a region of rising mountains, as here 
 shown? 
 
 What portion of the coast line shown on this sheet rises directly and steeply from the sea ? 
 
 Which portion has the most extensive coastal 
 
 plain? How does the presence of the large 
 
 streams account in part for the coastal plain ? 
 
 What conditions of the topography of the 
 
 adjacent land areas would lead to a comparatively rapid development of a coastal plain along 
 
 this coast? 
 
 221 
 
What does the direction of the extension of the bars along this coastal plain (and the deflec- 
 tion of the river mouths) indicate as to the direction of the currents along the coast? 
 
 How does the presence of the streams tend to maintain openings in the bars ? .. 
 
 : Account for 
 
 the lakes along this coast. 
 
 Human What general conditions have prevented a dense settlement along this coast? 
 
 occupation. 
 
 Account for the location of Port Orford. 
 
 What effect must the mountains have on the 
 
 future growth of such a seaport? 
 
 Why is most of the agricultural settlement found on the 
 
 northern coastal plain and in the valleys of the larger streams ? 
 
 222 
 
Write a paragraph comparing and contrasting the conditions of the coast lines of the 
 three areas studied. 
 
 • 
 
 223 
 
LIL — SPECIAL TYPES OF LAKES 
 
 Materials. For Each Student. — The contour map of the United States. The Van Horn (Tex.) sheet. 
 
 The Crater Lake Special (Ore.) sheet. 
 
 Purpose. To afford the pupil an opportunity to apply the methods of the preceding exercises in making 
 
 an original interpretation of the features of the above-named sheets, and to gain an incidental 
 knowledge of two types of lake basins. 
 
 Introduc- In interpreting the Van Horn (Tex.) sheet, see Text-book, pp. 87 and 169.. 
 
 t0, 7- For the Crater Lake (Ore.) sheet, see Text-book, pp. 121-122. 
 
 Consult the references given above, and then proceed to interpret the two maps to the 
 best of your ability, following the general scheme of the preceding exercises. 
 
 225 
 
( 
 
 226 
 
• 
 
 Materials. 
 
 Introduc- 
 tory. 
 
 FIELD EXCURSIONS FOR THE SPRING SEASON 
 
 LIIL — EXCURSION TO STUDY GLACIAL PHENOMENA 
 
 For General Class Use. — One or more magnetic compasses. 
 
 Purpose. To study the nature of the evidence of the former presence of glaciers, and to note some of the 
 
 effects of former giaciation. 
 
 If the school lies outside the belt of former continental giaciation, this excursion cannot, 
 
 of course, be undertaken ; but if it is situated within the limits of that belt, the probabilities 
 
 are that several of the topics of this outline can be included in a single excursion. In some 
 
 regions two or more excursions could be profitably devoted to this study. 
 
 Glacial For this part of the excursion it is assumed that the class is taken to a rock exposure on 
 
 scratches. which glacial striations are visible. Is the rock surface between the striations rough or 
 
 smoothed? .___ What is the width of the 
 
 scratches? Are they straight or irregular ? 
 
 i What is their length ? Describe this rock 
 
 surface in a few sentences. 
 
 What kind of a surface would running water make ? 
 
 Weathering? 
 
 What agency could 
 
 cause such scratches on a rock surface? What is the compass 
 
 direction (approximately) of the scratches? From what direction 
 
 did the ice come ? What effect will weath- 
 ering have on this rock surface ? 
 
 From the freshness of these strive, what do you conclude 
 
 as to the recency of the glacial period? 
 
 227 
 
Bowlders It is assumed that the class is taken to a place where one or more bowlders of foreign 
 
 and peb- 
 
 b es - origin may be seen. What is the nature of the bed rock of the region ? 
 
 .. Of what kind of 
 
 rock is the bowlder composed? 
 
 What reason can you give for the fact that such glacial 
 
 bowlders were given the name erratic ? 
 
 Do you know where rock of this kind is found in 
 
 place? Could an ordinary current of water have brought this bowlder? 
 
 What agent of transportation could readily carry so large a rock? 
 
 Does the place from which the bowlder has 
 
 probably been brought agree with the direction indicated by the glacial scratches? 
 
 A till bank. It is assumed that the class is now examining a cut in a deposit of till. In what kind of 
 
 a water current, rapid or slow, is clay deposited ? In what kind of a 
 
 water current are pebbles carried and deposited ? When water de- 
 posits sediment, is it assorted or unassorted ? Is it stratified or un- 
 
 stratified? Describe this deposit. I 
 
 Is it assorted? 
 
 228 
 
Is it stratified? Would water that brought pebbles also deposit clay at 
 
 the same point? Why could water not have formed this deposit? 
 
 Could wind have caused it? Why? 
 
 Could ice have formed it? 
 
 Write a brief statement of the differences between ice and water as agencies 
 of transportation and deposition. 
 
 Write a brief statement giving the proof that this deposit was not made by water, but by ice. 
 
 Examine the pebbles in the till to see if they are all the same kind as the bed rock of the region. 
 
 Are any of them scratched ? Describe the scratched stones, and tell how 
 
 they could have been scratched if brought by a glacier. 
 
 229 
 
What is the form of stream pebbles? 
 
 Are stream pebbles scratched ? What light do the scratched stones throw 
 
 upon the origin of this till deposit? 
 
 Write a paragraph stating the evidences that you have seen indicating the former presence 
 of an ice sheet in this region, and the reason for concluding that these phenomena cannot be 
 assigned to other agencies, such as wind or running water. 
 
 Other gla- If other glacial phenomena, such as moraines, drumlins, kames, eskers, or outwash gravel 
 
 cial phe- plains are studied, note their position, form, and composition. State their origin, with reasons 
 nomena. 
 
 for the conclusion. 
 
 230 
 
LI V.— EXCURSION TO STUDY RIVER VALLEY DEVELOPMENT 
 
 Materials. For Each Student. — The topographic map of the region, if published. 
 
 Purpose. To study the form and stage of development of a valley in the home region; to interpret its 
 
 past history ; and to gain an appreciation of the probable changes in the future. 
 
 Introduc- For the purpose of this excursion a valley of moderate size is better than a large one. 
 
 tory. (Even a gully in a field would serve for such an excursion, though it would then be necessary 
 
 to modify this outline.) There would be no disadvantage in going to the same valley as that 
 
 studied in section XII. 
 
 The valley Where does the stream rise?. 
 
 form. 
 
 Where is the mouth ? 
 
 About how long is it? 
 
 To what is it tributary? 
 
 About how wide is its valley ? About how deep is the valley ? 
 
 What is the nature of the divide (sharp, flat, etc.) between this 
 
 valley and the next one ? Are the sides of 
 
 the valley steep or gently sloping? ._ 
 
 If the sides are different in different parts, state the 
 
 nature of the difference. 
 
 Has the valley form the characteristics of youth, maturity, or old age? 
 
 Is there greater or 
 
 less maturity toward the mouth of the stream ? '_ 
 
 Thestream. About how wide is the stream ? How does this compare with 
 
 the width of the valley? 
 
 ^^ Is the stream ever larger? About how 
 
 much? Are there flood plains ? 
 
 231 
 
Is the course meandering? Does the stream flow on bed rock 
 
 anywhere? Are there any lakes in this valley ? 
 
 Are there falls or rapids? 
 
 What evidence, if any, is there that the stream is enlarging its valley either 
 
 laterally or vertically? 
 
 What evidence, if any, is there that the stream is aggrading its valley?. 
 
 What does the condition of the stream and its relation to the valley indicate as to the age 
 stage of the valley? 
 
 Processes In what part of its valley does a young stream cut most rapidly ? 
 
 of valley 
 
 formation. 
 
 the valley form if this were the only process in valley formation ? 
 
 232 
 
 What would be 
 
How does weathering aid 
 
 in valley widening? 
 
 How does the stream itself tend to widen its valley ? 
 
 Which is the more rapid, the verti- 
 
 cal cutting by the stream, or weathering? 
 
 Which, therefore, represents the longer time for its formation, a broad valley or a gorge valley ? 
 
 Apply these conclusions in proving your 
 
 previous statement about the age stage of this valley. 
 
 • 
 
 Rate of Have you ever observed, or heard of any change in the form of this valley? 
 
 valley for- 
 mation. 
 
 Are visible changes to be expected in a year ? In ten years ? 
 
 In a thousand years? Is the rate of valley formation rapid or slow? 
 
 About how much material has been removed from the valley where 
 
 you stand ? Answer by filling out the following sentence : A depth of about 
 
 feet, and a width of about 1 feet (or miles). Where has all this material 
 
 gone? 
 
 Is the stream always carrying sediment? Write a brief paragraph stating 
 
 what you conclude as to the rate of valley formation and the time required to form such a 
 
 valley as this one. 
 
 233 
 
The future Will the stream continue to erode this valley deeper? Where is its 
 
 of the val- 
 
 ley> base level ? r __— r 
 
 Can it erode below that? _ Will weathering 
 
 continue? Will its rate increase or decrease ? 
 
 Write a brief paragraph 
 
 telling what you consider to be the future of this valley, if no accident intervenes, giving rea- 
 sons for your conclusions. 
 
 234 
 
LV.— EXCURSION TO STUDY THE GENERAL PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE 
 
 REGION 
 
 Materials. For Each Student. — The topographic map of the region, if published. 
 
 Purpose. To gain an appreciation of the physiographic features of the home region; its topography, 
 
 drainage, and cultural relations. 
 
 Introduc- 
 tory. 
 
 Topog- 
 raphy. 
 
 If possible, these observations should be made from some elevated view point, such as the 
 top of a hill overlooking the surrounding region, or a tower which affords a broad outlook. 
 Failing such a vantage point, it may still be possible to find a site from which the general 
 topography of the region can be appreciated and studied. 
 
 What great class or classes of rocks have you observed in this region ? 
 
 If sedimentary, 
 
 are the layers horizontal or inclined ? 
 
 What can you infer from this as to the former con- 
 
 dition of the region ? 
 
 What marked changes have occurred in the region since the time of 
 
 the formation of the rocks? 
 
 What is the topographic form of the region, i.e. is it a 
 
 plateau, flood plain, mountain valley, etc.? ■. 
 
 235 
 
What is the elevation above sea level of the 
 
 place on which you are standing, as shown by your topographic sheet? 
 
 Locate and give the names and elevations of any other hills or 
 
 summits which are visible and are shown on your map. 
 
 What can you say regarding their 
 
 origin and history ? 
 
 Drainage. Locate and name the largest stream of the region. 
 
 Is it a continuous or an intermittent 
 
 stream? j What is the source of its water 
 
 supply? 
 
 To what drainage system does it belong ? 
 
 236 
 
What tributaries has the main 
 
 stream of this region? 
 
 Has the main stream a straight or meandering course ? 
 Is it cutting down or building up its channel ? 
 
 How do you explain this condition ? 
 
 What is the topographic age of the stream valleys, 
 
 — young, mature, or old? : Describe their 
 
 form to show what you mean by applying such a term to them. 
 
 Are there any lakes, and if 
 
 so, what caused them? 
 
 237 
 
Human What was the main physiographic factor which led to the establishment and growth of 
 
 occupation. 
 
 the community in which you live? 
 
 What is the bearing of the fact that the mainstream is 
 
 navigable or not navigable? 
 
 That the region is level, hilly, or mountainous ? 
 
 What has 
 
 been the influence of the topographic age of the valleys on the growth and development of the 
 
 region ? 
 
 What are the main lines of transportation and travel ? 
 
 In what ways have these 
 
 been influenced or determined by the topography ? 
 
 238 
 
Is the climate of the region humid, dry, 
 
 or arid? What has been the effect of the 
 
 climatic conditions on the human occupation of the region? 
 
 Is the region an agricultural, 
 
 grazing, mining, or manufacturing district? 
 
 What physiographic factors have determined 
 
 this? "_ 
 
 Write a short paragraph stating the influence of the physiography on the settlement, 
 present occupation, and development of the region in which you live. 
 
 239 
 
• 
 
 THE OCEAN 
 LVI. OCEAN CURRENTS 
 
 Purpose. To study the cause of the system of ocean currents, and to note the influence of the 
 
 currents on temperature. 
 
 Relation of Figure 22 is a chart showing the system of ocean currents in the oceans of the world ; 
 
 ocean cur- ant \ Figure 40 (p. 329) shows the prevailing winds over the oceans. In each case the arrows 
 
 rents to point in the direction of motion of the water or air. Compare these two charts to see 
 winds 
 
 how they resemble each other. For instance, how does the ocean current south of 
 
 Australia, South America, and Africa compare with the wind direction in that region? 
 
 How do the winds and currents agree in the northern Atlantic and Pacific ? 
 
 Why is the current in the southern hemisphere more regular than that in the northern ? 
 
 What is the direction of winds in the tropical zone on each side of the equator ? 
 
 How does the motion of the ocean waters correspond to this ? 
 
 What effect have the continents on the ocean currents ?. 
 
 If you were to blow on the surface of a pan of water, which way would the water move ? 
 
 241 
 
What must be the effect of the steady blowing of the wind in one direction over a large body 
 of water like the ocean ? 
 
 From your study of the wind and ocean current charts, state the primary cause of the ocean 
 currents. 
 
 fw 
 
 
 / 
 
 / / 
 
 
 TTPfc 
 
 m 
 
 QWv4l\ \ \ GREENLAND J 7# 
 
 R C^T J C 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 jn&mtf'- 
 
 OCEAN 
 
 
 
 VA ;aCStWia/V/ / /, ~^J\\?Xs 
 
 ?/ « s 
 
 •^m^ 
 
 -mi 
 
 
 ^Ma^5ra 
 
 
 
 
 OCEAN 
 
 , *w T 
 
 120 ° Longitude East IliO ' 
 
 160' Longitude W„t 120" 
 
 80° Longitude Weft 40° from Greenwich 0° Longitude E«tt 40° 
 
 The ocean 
 eddies. 
 
 Fig. 22. — A Chart showing the Principal. Ocean Currents and Ocean Drifts in the World. 
 
 On the chart (Fig. 22) locate two great eddies in the Atlantic Ocean and two in the 
 Pacific. On which side of the equator does each lie? 
 
 242 
 
Selecting one in the northern hemisphere, describe the motion of water in it, e.g. " it flows 
 southwest, then west, then" 
 
 In other words, the direction of the current is constantly 
 
 turning. Going with the current, which way is it turning, toward the right or toward the left ? 
 
 The effect of the earth's rotation tends to turn, or deflect, all moving bodies toward the right in 
 the northern hemisphere. Study the eddies in the southern hemisphere, and state in which way 
 
 the currents are deflected in that hemisphere. 
 
 Warm and In the northern hemisphere, is a current from the south warm or cold, as compared 
 
 cold cur- 
 rents. 
 
 to the ocean water on either side of it? 
 
 How about a current from the north ? 
 
 Is the Labrador current cold or warm? " 
 
 The Gulf Stream? The west wind drift? 
 
 Which side of the North Atlantic has the 
 
 warmer water, the American or the European? ___. 
 
 Locate cool currents in the southern hemisphere and state their position and cause. 
 
 What effect on the temperature of the tropical oceans must the movement of ocean currents 
 
 have? 
 
 What effect on the temperature of the Arctic regions must the movement of the ocean currents 
 
 have? 
 
 243 
 
Currents from which ocean, the Atlantic or Pacific, have the greatest effect on the Arctic ? 
 
 Trace the southern limit of icebergs in the North 
 
 Atlantic. On which side does the ice float farthest south? 
 
 Explain this. *< 
 
 Of what importance is the fact that icebergs come down across the path followed by the 
 transatlantic steamers ? 
 
 Fogs are caused by damp winds blowing from warm to cool regions. Knowing this, and 
 by the aid of the ocean current chart, explain why the ocean near Newfoundland is one of the 
 
 foggiest places on the earth. 
 
 Effect of Why cannot the ocean currents themselves affect the temperature of the land ? 
 
 ocean cur- 
 rents on 
 the temper- 
 
 the land What must help to carry their influence to the land? 
 
 What is the prevailing wind direction in the British Isles? 1 
 
 State why the climate of the British Isles is much warmer than that of southern Labrador, 
 
 which lies in the same latitude. 
 
 Are east winds on the coast of New England warmed or cooled in passing over the adjacent 
 
 ocean current ? How about winds from the 
 
 south in the New England region? State as 
 
 fully as you can how the ocean currents influence the climate (a) of northern Europe ; 
 
 244 
 
(b) northeastern United States ; 
 
 and (c) northwestern United States and Alaska. 
 
 On the blank chart (Fig. 23) sketch from memory the great eddies and the principal 
 currents of the oceans, giving their names. 
 
 245 
 
« 
 
247 
 
€ 
 
LVIL — TIDES 
 
 Purpose. To study the rise and fall of the tides at a given place in order to learn the time between 
 
 tides, the variation in height of tides, and their relation to the moon's phases; also to learn the 
 cause of tidal currents. 
 
 
 
 TIDES AT EASTPORT, ME. 
 
 , SEPTEMBER 
 
 
 
 High Tides 
 
 
 Low 
 
 Tides 
 
 
 a.m. 
 
 P.M. 
 
 A. 
 
 M. 
 
 p 
 
 M. 
 
 Date 
 
 Time 
 
 Height in Feet 
 
 Time 
 
 Height 
 
 Time 
 
 Height 
 
 Time 
 
 Height 
 
 
 h. in. 
 
 
 h. m. 
 
 
 h. m. 
 
 
 h. m. 
 
 
 1 
 
 2.01 
 
 18.6 
 
 2.25 
 
 18.7 
 
 8.10 
 
 -0.2 
 
 8.41 
 
 -0.5 
 
 2 
 
 2.54 
 
 17.8 
 
 3.14 
 
 18.0 
 
 9.01 
 
 0.7 
 
 9.38 
 
 -0.1 
 
 3 
 
 3.50 
 
 17.0 
 
 4.15 
 
 17.4 
 
 10.00 
 
 1.5 
 
 10.40 
 
 0.7 
 
 4 
 
 4.52 
 
 16.3 
 
 5.19 
 
 17.0 
 
 11.03 
 
 2.0 
 
 11.46 
 
 0.9 
 
 5 
 
 6.00 
 
 16.0 
 
 6.26' 
 
 17.1 
 
 
 
 12.11 
 
 2.1 
 
 6 
 
 7.08 
 
 16.1 
 
 7.31 
 
 17.5 
 
 0.54 
 
 0.7 
 
 1.18 
 
 1.8 
 
 7 
 
 8.11 
 
 16.8 
 
 8.32 
 
 18.2 
 
 1.56 
 
 0.2 
 
 2.21 
 
 1.1 
 
 8 
 
 9.08 
 
 17.6 
 
 9.28 
 
 19.0 
 
 2.55 
 
 -0.5 
 
 3.17 
 
 0.1 
 
 9 
 
 9.59 
 
 18.3 
 
 10.18 
 
 19.4 
 
 3.45 
 
 -1.2 
 
 4.08 
 
 -0.6 
 
 10 
 
 10.43 
 
 19.0 
 
 11.04 
 
 19.7 
 
 4.34 
 
 -1.5 
 
 4.54 
 
 -1.2 
 
 11 
 
 11.27 
 
 19.3 
 
 11.48 
 
 19.5 
 
 5.16 
 
 -1.6 
 
 5.37 
 
 -1.4 
 
 12 
 
 
 
 12.08 
 
 19.2 
 
 5.58 
 
 -1.4 
 
 6.20 
 
 -1.3 
 
 13 
 
 0.30 
 
 19.0 
 
 12.49 
 
 18.9 
 
 6.38 
 
 -0.8 
 
 7.02 
 
 -0.8 
 
 14 
 
 1.12 
 
 18.3 
 
 1.30 
 
 18.2 
 
 7.18 
 
 0.0 
 
 7.43 
 
 -0.1 
 
 15 
 
 1.54 
 
 17.4 
 
 2.12 
 
 17.4 
 
 8.00 
 
 1.0 
 
 8.28 
 
 0.7 
 
 16 
 
 2.38 
 
 16.4 
 
 2.56 
 
 16.6 
 
 8.42 
 
 2.0 
 
 9.15 
 
 1.5 
 
 17 
 
 3.25 
 
 15.5 
 
 3.43 
 
 15.9 
 
 9.30 
 
 2.9 
 
 10.07 
 
 2.2 
 
 18 
 
 4.16 
 
 14.8 
 
 4.37 
 
 15.3 
 
 10.23 
 
 3.6 
 
 11.02 
 
 2.5 
 
 19 
 
 5.12 
 
 14.4 
 
 5.34 
 
 15.1 
 
 11.21 
 
 3.9 
 
 11.58 
 
 2.6 
 
 20 
 
 6.10 
 
 14.4 
 
 6.31 
 
 15.4 
 
 
 
 12.20 
 
 3.7 
 
 21 
 
 7.08 
 
 15.0 
 
 7.26 
 
 16.0 
 
 0.55 
 
 2.2 
 
 1.16 
 
 3.1 
 
 22 
 
 8.00 
 
 15.9 
 
 8.18 
 
 16.9 
 
 1.48 
 
 1.5 
 
 , 2.11 
 
 2.1 
 
 23 
 
 8.48 
 
 16.9 
 
 9.07 
 
 17.9 
 
 2.38 
 
 0.7 
 
 2.58 
 
 1.0 
 
 24 
 
 9.32 
 
 17.9 
 
 9.53 
 
 18.8 
 
 3.22 
 
 -0.2 
 
 3.44 
 
 -0.1 
 
 25 
 
 10.16 
 
 18.9 
 
 10.38 
 
 19.4 
 
 4.08 
 
 -1.0 
 
 4.27 
 
 -1.1 
 
 26 
 
 10.59 
 
 19.6 
 
 11.22 
 
 19.7 
 
 4.49 
 
 -1.5 
 
 511 
 
 -1.8 
 
 27 
 
 1142 
 
 20.0 
 
 
 
 5.31 
 
 -1.7 
 
 5.55 
 
 -2.1 
 
 28 
 
 0.08 
 
 19.8 
 
 12.26 
 
 20.0 
 
 6.15 
 
 -1.5 
 
 6.41 
 
 -2.1 
 
 29 
 
 0.54 
 
 19.6 
 
 1.13 
 
 19.7 
 
 7.00 
 
 -1.0 
 
 7.30 
 
 -1.7 
 
 30 
 
 1.42 
 
 18.9 
 
 2.04 
 
 19.1 
 
 7.48 
 
 -0.3 
 
 8.23 
 
 -1.1 
 
 249 
 
Figure 24 is a diagram showing the rise and fall of the tides at Eastport, Me., for the 
 first 15 days of September during a certain year. At the top of the diagram, the figures 12, 
 6, 12, 6, 12, etc., represent hours of the day, the first 12 being midnight, the second 12 noon, 
 the third 12 midnight again, etc. The first 6 is 6 o'clock in the morning; the second 6 is- 
 6 p.m. Each of the vertical lines of the cross-section paper represents two hours of time. On 
 the right and left margins the figures 0, 5, 10, 15, 20, etc., represent feet ; and each horizontal 
 line of the cross-section paper stands for 1 foot. The zigzag line represents the rise and fall 
 of the tide for the first 15 days of the month. Study this diagram until you understand it. 
 Notice, for example, in the tide table for this month, printed below, that the first high tide 
 of Sept. 1 came at 2.01 a.m., and reached a height of 18.6 feet; the second high tide 
 came at 2.25 p.m., and reached a height of 18.7 feet; the first low tide came at 8.10 a.m. 
 and its elevation was —0.2 foot; the second low tide, at 8.41 p.m., stood at — 0.5 foot. In 
 making the diagram, four dots were placed in the proper positions under Sept. 1, two for 
 the high tides and two for the low. These were then connected by the lines. The same pro- 
 cedure was followed for each of the other days. 
 
 In the table on page 467 are data for the completion of the diagram (Fig. 24). Place dots 
 in the proper positions for the last fifteen days of September, and then connect them with lines. 
 You then have a diagram showing the rise and fall of the tides at one place for a month. 
 
 How many high {flood) and low (ebb) tides are there each day ? 
 
 From the table, determine the exact length of time between flood and ebb tide on a certain 
 
 day. - Between ebb and flood tide. 
 
 . Between two successive flood tides. 
 
 Between two successive ebb tides. 
 
 Between the flood tides of successive days. 
 
 If the flood tide were to reach its greatest height at 12 o'clock, noon, 
 
 on Sept. 10, at what time (approximately) would it reach its greatest height on Sept. 11 ? 
 
 On Sept. 15 ? 
 
 Height of What is the range (in feet) between the high and low tide on Sept. 1 ? 
 
 the tide. 
 
 Find a day in which the range is greater than this. 
 
 Find one in which the 
 
 range is less. 
 
 How many periods of high range of tide are there in this month ? ___ 
 
 How many of low range of tide ? 
 
 Between what days of the month is the tidal range high? 
 
 250 
 
1— 
 
 UJ 
 LU 
 LU 
 
 10 o 
 CN - - 
 
 10 
 
 1— 
 
 LU 
 LU 
 Ll_ 
 
 g t 2 « 
 
 CM | 
 
 O 
 
 i— 
 
 LU 
 LU 
 
 Li_ 
 
 O lO o 
 CN - - 
 
 10 o 
 
 O 
 
 h 
 a 
 m 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 CN 
 H 
 
 a 
 
 LU 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 h 
 
 a 
 
 LU 
 CO 
 
 CM 
 
 CD 
 
 —CM. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c^£ = __« == =r: 
 
 
 CM __ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 _ <ur __~~---_ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 00 ifs 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i r;;; =V 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CN W_ , 
 
 
 _CN. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 0) 
 
 h 
 
 a 
 
 lu 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 0) 
 
 h 
 
 a 
 
 LU 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 0) 
 CN 
 
 h 
 
 a 
 
 LU 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 CM 
 
 CD 
 _CN_ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ,__=--""_ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 £N mmm 
 
 
 CJ. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 00 
 h 
 
 a 
 
 LU 
 CO 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 h 
 a 
 
 LU 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 00 
 CN 
 
 h 
 
 a 
 
 LU 
 CO 
 
 CD 
 CN 
 
 CD 
 CN, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO g- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CM 
 
 
 w ism: 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 — y? — 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 4*;- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 _OL- = _ 
 
 
 cm p^ ; 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 h 
 
 a 
 u 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 h 
 
 a 
 
 LU 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 CN 
 
 h 
 a 
 
 LU 
 CO 
 
 CD 
 CM 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CN 
 
 
 CM 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 _4N._ 
 
 
 W 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 h 
 
 a 
 
 Ed 
 CO 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 h 
 a 
 
 LU 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 CN 
 
 h 
 
 a 
 
 LU 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 CM 
 
 CO 
 CM. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CM _ 
 
 
 CM 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 - c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 _CA 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 10 
 h 
 
 m 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 h 
 
 a 
 
 LU 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 10 
 CN 
 
 H 
 
 a 
 
 LU 
 CO 
 
 CD 
 CM 
 
 CO 
 
 _cm_ 
 
 1 
 
 LL 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1> 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ) 
 
 
 
 
 CM - 
 
 
 cm IS: 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cm ,e -5; 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 h 
 
 a 
 w 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 h 
 
 a 
 
 LU 
 CO 
 
 ^~ 
 
 
 
 CN 
 
 h 
 a 
 
 LU 
 CO 
 
 eo 
 
 CM 
 
 CO 
 CM_ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cm :S5I 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *° **"""" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cm ,i;; 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 h 
 
 a 
 
 to 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 h 
 
 a 
 
 LU 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 CN 
 
 h 
 
 a 
 
 LU 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 CN 
 
 CO 
 CN_ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CM ""^CT. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 2 m~*~ 
 
 
 CD 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 =%-==:::: 
 
 
 
 
 _____,_-«^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CM *S - ~~-- 
 
 
 cm iic;; 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CN 
 
 h 
 
 a 
 bd 
 CO 
 
 
 
 CN 
 
 h 
 
 a 
 
 LU 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 CN 
 CN 
 
 H 
 
 a 
 
 LU 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 CN 
 
 CO 
 
 CM_ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CD , 
 
 . ' 
 
 CD 
 
 „ 
 
 £-=■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ----a--f= = -- 
 
 
 
 j;»«-"* ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cm lis;; 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 —CN. ""' "*a 
 
 
 CM ; 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 h 
 
 a 
 
 LU 
 CO 
 
 — 
 
 ' — 
 
 a 
 
 LU 
 CO 
 
 --"""« 3 
 
 
 
 CN 
 
 h 
 a 
 
 LU 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 CM 
 
 CD 
 .. CN 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 _-=-- :a 
 
 
 " ■*-■ — =L 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 «M -i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CN , — f — T 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1— 
 
 LU 
 UJ 
 Ll_ 
 
 O 10 
 CN - ~ 
 
 10 o 
 
 1— 
 
 LU 
 LU 
 
 u_ 
 
 o 10 
 
 2 B 
 
 O 
 
 LU 
 LU 
 
 O 10, "o 
 CN - - 
 
 10 o 
 
 251 
 
§ 
 
 Between what days is it low ? 
 
 moon? 
 
 Which two of these periods correspond with new and full 
 
 quarters of the moon ? 
 
 Which two with the first and last 
 
 Which of these are 
 
 the spring tides (see Text-book, p. 189)? 
 
 Which are the neap tides? 
 
 Are the sun and 
 
 moon more nearly in line at new and full moon, or at the quarters ? 
 
 What does the relation between moon and tidal range suggest as to 
 
 the cause of tides? 
 
 Tidal cur- The tide causes a gradual rise and fall in the level of the ocean. It is essentially a ver- 
 
 rents. tical movement ; but under some conditions the tide causes horizontal movements, which are 
 
 called tidal currents. (Text-book, pp. 187-189.) In the diagram (Fig. 25) the tide rises 4.6 feet 
 
 on one side of the island, and 4 feet on the other side. What will be the movement of water 
 
 through the strait (s) at high tide ? 
 
 If the tide rose to a height of 4 feet on both sides of 
 
 the island, but high tide came a half hour later on one side than on the other, what would be 
 
 the result in the strait (s) ? 
 
 • 
 
 253 
 
Fig. 25. — To show Differences in Height of Tide at Different Points. 
 How would such tidal currents affect the movements of ships ? 
 
 The transportation of 
 
 sand and other sediment? 
 
 When the currents move swiftly, they can carry much sedi- 
 ment. What must happen when the current is checked ? 
 
 254 
 
• 
 
 Materials. 
 
 Purpose. 
 
 The air has 
 substance. 
 
 THE ATMOSPHERE 
 LVIII. — THE ATMOSPHERE HAS SUBSTANCE AND WEIGHT 
 
 For Each Student. — A drinking glass. A piece of candle. 
 
 For General Class Use. — Air pump. A glass cylinder open at both ends. A glass tube 35 inches 
 long sealed at one end. A bottle of mercury. A glass funnel. A ruler. 
 
 To show that the atmosphere Jias substance and weight; also the principle of the barometer. 
 
 What resemblance is there between a balloon floating in the air and a boat floating on the 
 
 water? : 
 
 Why does the balloon float? 
 
 What is the difference between water and air to sight ? 
 
 Could a bird fly if the air were not a real substance? Could a sailboat 
 
 move along? Would a windmill be turned? 
 
 Give other proofs that the air is something real. 
 
 The air is What takes place when a match burns? 
 
 a mixture 
 
 of gases. ^ 
 
 Would it burn more or less rapidly if the air were all oxygen? 
 
 All carbon dioxide ? Light a small piece of candle, and over it set 
 
 an upturned glass. Note what happens. T 
 
 255 
 
Explain why the candle light went out. 
 
 Why is a lamp chimney made with an opening at both the top and bottom ? 
 
 Make a list of the other substances of which the air is composed. (Text-book, p. 229.) 
 
 The air Why must all substances on the earth have weight ' 
 
 has weight. 
 
 Why, then, must the atmosphere also have weight ? 
 
 Place a glass cylinder, open at both ends, on the air pump. Press the palm of your hand on 
 the upper end of the cylinder. Pump out the air from beneath your hand. What is the effect of 
 
 the air above your hand ' 
 
 Why do you not ordinarily feel the weight of the air? 
 
 How much Two members of the class perform this experiment, the others watching closely and 
 
 the air answering the questions below. One of the experimenters stands the glass tube on its closed 
 
 weighs. 
 
 end. What fills the tube? The other experimenter carefully fills 
 
 the tube with mercury, using the glass funnel. What now fills the glass tube ? 
 
 256 
 
Into a drinking glass pour mercury enough to fill it to a depth of two inches. The student 
 holding the glass tube now puts his thumb firmly over the open end of the tube, turns the 
 tube upside down, thrusts the end beneath the mercury in the glass, and then removes his 
 
 thumb. What happens ? 
 
 The other experimenter next measures the height of the mercury in the tube, measuring from 
 the surface of the mercury in the glass. How many inches long is the column of mercury ? 
 
 What is above it? Why does the mercury 
 
 not drop out of the tube? 
 
 The result would have been the same if the tube had been a foot square, or an inch square, 
 or any size. Fill out the following sentence. The weight of a column of air is equal to the 
 
 weight of a similar column of mercury inches high. A column of 
 
 mercury 1 inch square at the base and 1 inch high weighs approximately \ pound. How much 
 
 would a column of mercury 1 inch square and 30 inches high weigh ? 
 
 How much, then, is the weight of a column of air 1 inch square? 
 
 Fill out the following sentence. The pressure of the atmosphere is equal to 
 
 pounds on every square inch. 
 
 The barom- The apparatus just used is a rough form of barometer. Could water or other liquids be 
 
 eter. 
 
 used in a barometer? If water were used, would the column in the tube be 
 
 higher or lower than the mercury column ? Why ? 
 
 Why is mercury the best adapted liquid for use in barometers ? 
 
 257 
 
For what purpose is the 
 
 barometer used? 4 
 
 If there is a mercurial barometer in the school, examine it carefully and make a drawing of it, 
 naming the important parts. Watch the barometer for the next few days to see if the column 
 of mercury remains always at exactly the same height. Keep a record of your observations. 
 
 What do they show about the weight, or pressure, of the air ? 
 
 < 
 
 258 
 
Materials. 
 
 Purpose. 
 
 The ther- 
 mometer. 
 
 LIX. — THE THERMOMETER, AND THE DAILY RANGE OF TEMPERATURE 
 
 For Each Student. — Ruler. Sharp pencil. 
 
 For General Class Use. — One or more thermometers. 
 
 To understand the thermometer; to interpret the daily range of temperature; and to 
 study the effect of inclination of the sun's rays. 
 
 Examine the thermometer. What is in the space above the mercury? '_ 
 
 If air were there, would the mercury rise and fall so easily? 
 
 Why does not the mercury rise 30 inches, as in the barometer? 
 
 Does the 
 
 mercury in the thermometer rise or fall when warmed? Why? 
 
 State and explain the movement of the mercury when cooled. 
 
 Could other liquids besides 
 
 mercury be used for thermometers? 
 
 Fill out the following sentence: Liquids expand when warmed and 
 
 when cooled. Find out if the same is true of gases and solids. 
 
 Fahrenheit 
 and Centi- 
 grade 
 scales. 
 
 If your thermometer is graduated according to the Fahrenheit scale, what is its boiling point ? 
 
 Its freezing point ? How many degrees are there between the 
 
 boiling and freezing points ? By the Centigrade scale, freezing point is called 0° 
 
 and boiling point 100°. How many degrees of Centigrade are equal to 1° of Fahrenheit ? 1 
 
 Explain why it is true that to change Centigrade to Fahrenheit scale you multiply by 1.8 and add 32. 
 
 259 
 
Change 10° Centigrade into Fahrenheit degrees. 
 
 Change 25° Centigrade into Fahrenheit. 
 
 Making a 
 curve to 
 show daily 
 range of 
 tempera- 
 ture. 
 
 Below is printed a record of the temperature for every two hours on a winter's day (Feb. 
 19), in a city in northern United States. In the diagram (Fig. 26) each of the horizontal lines 
 represent 1°, and each of the vertical lines 2 hours. Make a cross to indicate the degree of 
 temperature for each two hours (as shown in Fig. 26). Then connect the centers of these 
 crosses with a line. 
 
 A.M. 
 
 P.M. 
 
 Midnight 
 21° 
 
 2 
 25° 
 
 Temperature record for one day. 
 
 20° 
 
 4 
 
 25.5 C 
 
 19° 
 
 6 
 24° 
 
 6 
 18.9° 
 
 8 
 23.2° 
 
 18.8° 
 
 10 
 
 22° 
 
 10 
 
 20.8° 
 
 Midnight 
 20° 
 
 Noon 
 23° 
 
 A.M. 
 
 P M. 
 
 Study of 
 the daily 
 
 Midnight Noon Midnight 
 
 12 2 4 6 8 10 12 2 4 6 8 10 12 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 f 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 / 
 
 
 y 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 / 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fig. 26. 
 
 26° 
 25° 
 24° 
 23° 
 22° 
 21° 
 20° 
 19° 
 18° 
 17° 
 
 If possible make a similar curve (on the accompanying sheet of cross-section paper) representing local 
 conditions. Data can be secured from the nearest Weather Bureau office, or from a self-registering thermom- 
 eter. Failing such records, the pupils themselves may supply data, one pupil being sent to observe the tem- 
 perature every two hours, during school hours, and volunteers bringing data from home for the evening and 
 early morning. 
 
 At about what hour of the day was the temperature lowest? 
 
 Highest? Why does the 
 
 warmest period come after midday ? 
 
 260 
 
The coldest after midnight? 
 
 Making a On the cross-section paper make a curve similar to that previously made, to show thi 
 
 daily curve range of temperature for a summer day. Following are data for such a curve, representinj 
 for summer. ^ e temperatures for July 10 in a northern city. 
 
 A.M. 
 
 Midnight 
 60° 
 
 2 
 
 56° 
 
 4 
 
 55.4° 
 
 6 
 
 57° 
 
 65° 
 
 10 
 
 74° 
 
 Noon 
 80° 
 
 P.M. 
 
 2 
 
 85° 
 
 4 
 
 83° 
 
 6 
 79° 
 
 8 
 73 c 
 
 10 
 
 66° 
 
 Midnight 
 61° 
 
 Compari- 
 son of the 
 
 Why is it warmer at midday in summer (as shown in the diagram just drawn) than a 
 two daily midday in winter (as shown in the diagram for the winter day) ? 
 
 curves. 
 
 Why warmer during the night ? 
 
 In which of the diagrams is there greatest range between lowest and highest temperatures 
 
 Why is this true ? 
 
 How do the two curves resemble each other ? 
 
 Fill out the following sentence : In both summer and winter the temperature is 
 
 Variatioo 
 
 in amount 
 
 of heat at midday than late in the afternoon; and the temperature is 
 
 from the j n sumrQ er than in winter. What relation do these facts have to the altitude of the sun 
 sun. 
 
 261 
 
To understand the reason why the altitude of the sun influences the temperature, draw two 
 diagrams, as follows : 
 
 Diagram 1. On the cross-section paper, mark heavily two of the vertical parallel lines an 
 inch apart down to a certain horizontal line. How many spaces do these vertical parallel lines 
 
 include at the horizontal line? Starting from the same horizontal 
 
 line, draw parallel lines (an inch apart), each at an angle of 45° with the horizontal liue. How 
 
 many spaces are included between these two parallel lines at the horizontal line ? 
 
 If these parallel lines in both cases represent rays of the sun, and the horizontal 
 
 line the surface of the earth, in which case would a given area receive most rays ? 
 
 How does this help to explain the fact that the sun warms the earth more at midday than in 
 the afternoon ? 
 
 In summer more than in winter ? 
 
 Diagram 2. In the diagram (Fig. 27) draw two lines, one vertical, the other at an angle 
 of 45°, both passing through the atmosphere to the same point on the surface of the earth 
 
 ATMOSPHERE 
 
 Fig. 27. 
 
 (marked A). Let each line represent a ray of sunlight. Measure with the ruler to see in 
 which case the ray passes through a greater thickness of air. Which ray, then, would be most 
 
 interfered with in its passage through the air? 
 
 How does this help to explain (a) the fact that the sun is warmer at noon than in the after- 
 
 noon (• 
 
 262 
 
(b) that it is warmer in summer than in winter ? 
 
 (c) that you can often look directly at the 
 
 sun just before sunset? 
 
 Now state, clearly and concisely, why the sun's rays are warmer in 
 
 summer than in winter, and at noon than in the afternoon. 
 
 263 
 
4 
 
LX.— WEATHER OBSERVATIONS 
 
 Materials. For General Class Use. — One or more thermometers. A barometer. If possible, other meteoro- 
 
 logical instruments. 
 
 Purpose. To study local weather conditions. 
 
 Value of Work of this nature will teach the use of the instruments ; it will direct the student's at- 
 
 such a tention to the weather phenomena that are always surrounding him ; it will supply original 
 
 s u y ' data for later use, especially in the study of weather maps. For a part or all of the time that 
 
 the class is studying the atmosphere a weather record may profitably be kept, using such in- 
 struments as the school possesses. 
 How to For at least one week, at the same hour if possible, let each student make observations of 
 
 keep the ^ e we ather conditions and fill in the blank spaces in the table. After that, let a different 
 record 
 
 student, each day, make the observations and report them to the class for entry in their tables. 
 
 265 
 
i 
 
Date 
 
 Day of 
 Week 
 
 Hour 
 of Day 
 
 Tem- 
 pera- 
 ture 
 
 Baro- 
 metric 
 Pressure 
 
 Wind Direction 
 
 Wind Velocity 
 
 Kinds of Clouds 
 
 Rain or 
 
 Snow 
 
 Amount of 
 Precipita- 
 tion 
 
 
 Mon. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 Tues. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Wed. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Thur. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fri. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Mon. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Tues. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Wed. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Thur. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fri. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Mon. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Tues. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Wed. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Thur. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fri. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Mon. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Tues. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Wed. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Thur. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fri. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 267 
 
Date 
 
 Day of 
 Week 
 
 Hour 
 of Day 
 
 Tem- 
 pera- 
 ture 
 
 Baro- 
 metric 
 Pressure 
 
 Wind Direction 
 
 Wind Velocity 
 
 Kinds of Clouds 
 
 Rain or 
 
 Snow 
 
 Amount of 
 Precipita- 
 tion 
 
 
 Mon. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Tues. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Wed. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Thur. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fri. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Mon. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Tues. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Wed. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Thur. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fri. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Mon. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Tues. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Wed. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Thur. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fri. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Mon. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Tues. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Wed. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Thur 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fri. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 268 
 
Date 
 
 Day ok 
 Week 
 
 Hour 
 of Day 
 
 Tem- 
 pera- 
 ture 
 
 Baro- 
 metric 
 Pressure 
 
 Wind Direction 
 
 Wind Velocity 
 
 Kinds of Clouds 
 
 Rain or 
 
 Snow 
 
 Amount of 
 Precipita- 
 tion 
 
 
 Mon. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Tues. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Wed. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Thur. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fri. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Mon. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Tues. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Wed. 
 Thur. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 '• 
 
 
 Fri. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Mon. 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 Tues. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Wed. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Thur. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 Fri. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Mon. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Tues. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Wed. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Thur. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fri. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 269 
 
Date 
 
 Day of 
 Week 
 
 IIOUE 
 
 of Day 
 
 Tem- 
 pera- 
 ture 
 
 Baro- 
 metric 
 Pressure 
 
 Wind Direction 
 
 Wind Velocity 
 
 Kinds of Clouds 
 
 Rain oe 
 
 Snow 
 
 Amount of 
 Precipita- 
 tion 
 
 
 Mon. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Tues. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Wed. 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Thur. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fri. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Mon. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Tues. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Wed. 
 Thur. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fri. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Mon. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Tues. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Wed. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Thur. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fri. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Mon. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Tues. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Wed. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Thur 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fri. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 270 
 
LXL — THE SEASONAL TEMPERATURE RANGE 
 Materials. For Each Student. — Colored pencils 
 
 Purpose. To study the monthly range of temperature in different regions; to see how it varies from 
 
 place to place, and to interpret some of the variations. Also to study the daily range in some of 
 these same places. 
 
 Making of Which is the hottest month in your locality? The coldest 
 
 a seasonal 
 
 tempera- month? If you had twelve temperature records, one for every two 
 
 ture curve. ] 10urs j n ^ ne ( j a y ) how would you obtain the average or mean temperature for that day ? 
 
 Knowing the mean temperature for each day in the month, how would you find the mean tem- 
 perature for the month? 1 
 
 There follows a list giving the mean temperature (in Fahrenheit 
 
 degrees) for each month of the year at a certain place in northern United States. From this 
 data construct a curve on the cross-section paper to show the seasonal change in temperature. 
 Let each vertical line represent a month, and each horizontal line 10°. 
 
 Jan. Feb. March April May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. 
 31° 32° 35° 45° 60° 70° 75° 74° 68° 56° 45° 34° 
 
 The teacher may obtain (from the nearest Weather Bureau Station) the monthly mean temperatures 
 for a place near the school. From this data construct a seasonal curve for your locality over the diagram just 
 made, using a different colored pencil. 
 
 How does the seasonal temperature curve resemble the daily temperature curve? 
 
 When is the warmest period? The coldest period? 
 
 V 
 
 Why do these periods not coincide exactly with the longest and the shortest days? 
 
 Clearly state the reasons why summer is the warmest, and winter the coldest period. 
 
 271 
 
Seasonal There follows a table giving the monthly mean temperatures (approximate) for a number 
 
 tempera- f places in different parts of the world. On the cross-section paper make a diagram to show 
 th UfVeS ^ e seasoua l temperature curve for each of these places (all on one diagram). Let each hori- 
 parts of the zou ^ a ^ ^ ne stand for 5° and every second vertical line for a month. Make room for tempera- 
 world, tures as high as 95° and as low as 45°. For each curve use a differently colored pencil, or 
 different symbols (such as dots or dashes). 
 
 Place 
 
 Jan. 
 
 Fjsb. 
 
 March 
 
 April 
 
 Mat 
 
 June 
 
 July 
 
 Aug. 
 
 Sept. 
 
 Oct. 
 
 Nov. 
 
 Dec. 
 
 New York City 
 
 37° 
 
 31° 
 
 35° 
 
 52° 
 
 62° 
 
 72° 
 
 75° 
 
 75° 
 
 70° 
 
 56° 
 
 45° 
 
 33° 
 
 Singapore 
 
 80° 
 
 81° 
 
 82° 
 
 82° 
 
 83° 
 
 83° 
 
 83° 
 
 82° 
 
 82° 
 
 81.5° 
 
 81° 
 
 80° 
 
 Arctic, Lat. 82°, 
 Fort Conger 
 
 -37° 
 
 -43° 
 
 -23° 
 
 -11° 
 
 17° 
 
 32° 
 
 37° 
 
 35° 
 
 15° 
 
 -10° 
 
 -26° 
 
 -30° 
 
 Key West, Fla. 
 
 69° 
 
 68° 
 
 72° 
 
 75° 
 
 79° 
 
 81° 
 
 84° 
 
 83° 
 
 83° 
 
 80° 
 
 74° 
 
 69° 
 
 Yuma, Ariz. 
 
 55° 
 
 62° 
 
 64° 
 
 68° 
 
 73° 
 
 83° 
 
 92° 
 
 90° 
 
 83° 
 
 74° 
 
 61° 
 
 57° 
 
 St. Vincent, Minn. 
 
 -5° 
 
 2° 
 
 15° 
 
 35° 
 
 50° 
 
 62° 
 
 66° 
 
 65° 
 
 52° 
 
 40° 
 
 22° 
 
 5° 
 
 Central Australia 
 
 94° 
 
 92° 
 
 89° 
 
 85° 
 
 75° 
 
 70° 
 
 65° 
 
 60° 
 
 65° 
 
 70° 
 
 78° 
 
 87° 
 
 Central Atlantic 
 at equator 
 
 79° 
 
 80° 
 
 80.5° 
 
 81° 
 
 80.5° 
 
 80° 
 
 79° 
 
 80° 
 
 80.5° 
 
 81° 
 
 80.5° 
 
 79° 
 
 In what one respect are most of these curves alike ? 
 
 Why 
 
 Why does the curve for Central 
 
 Australia differ so widely from the others ? 
 
 Which curve is the flattest ? 
 
 Why 
 
 272 
 
Which region has the coldest summers ? 
 The coldest winters ? 
 
 What does the difference between the curve at St. Vincent and Key West or Singapore 
 suggest as to the influence of distance from the sea ? 1 
 
 Where do you find the highest tempera- 
 
 tures ? 
 
 State what you observe from the study of the diagrams (a) as to the influence of latitude on 
 the seasonal temperature curve ; 
 
 (&) as to the influence of distance from the sea. 
 
 • 
 
 Daily 
 changes in 
 tempera- 
 ture in 
 different 
 eg ions. 
 
 The temperature 
 
 falls on the average of 1° for every 300 feet of altitude. On the diagram (just drawn), dot in 
 a curve to show a theoretical seasonal curve at an elevation of 3000 feet above New York 
 
 City. 
 
 On the cross-section paper plot the data in the following table to show the daily changes 
 in temperature at some of the places for which the seasonal curves have just been drawn. 
 Use colored pencils ; use dots to represent the winter days and continuous lines for summer 
 days. Let every other vertical line represent 3 hours of the day, and each horizontal line 5° 
 of temperature. Make room for temperatures as high as 95° and as low as — 30°. ■ 
 
 273 
 
Place 
 
 Mid- 
 night 
 
 3 A.M. 
 
 6 A.M. 
 
 9 A.M. 
 
 Noon 
 
 3 P.M. 
 
 6 P.M. 
 
 9 P.M. 
 
 Mid- 
 night 
 
 New York City. Summer 
 
 62° 
 
 58° 
 
 59° 
 
 65° 
 
 72° 
 
 79° 
 
 78° 
 
 72° 
 
 60° 
 
 New York City. Winter 
 
 10° 
 
 8° 
 
 6° 
 
 12° 
 
 24° 
 
 30° 
 
 25° 
 
 18° 
 
 10° 
 
 Arctic. Winter 
 
 -10° 
 
 — 12° 
 
 -14° 
 
 -15° 
 
 -17° 
 
 -19° 
 
 -22° 
 
 -24° 
 
 -26° 
 
 Key West, Fla. Summer 
 
 80° 
 
 77° 
 
 80° 
 
 84° 
 
 89° 
 
 90° 
 
 87° 
 
 82° 
 
 79° 
 
 Key West, Fla. Winter 
 
 69° 
 
 65° 
 
 69° 
 
 73° 
 
 78° 
 
 79° 
 
 75° 
 
 71° 
 
 69° 
 
 St. Vincent, Minn. Summer 
 
 60° 
 
 55° 
 
 59° 
 
 69° 
 
 78° 
 
 85° 
 
 78° 
 
 69° 
 
 60° 
 
 St. Vincent, Minn. Winter 
 
 — 22° 
 
 —27° 
 
 -29° 
 
 -19° 
 
 -12° 
 
 -11° 
 
 -13° 
 
 -20° 
 
 -23° 
 
 Central Atlantic at Equator. 
 Summer 
 
 79.8° 
 
 79.5° 
 
 79.3° 
 
 80° 
 
 80.5° 
 
 81° 
 
 80.5° 
 
 80° 
 
 79.8° 
 
 Central Atlantic at Equator. 
 Winter 
 
 79.9° 
 
 79.6° 
 
 79.3° 
 
 80° 
 
 80.5° 
 
 81° 
 
 80.6° 
 
 80.1° 
 
 79.9° 
 
 In what respect are all but one of these daily curves alike ? 
 
 . Which one does not show 
 
 the midday rise? Why does it not? 
 
 Which curve shows the greatest change between day and night ? 
 Explain. 
 
 W r hich the least ? 
 
 Explain. 
 
 Where is it coldest? Where warmest? 
 
 274 
 
What evidence do you find of (a) influence 
 
 of ocean? 
 
 (b) of influence of distance from sea ? 
 
 (c) of influence of latitude ? 
 
 275 
 
i 
 
Materials. 
 
 Purpose. 
 
 Note. 
 
 Water 
 vapor in 
 the air. 
 
 Experi- 
 ments to 
 illustrate 
 variation in 
 the rate of 
 evapora- 
 tion. 
 
 LXII. — MOISTURE IN THE AIR 
 
 For Each Student. — Two small pieces of cheese cloth, two or three inches square. 
 For General Class Use. — A fruit jar. (A small vial of alcohol or ether.) A small piece of 
 muslin. Two thermometers. 
 
 To understand the four different conditions which affect the rate of evaporation ; the meaning 
 of relative and absolute humidity ; and the use of the table for determining the relative humidity, 
 on the basis of observations of temperature with the dry and wet bidb thermometers. 
 
 Note : — To save time the teacher will probably direct that two or more of these experiments be carried 
 on at the same time. 
 
 After it has stopped raining the sidewalks soon become dry. What has become of the 
 
 water ? 
 
 What term is applied to the change from water to water vapor ? 
 
 Is the water vapor a liquid or a gas ? Is it visible or invis- 
 ible? _ All over the earth water is evaporating, and the water vapor 
 
 is rising into the air ; but the rate at which evaporation takes place varies greatly under dif- 
 ferent conditions. The following experiments are intended to illustrate this fact. 
 
 Wet both the pieces of cheese cloth. Put one on the radiator, or in the sun, or in some 
 other warm place. Put the other on your desk, and not in the sun. Which piece of cloth 
 
 becomes dry first ? From this experiment 
 
 what do you conclude as to the rate of evaporation at different temperatures? 
 
 Would evaporation therefore be more rapid in the frigid zone or in the torrid zone ? 
 
 In summer or in winter? 
 
 Again wet each piece of cloth, wringing out the surplus water. Pin one of the pieces on 
 each end of your desk. With a book or piece of paper, fan one of the pieces of cloth. 
 
 Which dries the more quickly? What do 
 
 you conclude from the results of this experiment as to the rate of evaporation where the wind 
 
 is blowing, as compared to the rate where it is calm ? 
 
 Would evaporation, therefore, be more rapid 
 
 277 
 
on a windy day or on a day when there is no wind ? 
 
 Would it be more rapid in the trade wind belt, or in the belt of calms? 
 
 Once more wetting the two pieces of cloth, spread one out on the desk and make a small 
 
 roll of the other. Which dries the more quickly? 
 
 What do you conclude from this experiment as to the relation between the amount of evapo- 
 ration and the amount of surface exposed? 
 
 1 Would there, therefore, be more water vapor 
 
 rising from a large body of water (such as the ocean) or from a small body (such as a pond) ? 
 
 Which would probably have more vapor, 
 
 winds from the land or winds from the ocean? 
 
 While these experiments were being carried on, the teacher has placed a small amount of 
 water in* the bottom of a fruit jar and, putting on the cover, has set it in a warm place. 
 Evaporation has caused much water vapor to rise into the air in the jar, and this air is there- 
 fore very damp. Now suspend a piece of wet cloth (by a string) in the jar, and put back the 
 cover. At the same time spread out another piece of wet cloth on the desk. When the cloth 
 
 on the desk is dry, take out the piece of cloth from the jar. Is it dry ? 
 
 What do you conclude as to the rate of evaporation in dry air as compared to that in damp 
 
 air r 
 
 Would evaporation, therefore, be more rapid on a damp day or on a dry day 
 In a desert or in a humid region? 
 
 Meaning of A quart dish half full of water has |, or 50%, as much water as it can hold. This per- 
 
 absolute centage represents the relative amount of water in the glass compared with what the dish 
 and relative 
 
 Umi 1 y * might hold. What would be the percentage if the dish were full? . 
 
 What if § full ? 
 
 You could state the amount of water in the dish in two ways : that is, you could say, when 
 the dish was half full, that the absolute amount was a pint ; or, you could say that the amount 
 relative to what the dish might hold was 50%. 
 
 It is important sometimes to speak of the absolute and relative amounts of vapor in the 
 air. If you had a given quantity of perfectly dry air, and let one pint of water evaporate 
 
 into it, what would be the absolute amount of vapor in the air ? '_'__ 
 
 This would be called its absolute humidity. To determine the relative 
 278 
 
UM1VERSU* 
 
 OF 
 
 humidity you would need first to know how much vapor could possibly pass into that quan- 
 tity of air. Suppose the amount of water that this quantity of air could hold was 4 pints ; 
 
 what would be the relative humidity when its absolute humidity was 1 pint? 
 
 What would be its relative humidity if there were 2 pints 
 
 in it? What if there were 4 pints in it? 
 
 Could it then take any more water vapor? 
 
 What, then, is meant by saturated air? 
 
 Was the air saturated when the water 
 
 was being evaporated from the pieces of cloth on the desk ? If it had been, 
 
 could there have been any evaporation ? 
 
 Determin- Evaporation is a cooling process, because in evaporation heat must be used. This can be proved by 
 
 ing relative placing a drop of ether or alcohol on the back of the hand. As it evaporates it takes some heat from the 
 
 humidity. hand and therefore feels cool. Take two thermometers and hang them side by side. Tie (with thread) a 
 
 small piece of muslin around the bulb of one, with one end of the muslin hanging down like a wick. Read 
 
 the two thermometers. Now saturate the muslin with alcohol and watch the mercury of this thermometer. 
 
 Why does this thermometer register a lower temperature than the other ? 
 
 See if water has the same effect 
 
 as alcohol, saturating the muslin and letting the wick end rest in a glass of water ; but, since water does not 
 evaporate as fast as alcohol, fan the muslin to make the water evaporate more rapidly. 
 
 It is possible to determine the relative humidity of the air by using two such thermometers — a dry bulb 
 and a wet bulb thermometer. The principle is that the evaporation lowers the temperature. The tempera- 
 ture is lowered more if evaporation is rapid than if slow. Which is dryest, air with low relative humidity, or 
 
 air with high relative humidity? In which will evapo- 
 ration be more rapid, air with high or low relative humidity ? 
 
 From this do you conclude that the difference in temperature as shown by the dry and wet bulb thermome- 
 ters would be greater when the relative humidity is high, or when low ? 
 
 Following is a table which can be used to determine the relative humidity. First find the difference in 
 temperature of the dry and wet bulb thermometers. Suppose it to be 3°. Find the number 3 (the third figure 
 from the left) at the top of the table. In the left-hand column of the table find the number that corresponds 
 with the temperature recorded by the dry bulb thermometer, which we will assume to be 78°. Now follow 
 this to the right until you come to the number in the column under the 3. That number is 87, and this is the 
 relative humidity. That is, the relative humidity is 87 %. 
 
 279 
 
Below is a table showing observations made, and the relative humidity indicated by them, as deduced 
 from the table. 
 
 Date 
 
 Dry Bulb 
 
 Wet Bulb 
 
 Difference in Reading 
 
 Relative Humidity 
 
 Jan. 1 
 
 80° 
 
 78° 
 
 2° 
 
 92% 
 
 Jan. 2 
 
 82° 
 
 78° 
 
 4° 
 
 84% 
 
 Jan. 3 74° 
 
 67° 
 
 7° 
 
 70% 
 
 Verify these data by use of the table for determining relative humidity. Make observations with the 
 dry and wet bulb thermometers, both in the schoolroom and out of doors, and, by reference to the table, find 
 the relative humidity. Set down the results, below, in a table similar to that just given. 
 
 280 
 
Table for determining Relative Humidity 
 
 # 
 
 Tempera- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ture of I)r 
 Bulb Tiiek 
 
 5 i 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 n 
 
 12 
 
 13 
 
 14 
 
 15 
 
 16 
 
 17 
 
 18 
 
 19 
 
 20 
 
 21 
 
 22 
 
 23 
 
 24 
 
 25 
 
 MOMETER 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 20° . . . 
 
 85 
 
 70 
 
 56 
 
 41 
 
 27 
 
 13 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 22° . . . 
 
 86 
 
 72 
 
 58 
 
 45 
 
 32 
 
 19 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 24° . . . 
 
 87 
 
 74 
 
 61 
 
 48 
 
 36 
 
 24 
 
 11 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 26° . . . 
 
 88 
 
 75 
 
 63 
 
 51 
 
 40 
 
 28 
 
 17 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 28° . . . 
 
 88 
 
 77 
 
 65 
 
 54 
 
 43 
 
 33 
 
 22 
 
 11 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 30° . . . 
 
 89 
 
 78 
 
 67 
 
 57 
 
 47 
 
 36 
 
 26 
 
 17 
 
 7 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 32° . . . 
 
 90 
 
 79 
 
 69 
 
 59 
 
 50 
 
 40 
 
 31 
 
 21 
 
 12 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 34° . . . 
 
 91 
 
 81 
 
 72 
 
 62 
 
 53 
 
 44 
 
 35 
 
 26 
 
 17 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 36° . . . 
 
 91 
 
 82 
 
 73 
 
 66 
 
 56 
 
 47 
 
 38 
 
 30 
 
 22 
 
 14 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 38° . . . 
 
 92 
 
 83 
 
 75 
 
 67 
 
 58 
 
 50 
 
 42 
 
 34 
 
 26 
 
 18 
 
 11 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 40° . . . 
 
 92 
 
 84 
 
 76 
 
 68 
 
 60 
 
 53 
 
 45 
 
 38 
 
 30 
 
 22 
 
 16 
 
 8 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 42° . . . 
 
 92 
 
 84 
 
 77 
 
 69 
 
 62 
 
 55 
 
 48 
 
 40 
 
 34 
 
 27 
 
 20 
 
 13 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 44° . . . 
 
 92 
 
 85 
 
 78 
 
 70 
 
 63 
 
 57 
 
 50 
 
 43 
 
 37 
 
 30 
 
 24 
 
 17 
 
 11 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 46° . . . 
 
 93 
 
 85 
 
 79 
 
 72 
 
 65 
 
 58 
 
 52 
 
 46 
 
 39 
 
 33 
 
 27 
 
 21 
 
 15 
 
 9 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 48° . . . 
 
 93 
 
 86 
 
 79 
 
 73 
 
 66 
 
 60 
 
 53 
 
 48 
 
 42 
 
 36 
 
 30 
 
 24 
 
 19 
 
 13 
 
 7 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 50° . . . 
 
 93 
 
 87 
 
 80 
 
 74 
 
 67 
 
 61 
 
 55 
 
 50 
 
 44 
 
 38 
 
 33 
 
 27 
 
 22 
 
 16 
 
 11 
 
 6 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 52° . . . 
 
 94 
 
 87 
 
 81 
 
 75 
 
 69 
 
 63 
 
 57 
 
 51 
 
 46 
 
 40 
 
 35 
 
 30 
 
 24 
 
 20 
 
 15 
 
 10 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 54° . . . 
 
 94 
 
 88 
 
 82 
 
 76 
 
 70 
 
 64 
 
 59 
 
 53 
 
 48 
 
 43 
 
 38 
 
 32 
 
 28 
 
 23 
 
 18 
 
 13 
 
 8 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 56° . . . 
 
 91 
 
 88 
 
 82 
 
 77 
 
 71 
 
 65 
 
 60 
 
 55 
 
 50 
 
 44 
 
 40 
 
 35 
 
 30 
 
 25 
 
 21 
 
 16 
 
 12 
 
 8 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 58° . . . 
 
 94 
 
 89 
 
 83 
 
 78 
 
 72 
 
 67 
 
 61 
 
 56 
 
 51 
 
 46 
 
 42 
 
 37 
 
 33 
 
 28 
 
 24 
 
 19 
 
 15 
 
 11 
 
 7 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 60° . . . 
 
 94 
 
 89 
 
 84 
 
 78 
 
 73 
 
 68 
 
 63 
 
 58 
 
 53 
 
 48 
 
 44 
 
 39 
 
 34 
 
 30 
 
 26 
 
 22 
 
 18 
 
 14 
 
 10 
 
 6 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 62° . . . 
 
 95 
 
 89 
 
 84 
 
 79 
 
 74 
 
 69 
 
 64 
 
 59 
 
 54 
 
 50 
 
 45 
 
 41 
 
 37 
 
 32 
 
 28 
 
 24 
 
 20 
 
 16 
 
 13 
 
 9 
 
 5 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 64° . . . 
 
 95 
 
 90 
 
 85 
 
 79 
 
 74 
 
 70 
 
 65 
 
 60 
 
 56 
 
 51 
 
 47 
 
 43 
 
 38 
 
 34 
 
 30 
 
 27 
 
 23 
 
 19 
 
 15 
 
 12 
 
 8 
 
 5 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 66° . . . 
 
 95 
 
 90 
 
 85 
 
 80 
 
 75 
 
 71 
 
 66 
 
 61 
 
 57 
 
 53 
 
 49 
 
 45 
 
 40 
 
 36 
 
 32 
 
 29 
 
 25 
 
 22 
 
 18 
 
 14 
 
 11 
 
 8 
 
 4 
 
 1 
 
 
 68° . . . 
 
 95 
 
 90 
 
 85 
 
 81 
 
 76 
 
 71 
 
 67 
 
 63 
 
 58 
 
 54 
 
 50 
 
 46 
 
 42 
 
 38 
 
 34 
 
 31 
 
 27 
 
 24 
 
 20 
 
 17 
 
 14 
 
 10 
 
 7 
 
 4 
 
 1 
 
 70° . . . 
 
 95 
 
 90 
 
 86 
 
 81 
 
 77 
 
 72 
 
 68 
 
 64 
 
 60 
 
 55 
 
 52 
 
 48 
 
 44 
 
 40 
 
 36 
 
 33 
 
 29 
 
 26 
 
 23 
 
 19 
 
 16 
 
 13 
 
 10 
 
 7 
 
 4 
 
 72° . . . 
 
 95 
 
 91 
 
 86 
 
 82 
 
 77 
 
 73 
 
 69 
 
 65 
 
 61 
 
 57 
 
 53 
 
 49 
 
 45 
 
 42 
 
 38 
 
 35 
 
 31 
 
 28 
 
 24 
 
 22 
 
 18 
 
 15 
 
 12 
 
 9 
 
 6 
 
 74° . . . 
 
 95 
 
 91 
 
 86 
 
 82 
 
 78 
 
 74 
 
 70 
 
 66 
 
 62 
 
 58 
 
 54 
 
 50 
 
 47 
 
 43 
 
 40 
 
 36 
 
 33 
 
 30 
 
 26 
 
 23 
 
 20 
 
 18 
 
 15 
 
 12 
 
 9 
 
 76° . . . 
 
 95 
 
 91 
 
 87 
 
 82 
 
 78 
 
 74 
 
 70 
 
 66 
 
 63 
 
 59 
 
 55 
 
 52 
 
 48 
 
 45 
 
 41 
 
 38 
 
 35 
 
 31 
 
 28 
 
 25 
 
 22 
 
 20 
 
 17 
 
 14 
 
 11 
 
 78° . . . 
 
 96 
 
 91 
 
 87 
 
 83 
 
 79 
 
 75 
 
 71 
 
 67 
 
 63 
 
 60 
 
 56 
 
 53 
 
 49 
 
 46 
 
 43 
 
 39 
 
 36 
 
 33 
 
 30 
 
 27 
 
 24 
 
 21 
 
 19 
 
 16 
 
 13 
 
 80° . . . 
 
 96 
 
 92 
 
 87 
 
 83 
 
 79 
 
 75 
 
 72 
 
 68 
 
 64 
 
 61 
 
 57 
 
 54 
 
 51 
 
 47 
 
 44 
 
 41 
 
 38 
 
 35 
 
 32 
 
 29 
 
 26 
 
 23 
 
 20 
 
 18 
 
 15 
 
 82° . . . 
 
 96 
 
 92 
 
 88 
 
 84 
 
 80 
 
 76 
 
 72 
 
 69 
 
 65 
 
 62 
 
 58 
 
 55 
 
 52 
 
 48 
 
 45 
 
 42 
 
 39 
 
 36 
 
 33 
 
 31 
 
 28 
 
 25 
 
 22 
 
 20 
 
 17 
 
 84° . . . 
 
 96 
 
 92 
 
 88 
 
 84 
 
 80 
 
 77 
 
 73 
 
 69 
 
 66 
 
 63 
 
 59 
 
 56 
 
 53 
 
 49 
 
 46 
 
 44 
 
 41 
 
 38 
 
 35 
 
 32 
 
 29 
 
 27 
 
 24 
 
 22 
 
 19 
 
 86° . . . 
 
 96 
 
 92 
 
 88 
 
 84 
 
 81 
 
 77 
 
 73 
 
 70 
 
 67 
 
 63 
 
 60 
 
 57 
 
 54 
 
 51 
 
 48 
 
 45 
 
 42 
 
 39 
 
 36 
 
 34 
 
 31 
 
 29 
 
 26 
 
 23 
 
 21 
 
 88° . . . 
 
 96 
 
 92 
 
 88 
 
 85 
 
 81 
 
 77 
 
 74 
 
 71 
 
 67 
 
 64 
 
 61 
 
 58 
 
 55 
 
 52 
 
 49 
 
 46 
 
 43 
 
 40 
 
 38 
 
 35 
 
 32 
 
 30 
 
 27 
 
 25 
 
 22 
 
 90° . . . 
 
 96 
 
 92 
 
 88 
 
 85 
 
 81 
 
 78 
 
 75 
 
 71 
 
 68 
 
 65 
 
 62 
 
 59 
 
 56 
 
 53 
 
 50 
 
 47 
 
 44 
 
 41 
 
 39 
 
 36 
 
 34 
 
 32 
 
 29 
 
 26 
 
 24 
 
 281 
 
LXIII. — CONDENSATION OF WATER VAPOR 
 
 Materials. For Each Student. — A drinking glass. Water. Either snow or small pieces of ice. 
 
 Purpose. To understand the causes leading to the condensation of water vapor, and the consequent 
 
 formation of dew, frost, fog, clouds, rain, and snow. 
 
 Meaning of In which can there be most vapor, warm air or cold air? 
 
 saturation if the relative humidity of the air is 90 % when the temperature is 70°, would the temperature 
 and dew 
 
 poin ' need to be raised or lowered to bring the relative humidity to 100% ? 
 
 If the temperature continued to change in the same direction until 
 
 after the point of saturation was reached, what would happen ? _> 
 
 ; What reason can you give 
 
 for calling the point of saturation (relative humidity 100%) the dew point f 
 
 Formation Breathe against a cold object, like a window pane. What happens ? 
 
 of dew. 
 
 Explain why the vapor was condensed? ._ 
 
 Fill the drinking 
 
 glass two thirds full of water and ice (or snow) and stir the mixture, being careful not to wet 
 the outside of the glass. Explain why water begins to appear on the outside of the glass. 
 
 In the evening, when the ground cools by radiation, dew often forms. Explain the cause 
 of the formation of dew. 
 
 283 
 
Would dew form most quickly when the relative humidity is high, 
 
 or low? When would no dew form? 
 
 What forms if the dew point is below the freezing point? 
 
 Determina- Again place water and snow (or ice) in the drinking glass and stir the mixture carefully with the ther- 
 
 tion of dew mometer. Note when vapor first begins to condense on the outside of the glass and then read the thermometer. 
 point. The temperature of that reading is the dew point for the air in the room. Determine the dew point by this 
 
 method. 
 
 Formation When you breathe into the air of a cold winter day, you can "see your breath." What is 
 
 of fog. 
 
 it that you see ? 
 
 Explain what has happened. 
 
 What must happen when warm, damp 
 
 winds blow over a cold surface? 
 
 On this basis, explain why it is that the cold Labrador 
 
 current is such a foggy part of the ocean. ■_ 
 
 Why is it that winds often cause fog on mountains ? 
 
 Formation Air that rises above the earth's surface expands ; and when air expands it grows cooler. 
 
 of clouds. What then must result if damp air (or air with high relative humidity) rises to a considerable 
 
 height ? 
 
 If you could see a fog from either above or below, it would look like a cloud. 
 
 284 
 
Explain why clouds form every day in the warm, humid belt of calms. 
 
 * 
 
 Explain why clouds 
 
 appear on warm, humid summer days. 
 
 Observa- 
 tion of 
 clouds. 
 
 In the Text-book (p. 248) you will find the names of the principal forms of clouds. What 
 
 form have the clouds to-day ? Keep a record 
 
 of the clouds for a week, giving their name, form, and a brief description, in the following 
 
 table. Erom which kind of cloud does rain or snow fall? 
 
 Formation 
 of rain. 
 
 Causes for 
 differences 
 in rainfall. 
 
 ^A differences 
 
 Day op Week 
 
 Name op Cloud 
 
 Description of Clouds 
 
 Monday 
 
 
 
 Tuesday 
 
 
 
 Wednesday 
 
 
 
 Thursday 
 
 
 
 Friday 
 
 
 
 If condensation continues, will the clouds grow larger or smaller? 
 
 What does the fact that the fog particles float in air currents indicate 
 
 as to their size? When condensation con- 
 tinues, what must be the effect on the size of the particle? 
 
 What must thenhappen? 
 
 Under what conditions is snow formed 
 
 instead of rain? 
 
 In the belt of calms the air is rising. Would this be a rainy or a dry region ? 
 
 State your reasons for this conclusion. 
 
 285 
 
In the 
 
 horse latitude belt the air is descending. Would this be a rainy or a dry region ? 
 
 State your reasons for this conclusion. 
 
 Where winds 
 
 blow from the ocean against rising land, would there be much or little rain ? 
 State your reasons for this conclusion. 
 
 Where winds blow from the land to the ocean, what condition of rainfall would there be ? 
 . State your reasons for this conclusion. 
 
 286 
 
Materials. 
 
 Purpose. 
 
 Making an 
 isothermal 
 chart. 
 
 LXIV. — ISOTHERMAL CHARTS OF UNITED STATES 
 
 For Each Student. — Colored pencils. 
 
 To make and understand an isothermal chart; to study and interpret a summer and winter 
 isothermal chart of the United States; and to bring out the fact that temperature conditions are of 
 great and fundamental importance to vegetation. 
 
 On the accompanying map (Fig. 28) are marked the temperatures at a number of localities 
 in the United States at 8 a.m. on a winter's day. With this data draw in (as directed below) 
 isothermal lines so as to connect places having the same temperature. Your map then becomes 
 an isothermal chart. It will be sufficient to draw an isothermal line for every ten degrees ; e.g 
 for 0°, 10°, 20°, etc. 
 
 In making the map start with the isothermal line for 50°. Since the temperature at New 
 Orleans was 50°, it is evident that the line will have to pass through that city. Will it run 
 
 through Mobile? Macon? 
 
 Augusta ? 
 
 Will it then continue nearer Ealeigh (48°) or Wilmington, N.C. (56°) ? 
 
 Draw the line at what you think is the proper distance from 
 
 Ealeigh. At Norfolk the temperature was 54°. Will the 50° isotherm pass on the cold side 
 
 (north) or on the warm side (south) of Norfolk? 
 
 Continue the 50° isothermal line southeastward from New Orleans. On which side of Galves- 
 ton does it extend? On which side of Corpus 
 
 Christi, Tex. ? ._'_ 
 
 Now draw the 60° and 70° isothermal lines across the Florida peninsula. Then draw in 
 the other isotherms down to 20° below zero. Shade (with blue pencil) the part of the map 
 with a temperature below 30° ; this is (approximately) the area of the country where the tem- 
 perature is below freezing point on that day. 
 
 Questions 
 on the 
 isothermal 
 chart. 
 
 Where is the coldest area ? 
 
 Why should it be coldest there ? 
 
 28T 
 
Why does the 30° 
 
 isotherm extend farther south in the interior than on the east and west coasts ? 
 
 Why should it be farther north on the west than on the east coast ? 
 
 Study of 
 isothermal 
 charts of 
 United 
 States for 
 January 
 and July. 
 
 Fill out this sentence: 
 
 This isothermal chart shows that in winter the temperature from south 
 
 to north ; and it also shows that the temperature from seacoast to 
 
 interior. 
 
 The isothermal chart that you have just made represents the conditions in the country at 
 8 o'clock on a single day. If all the temperature records at each locality for a month were 
 averaged together, an isothermal chart could be made for that month. This is what has been 
 done in the two charts (Figs. 29 and 30), one for the month of January, the other for July. 
 
 With the colored pencils shade in the following areas : (a) those with temperatures below 
 0°; (b) those with temperatures between 0°and 30°; (c) those with temperatures between 30° 
 and 50° ; (d) those with temperatures between 50° and 70° ; (e) those above 70°. 
 
 What is the general direction that the isotherms follow ? 
 
 Where is there the greatest departure from this direction? 
 
 What is the explanation of this ? 
 
 On which coast, the Atlantic or the Pacific, is there the 
 
 greatest difference in temperature in going from north to south? 
 
 How much difference in temperature is there between the north and 
 
 south ends of each coast in summer ? 
 
 In winter ? 
 
 288 
 
289 
 
130___\?Al£o 120° W 110° 1062 IS^l 95° 90° 8a" 80" 75 70° 65° 00° 
 
 108° Longitude 100° West 95° from 90° Greemrieh 85° 70 
 
 Fig. 29. — Isothermal Chart of United States for January. 
 
 125° 120° 116° 110° 105° 100° 95° 90° 85° 80 
 
 70° 66° 
 
 105° Longitude 100° Wert 95° from 90° Greenwioh 85 
 
 Fig. 30. — Isothermal Chart of United States for July. 
 
 291 
 
Why is there a marked difference of temperature range 
 
 on the two coasts ? 
 
 Which of these two monthly charts does Figure 28 most resemble? 
 
 Do Figures 28, 29, and 30 show the same general features? 
 
 In what part of the country is there the greatest difference in tem- 
 perature between summer and winter? 
 
 Why is this so ? 
 
 ence? 
 
 Explain this also. 
 
 Where is there the least differ- 
 
 Which is the most southern point in the country ? 
 Is it the warmest place in the country in summer ? 
 
 Account for this. 
 
 What is the warmest place in the country in winter ? 
 Which is the most northern point in the country ? ._ 
 Is it also the coldest part of the country in winter ? 
 
 Explain. 
 
 293 
 
LXV. — THE RELATION OF WINDS TO ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE 
 
 Purpose. To show that winds are caused by the flowing of air from regions of high pressure to regions 
 
 of lower pressure. 
 
 Movement The air near a hot stove, a radiator, or lamp, is warmed. Hold a light, downy feather 
 
 of light and near one of these and then release it. What is the movement of the current of air near this 
 heavy air. 
 
 heated object? Why is this so? 
 
 Could 
 
 the air rise against gravity unless something were pushing it up ? When the 
 
 warm air near a stove is rising, what is the movement of the cooler, heavier air in other parts 
 
 of the room ? 
 
 What effect has this movement on the warm, lighter air? 
 
 
 
 - m- 
 
 1 
 
 
 W 
 
 
 rl 
 
 ■<p- — 
 
 
 
 • A 
 
 
 J 
 
 3 
 
 Fig. 31. — Diagram for showing Circulation of Air in Room heated by a Stove. 
 
 295 
 
In the diagram 
 
 (Fig. 31) draw arrows to show the circulation of the air in a room warmed by a stove. Fill 
 in the following sentence, putting the words " lighter " or " heavier " in their proper places. 
 
 Warm air is than cool air ; the cool air 
 
 settles and forces up the warm air. This causes the cool 
 
 air to flow toward places of warm air. 
 
 Is it true on the earth, as well as in a room, that heavy air will flow toward regions of 
 
 light air and force the light air to rise ? What is the instrument that is used 
 
 to measure the weight or pressure of the air? Recalling your study 
 
 of the barometer, which, heavy or light air, makes the mercury rise higher in the instrument? 
 
 At about what height does the mercury stand 
 
 in the barometer tube ? Does a reading of the 
 
 barometer of 29.8 inches mean heavier or lighter air than a reading of 30.2 inches? 
 
 Which of these two would be called high pressure? 
 
 Which low pressure ? 
 
 Figure 32 is a map of the United States showing the pressure of trie air for a certain day 
 in winter. The lines are called isobars (meaning equal weight), and each line passes through 
 places having the same air pressure, or weight. The figures on each line show the pressure in 
 inches of mercury in the barometer on this day. Find the place with the lowest pressure and 
 
 write in the words "low pressure." Is this a region of light air or of heavy air? 
 
 On the map mark in the words " high pressure " where 
 
 they belong. 
 
 From the center of which of these areas will the air flow outward? ,__ 
 
 What would you call this flowing of the air? 
 
 Toward the center of which of the areas will the wind blow ? 
 
 With arrows mark in the winds as you think they would go with 
 
 such a condition of pressure as shown on this map. 
 
 Water running down a slope is often said to flow down grade. The winds shown on your 
 map are not flowing down a slope, but the air is flowing from a region of high barometric pres- 
 sure to one of low barometric pressure. What reason can you give for calling the difference 
 
 in pressure between two places a barometric gradient? 
 
 296 
 
297 
 
Is the barometric gradient steepest 
 
 where the isobars are close together or far apart? 
 
 Where is it gentlest? On what kind 
 
 of a grade does water flow most swiftly? On 
 
 what kind of a barometric gradient will air flow most swiftly ? 
 
 . ; On your map mark places where the air must be moving swiftly. Would 
 
 these regions have strong or light winds? 
 
 What would be the case where the barometric gradient is gentle? 
 
 On Figure 33 the arrows represent winds observed on a certain day in a part of the United 
 States. On this map sketch in a number of isobars to show the location of the area of low 
 pressure and the area of high pressure. 
 
 Fig. 33. — Map to show Wind Directions observed on a Certain Day in Part of the United States. 
 
 299 
 
# 
 
 Materials. 
 Purpose. 
 
 Making a 
 
 weather 
 
 map. 
 
 Observa- 
 tion of the 
 weather 
 map. 
 
 LXVL— THE WEATHER MAP 
 
 Colored pencils. 
 
 To understand the meaning of the symbols on a weather map ; to appreciate the method of con- 
 structing such a map; and to study the relations between air ])ressure and weather, under cyclonic 
 and anticy clonic conditions. 
 
 On the map of the United States (Fig. 34) are data from observations made by the United 
 States Weather Bureau at 8 a.m. on a winter's day. At this hour the observers at each of the 
 places marked on the map made observations of their thermometers, barometers, etc., and tele- 
 graphed the results to Washington. There a weather map was made to show the weather con- 
 ditions over the entire country at that hour. The data that were telegraphed to Washington 
 are printed on the map. You are to construct the weather map. 
 
 First draw the isothermal lines (using a red pencil) as directed on page 289. Next draw in 
 the isobars, using a blue pencil. To do this, follow the same method as in drawing the iso- 
 thermal lines, showing differences for each tenth of an inch by a separate isobar. Draw 
 each of the isobars through places having the same barometric pressure ; or on the proper side 
 of those places where the pressure was not exactly a tenth of an inch. For instance, the isobar 
 would be drawn through a place having 29.9 inches ; but it must go to one side of a place 
 having a reading of 29.93, or of a place having a reading of 29.89. Having completed the isobars, 
 mark the word High in the place where the lines inclose an area of high pressure ; and mark 
 the word Low in the place where the lines inclose an area of low pressure. 
 
 With black pencil or ink, draw arrows to show the wind direction at each place, remem- 
 bering that the letters N.W., N., etc., refer to the compass directions from which the winds 
 blow. Place the point of the arrow on the end toward which the wind is blowing. Finally, 
 color (with green pencil) the area where rain (r) or snow (s) are falling, making the snow 
 area a heavier green than the rain. In this shading you can color in the area between places 
 that have the same letters. 
 
 Is it colder within the area of the high or of the low pressure? 
 
 In which of the two areas is there clear weather ? 
 
 In which is there rain or snow ? 
 
 In what part of the low-pressure area is rain falling ? 
 
 .. In what part 
 
 snow? 
 
 
 
 Using the scale of miles (printed on the map), measure the distance from east to 
 
 west in which there is precipitation. Measure the diameter of the 
 
 301 
 
area of precipitation along a north-south line. Do the winds blow 
 
 toward or away from the area of high pressure ? 
 
 Do they blow toward or away from the area of low pressure? 
 
 Interpreta- If winds blow from all sides toward a center, what must become of the air as it flows 
 
 tion of the 
 
 weather toward the center ? If the relative humidity 
 
 map. 
 
 of the air is high, what must happen as it rises ? 
 
 Apply this in explanation of the large 
 
 area in which there is precipitation around the Low. •_ 
 
 Where does the air obtain its vapor? 
 
 What bearing has this on the fact that there is a larger area of precipitation on the east and 
 south sides of the Low than on the north and west? 
 
 Why is it warmer on the south and 
 
 east sides of the low-pressure area than on the north and west sides ? 
 
 What bearing has this 
 
 on the distribution of rain and snow in the area of precipitation ? 
 
 302 
 
303 
 
If the winds blow outward from an area of high pressure, where does the air come from ? 
 
 Is air above the earth warmer or colder than 
 
 that at the surface? (Text-book, p. 240.) How does this help to 
 
 explain the temperature within the high-pressure area? 
 
 Air settling from above the surface 
 
 grows warmer; does it then cause clear or cloudy weather ? 
 
 Apply this in explanation of the conditions in the high-pressure area. 
 
 Making a Figure 35 gives data for the weather map at 8 a.m. on the next day to the one just studied, 
 
 weather these data having been obtained by the Weather Bureau observers, as before. On this map 
 
 map for the (j raw { n (&$ on the previous map) the isotherms, isobars, and wind directions ; color in the areas 
 
 next day. Q £ ra - n an( ^ snow . an( j ma rk the areas of high and low pressure. 
 
 Compari- In which direction has the low-pressure area moved in the t wenty -four hours ? 
 
 son of the 
 
 two maps. j n which direction has the high-pressure area moved? 
 
 Mark their courses on Figure 35 by means of 
 
 a colored line (brown). Do the winds still blow in the same way (as in Fig. 34) around the 
 
 high and low pressure areas? Is there still the same relation between pre- 
 cipitation and barometric pressure ? Between 
 
 areas of pressure and temperature? 
 
 • 
 
 By examining and comparing the two maps, state what changes have occurred at Chicago 
 in (a) barometric pressure 
 
 ; (6) wind directions 
 305 
 
; (c) precipitation 
 
 ; (d) temperature. 
 
 Make the same comparison for New York. 
 
 For your own home. 
 
 306 
 
LXVII. — STUDY OF THE WEATHER MAP 
 
 Materials. For Each Student. — A copy of a weather map (any date will do). 
 
 For General Class Use. — Thermometer. Barometer. The daily weather map. 
 
 (The daily weather map will be sent on application from the nearest Weather Bureau 
 . station, and it should be posted in a prominent place.) 
 
 Purpose. To study the local weather changes and note their relation to high and low pressure areas. 
 
 The infor- Each student is given a copy of a weather map. 
 
 mation on 
 
 a weather what do the dotted lines represent ? 
 
 map. 
 
 Where is the coldest weather ? 
 
 The warmest? 
 
 What do the continuous lines 
 
 represent? What do the figures at their 
 
 ends (29.9, 30.2, etc.) indicate ? Where is the 
 
 pressure highest? ; 
 
 Where lowest? 
 
 What word is printed in the anticyclonic area or areas? 
 
 In the cyclonic? What do the arrows represent? 
 
 In what directions are the winds blowing in 
 
 the low-pressure areas? 
 
 In the regions of high pressure ? 
 
 What symbols are used to 
 
 represent clear, partly clear, and cloudy sky? 
 
 307 
 
In which of the areas, the cyclonic or the 
 
 anticyclonic, is there the greatest extent of clear weather? 
 
 Of cloudy weather ? 
 
 In what manner are rain and snow recorded ? 
 
 When, with reference to the high and low 
 
 pressure areas, is there most rain in a given region ? 
 
 When (if at all) is there snow ? 
 
 What symbol is used for thunder storms? 
 
 Do you find any on your map ? If so, where do they occur with reference 
 
 to the pressure conditions? 
 
 What data are printed in the columns in the right-hand half of the bottom of the map ? 
 
 From these columns find out and record the temperature, wind velocity, and precipitation at 
 Washington, D.C. 
 
 At the Weather Bureau 
 
 station nearest your own home. 
 
 308 
 
Head the printed matter on the left-hand part of the bottom half of the weather map. 
 ^| What kinds of information are given there ? .__. 
 
 Study of Observe and make a record of the local weather conditions of this day, as follows : 
 
 the local 
 
 weather. The temperature. The barometric pressure. 
 
 Direction of wind. Velocity of wind (light, strong, etc.) 
 
 Condition of sky (clear, cloudy, or partly cloudy). .__ 
 
 Precipitation (rain, snow, or clear). Is the barometer low or high? 
 
 What relation, if any, do you see between the 
 
 pressure and the cloudiness or precipitation? 
 
 
 
 Is the temperature higher or lower than 
 
 yesterday? Is there any noticeable relation between this change in 
 
 temperature and the pressure and wind direction ? 
 
 Make a prediction, as best you can, 
 
 for to-morrow, — do you expect it to be warmer or colder? 
 
 Rainier or clearer? 
 
 Examine the weather map for to-day. Where is the nearest area of high pressure ? 
 
 Of low pressure? 
 
 In what direction, in each case, from your home ? 
 309 
 
In which direction will they probably move 
 
 by to-morrow ? 
 
 Using the scale of miles printed on the map, and by comparison with yesterday's map, find 
 out how far each has moved since yesterday. 
 
 How many miles an hour is that? 
 
 How far, then, may you expect them to move 
 
 by to-morrow? 
 
 What change in your local weather should these movements of high and low pressure areas 
 bring about by to-morrow ? 
 
 Now examine the predictions made by the Weather Bureau 
 
 and compare them with your own predictions. 
 
 To-morrow examine the weather map to see how 
 nearly the predictions were verified. Record the results. 
 
 310 
 
(This work may be profitably repeated for several successive days, or until the pupil 
 
 thoroughly understands the significance of the weather map and is able, from a rapid study 
 
 ^k of it, to see what it shows as to actual conditions, and the basis upon which predictions are 
 
 ^^ made. Even after the formal laboratory work on weather maps is completed, the student 
 
 should examine the daily weather map, and make his own predictions and^ by examining the 
 
 instruments in the school, note how temperature, wind, and precipitation are related to 
 
 pressure.) 
 
 General From the study of the weather maps, and from the observation of local weather condi- 
 
 conclusions. tions, answer the following questions : In which direction do most of the high and low 
 
 pressure areas move ? 
 
 At about what rate? 
 
 When a Low passes over your home, what changes come (a) in pressure, 
 
 (6) in temperature, 
 
 (c) in wind direction, (d) in wind velocity, 
 
 (e) in cloudiness, 
 
 (/) in precipitation ? Answer the same questions 
 
 for the HiGH-pressure areas. 
 
 _ (a) 
 
 (6) (c) 
 
 (d) (e) 
 
 (/)... 
 
 About how much of the United States do the low-pressure areas cover at any one time ? 
 
 Give their greatest length and width in miles. 
 
 About how far apart are the Lows and Highs ? 
 
 About how often does a Low pass over your home ? 
 
 Are they always equally well developed ? 
 
 311 
 
When is there most rain, when the low-pressure area is well developed or only 
 
 moderately developed ? { 
 
 During what conditions of pressure does your coldest weather come ? 
 
 Your warmest ? 
 
 Explain this in each case. 
 
 Cyclonic storms develop in the belt of prevailing west winds. If these winds should blow 
 
 every day in your locality, would they be dry or rainy winds ? _' 
 
 Cold or warm in winter ? Cool or hot in summer ? 
 
 Of what importance, therefore (assuming that 
 you live in the west-wind belt), are the cyclonic storms to your locality : (a) because of their 
 
 influence on temperature ? 
 
 (6) because of their influence on rainfall ? 
 
 312 
 
• 
 
 Materials. 
 Purpose. 
 
 Study of 
 isothermal 
 chart of 
 the world 
 for July. 
 
 LX VI II.— ISOTHERMAL CHARTS OF THE WORLD 
 
 For Each Student. — Colored pencils. 
 
 To study and interpret isothermal charts of the world for summer, winter, and the year. 
 
 Figure 36 is an isothermal chart of the world for the month of July. With your colored 
 pencils give different colors to the following parts : (a) all over 80° ; (b) from 70° to 80° ; (c) 
 50° to 70° ; (d) 30° to 50° ; (e) all below 30°. 
 
 In what general direction do most of the isotherms extend? 
 In which hemisphere (northern or southern) do they follow this direction 
 
 with greatest regularity ? Explain the 
 
 difference between the isotherms of the northern and southern hemispheres in this respect. 
 
 Does the belt of greatest heat coincide with the equator? Draw a line on the 
 
 map to show the approximate position of the belt of greatest heat. This will be the heat 
 equator for July. Mark it so on the map. Where does it lie with reference to the equator ? 
 
 Are the warmest areas in the northern or 
 
 southern hemisphere? Why 
 
 Are they over the water or over the land ? Why 
 
 Study of 
 
 isothermal Figure 37 is an isothermal chart of the world for the month of January. Color this map 
 
 the world as follows: (a) all over 80°; (b) from 70° to 80°; (c) from 50° to 70°; (d) from 30° to 50°; 
 
 for January, (e) from 0° to 30° ; (/) from - 30° to 0° ; (g) all below - 30°. 
 
 313 
 
Give two reasons why it is so much colder in the northern than in the southern hemisphere 
 in January. 
 
 Where are the lowest temperatures ? 
 
 Why there ? 
 
 Where is it warmest ? 
 
 Why there ? 
 
 Draw in the heat equator on this map. Explain its position. 
 
 Fill out this sentence : 
 
 The heat equator moves in summer, and . in winter. 
 
 Comparison ^ n which hemisphere is there the greatest difference (called range) in temperature between 
 
 of January 
 
 and July January and July ? _ Account for this difference. 
 
 charts. J J 
 
 314 
 
315 
 
31T 
 
• 
 
 How much is the difference, or range, on the Arctic Circle, on the meridian 120° E. Long. ? 
 
 About how much on the Antarctic Circle on 
 
 the same longitude ? 
 
 On each of the charts, follow the 40° parallel of north latitude, and in the table set down 
 the temperatures for the places mentioned. In the lower columns insert the temperature 
 range. 
 
 Month 
 
 Central 
 Japan 
 
 Central Asia 
 Long. 80° E. 
 
 Spain 
 
 Central 
 
 Atlantic 
 
 Long. 40° W. 
 
 East 
 Coast 
 
 U.S. 
 
 Central U.S. 
 Long. 100° W. 
 
 West 
 Coast 
 U.S. 
 
 Central 
 
 Pacific 
 
 Long. 160° W. 
 
 July 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 January 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Range 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Account for the high temperature range in Central Asia. 
 
 In central United States. 
 
 Contrast these temperature ranges with those in the central Atlantic and Pacific oceans. 
 
 How do the temperature ranges on the Atlantic and Pacific coasts of the United States 
 compare ? 
 
 319 
 
How do those of the Atlantic and Pacific coasts of Eurasia compare ? 
 
 Which of the coasts of the United States most nearly resembles eastern Eurasia in tempera- 
 ture range ? , Western Eurasia ? 
 
 How is this to be explained ? 
 
 Study of Figure 38 is an annual isothermal chart of the world ; that is, it represents the average 
 
 isothermal temperature for the entire year. Color this map as follows : (a) all over 80° ; (6) 70° to 80° ; 
 
 woridfor 1 " 5 (c) 50 to 70° ; ((f) 30° to 50° ; (e) 0° to 30° ; (/) below 0°. 
 
 the year ^ n *" ne m ap draw in the heat equator. Why should it lie north of the equator ? 
 
 Trace the isotherm for 50° in the southern hemisphere. What is its direction? 
 
 __._ . Examining the ocean current map (Fig. 22), state why 
 
 this isotherm bends northward on the west coast of South America. 
 
 Trace the isotherm for 
 
 50° in the northern hemisphere. How does it compare in direction with the 50° isotherm in 
 
 the southern hemisphere? 
 
 Account for its northward bend in crossing the Atlantic. 
 
 Account for its southward bend 
 
 320 
 
321 
 
on the east coast of North America. 
 
 Account for its northward bend in central North 
 
 America. : •___ 
 
 Explain the northward bend of isotherms on the west coasts of South America and 
 Africa. 
 
 The northward bend of isotherms between Iceland and Scandinavia. 
 
 _• What countries of west- 
 ern Europe are crossed by the 50° isotherm? . 
 
 Where does this isotherm cross eastern United 
 
 States? 
 
 How do the latitudes of these two places compare ? 
 
 What country of Europe is in the same 
 
 latitude as the part of eastern United States that the 50° isotherm crosses ? 
 
 What isotherm crosses that part of Europe? 
 
 How do you account for these differences 
 
 in temperature between eastern United States and western Europe ? 
 
 323 
 
How do the isotherms of western Europe compare with those of western United States in the 
 same latitude ?■ ._• 
 
 Compara- By examining the isothermal charts for July, January, and the year, state, in general 
 
 tive study terms and a few sentences, what the summer, winter, and annual temperatures are in the 
 of isother- 
 mal charts. 
 
 Torrid Zone. 
 
 In the North Temperate Zone. 
 
 In the South Temperate Zone. 
 
 In the North Frigid Zone. 
 
 In the South Frigid Zone. 
 
 324 
 
Do the boundaries of these zones seem to be regular, and to follow exactly the circles of 
 
 latitude? Where, for instance, do torrid conditions in summer extend into 
 
 the temperate zone? 
 
 Where do Arctic conditions extend in winter into the temperate zone ? 
 
 Which isotherm on the July chart passes nearest your home ? _ 
 Name other places in the northern hemisphere on the same isotherm. 
 
 In the southern hemisphere. 
 
 Answer the same questions for the January chart. 
 
 For the chart of the year. 
 
 325 
 
Materials. 
 Purpose. 
 
 Study of 
 an isobaric 
 chart of 
 the world. 
 
 LXIX. — WINDS OF THE EARTH 
 
 Colored pencils. 
 
 To study the relation between atmospheric pressure and the planetary winds; to note the dis- 
 tribution of these ivinds; and to consider their effects. 
 
 Figure 39 is an isobaric chart of the world for the year. That is, it shows the average 
 atmospheric pressure for all parts of the earth. With the colored pencils color in : (a) all 
 the area which has a pressure of over 30.00 inches ; (b) the areas with pressure between 29.90 
 and 30.00 inches ; (c) the areas between 29.80 and 29.90 inches ; (d) the areas of less than 
 29.80 inches. 
 
 How does the pressure in the equatorial belt compare with the regions immediately to 
 
 the north and south of it? t Which way, then, 
 
 should the winds blow in these regions? 
 
 Make a drawing to show the circulation of the 
 
 air between the Tropic of Cancer and the Tropic of Capricorn. In this drawing you should 
 show four movements of the air: (1) along the surface; (2) a rising; (3) a flowing away 
 at the higher level ; and (4) a settling of the air. 
 
 327 
 
How does this drawing resemble that of the circulation of air in a room heated by a 
 stove (Fig. 31) ? 
 
 The trade winds blow steadily toward the equator from both the south and the north. 
 By means of arrows indicate these winds on the isobaric chart (Fig. 39). To what part of 
 
 the air current in your drawing (Fig. 31) are these winds equivalent? 
 
 The belt of calms is the area where the warm air is rising. Indi- 
 cate its position on both the map and the drawing. The anti-trades are the winds flowing 
 away from the equator, high above the earth's surface. Indicate these on your drawing. 
 The horse latitudes are where the air is settling. Mark the position of the two belts of horse 
 latitudes on both the map and the drawing. In what direction would you expect the winds 
 
 to blow on the poleward side of the belts of high pressure? 
 
 These are the two belts of prevailing westerlies. 
 
 On Figure 39 find several places where the pressure is over 30.10 inches. Which way 
 
 must the air be moving in these areas of high pressure ? 
 
 Find two areas in the .northern hemisphere where the pressure is as low as 29.70 inches. 
 
 How must the winds be blowing in these regions ? 
 
 The wind Figure 40 shows the prevailing winds of the earth in the month of January. You wi*l 
 belts. no te that the wind directions in the regular wind belts do not exactly agree with those you 
 have drawn in Figure 39. The winds have been deflected from true north and south directions 
 by the influence of the earth's rotation. On Figure 40 place the following names in their 
 proper places: northern prevailing westerlies ; southern prevailing westerlies ; belt of north- 
 ern horse latitudes; belt of southern horse latitudes; belt of northeast trades; belt of south- 
 east trades; belt of calms, or doldrums. In which two belts is the air settling? 
 
 • In which 
 
 belt is the air rising? 
 
 On page 314 you learned that the heat equator moves north in summer and south in win- 
 ter. Since the trade winds represent cooler air flowing toward this heated belt, what change 
 
 in their position must occur with the changes in season? j 
 
 328 
 
40° East from 80° Greenwich 120° 
 
 Fig. 39, 
 
 West from 40° Greenwich 0° Longitude 40° East from 80 Greenwich 120 J 
 
 Fig. 40. 
 
 329 
 
Deflection Currents of air and water on the earth are turned by the influence of the earth's rotation 
 
 of winds by toward the right in the northern hemisphere, and toward the left in the southern hemisphere 
 
 the earth's (Text-book, p. 258); that is, if you stand so that a current strikes your back, the current will 
 
 be deflected towards your right in the northern hemisphere. Apply this to explain why the 
 
 trade winds blow from the northeast and southeast, instead of from due north and south. 
 
 What compass direction does the influence of rotation cause winds to have in the northern 
 
 hemisphere when blowing from the south? 
 
 What direction in the southern hemisphere when blowing from the north ? 
 
 How does this apply in explaining the direction of the pre- 
 vailing westerlies? 
 
 Winds in What is the direction of the winds in Eurasia : (a) in the northern part ? 
 
 areas of low 
 
 and high 
 
 pressure. > (&) m the eastern part ? 
 
 (c) in the southern part? Why should winter 
 
 winds blow outward from the cold interior of a continent? 
 
 __1 On the map of the isobars (Fig. 39) 
 
 there are three areas of high pressure over the ocean in the southern horse latitude belt, and 
 two in the northern horse latitude belt. Locate these five areas on Figure 40 and state how 
 
 the winds blow in such areas. 
 
 # 
 
 Locate the two areas of low pressure (in the North Atlantic 
 
 and North Pacific) and state how the winds blow there. 
 
 331 
 
Winds on Is the temperature of water more or less uniform than that of land? 
 
 water and 
 
 land- Differences in temperature give rise to differences in air pressure, 
 
 and these to winds. Where, then, should the winds have a more regular direction, on land or 
 
 on water? Examine the map to see if the 
 
 trade winds have a more constant direction on land or on water. 
 
 How about the belt of northern prevailing westerlies ? 
 
 The southern belt 
 
 of prevailing westerlies ? 
 
 Why do the latter winds blow more regularly than those of the 
 
 northern hemisphere ? 
 
 Windward 
 and lee- 
 ward 
 coasts. 
 
 On which coasts (east-facing or west-facing) do the trade winds blow from the sea? 
 
 On which from the land? 
 
 On which coasts do the prevailing westerlies blow from the 
 
 sea? What effect must this have on the 
 
 temperature of the land that they reach ? 
 
 land? 
 
 temperature of these coasts in summer ? 
 
 On which coasts do the westerlies blow from the 
 .__ What effect must this have on the 
 
 332 
 
In winter ? 
 
 Which of the coasts (east or west) 
 
 in the westerly belts must therefore have the more equable climate? 
 
 333 
 
♦ 
 
 LXX.— RAINFALL OF THE UNITED STATES 
 
 Materials. For Each Student. — Colored pencils. Ruler. 
 
 For General Class Use. — A rain gauge. (A tinsmith can make a fairly satisfactory rain 
 gauge. See Text-book, p. 424.) 
 
 Purpose. To study the distribution of rainfall in the United States, and to discover the reasons for the 
 
 differences in amount. 
 
 Observing For two weeks keep a record of the amount of rainfall, measuring it after each rain. 
 
 amount of Measure the depth of the water in the tube with a ruler, remembering that this depth is ten 
 
 rainfall. times the actual rainfall. Why is it advisable to so construct the rain guage that the rain 
 
 from an area of ten square inches is collected instead of from only one square inch? 
 
 • 
 
 What is meant when one says " an inch of rain has fallen " ? 
 
 Is an inch of rain a light or 
 
 heavy rainfall? What is meant by saying 
 
 "the annual rainfall is 100 inches"? . 
 
 1 What is the rainfall of your own region (Fig. 41)? 
 
 Has a region with 100 inches of rainfall a 
 
 dry or a rainy climate? !_._ 
 
 Fill the cylinder of the rain gauge with snow to a depth of ten inches (but do not pack 
 it tightly), and allow the snow to melt. How much water gathers in the bottom of- the 
 
 cylinder? What do you conclude therefore as to the amount of 
 
 snow that represents an inch of rain? 
 
 335 
 
Rainfall of On the map of the United States (Fig. 41) the lines indicate the amount of rainfall in 
 
 the United i nc hes. Color in (with green pencil) the areas with a rainfall of over 60 inches. In what 
 States. 
 
 two parts of the country is there the heaviest rainfall ? 
 
 By examining the map showing the 
 winds of the earth (Fig. 40) account for these two areas of heavy precipitation. 
 
 Color in (with blue pencil) the areas with a rainfall of be- 
 tween 50 and 60 inches. A rainfall of 50 inches or more is heavier rainfall than is common. 
 
 What parts of our country have such a condition of rainfall ? 
 
 Color in (with brown pencil) those sections with a rainfall of less than 10 inches. Such 
 a rainfall is altogether too little for agriculture, and deserts commonly exist where there is 
 such light rainfall. What states and parts of states, therefore, have a desert condition of 
 
 rainfall ? 
 
 In which of the wind belts are these desert regions located ? 
 
 What explanation can you give 
 
 for these desert conditions ? 
 
 336 
 
337 
 
f 
 
 I 
 
t 
 
 ♦ 
 
 Color in (with yellow pencil) the sections with a rainfall of from 10 to 20 inches. In 
 general, a rainfall of less than 20 inches is too little for agriculture ; and the country included 
 in the belt with rainfall between 10 and 20 inches may be called the arid country. What 
 
 states, or parts of states, are included in this arid belt? 
 
 What explanation can you offer 
 
 for the fact that the arid lands are mainly in the interior of the country ? 
 
 In the arid belt 
 
 you will note on the map that there are small areas with a heavier rainfall. What is the 
 
 explanation of these? 
 
 Why is there such an abrupt change from heavy rainfall in western 
 
 Washington to light rainfall in eastern Washington ? 
 
 Fill out the following sentence: On 
 
 the windward side of mountains the rainfall is ; on the leeward side 
 
 the rainfall is 
 
 Why is evaporation greater in the southern than in the northern part of the arid belt ? 
 
 339 
 
How does this help to explain the fact that in some parts of the north, as in eastern Washington 
 and eastern Dakota, there is extensive wheat raising, although the rainfall is less than 20 
 
 inches ? 
 
 Color in (with red pencil, in parallel ruled lines) the areas with a rainfall of from 20 to 30 
 inches. What states are partly included in this belt ? 
 
 Account for the fact that in Texas 
 
 the western portion of this area has too little rainfall for agriculture. 
 
 Color in (with blue 
 
 ruling) the areas with a rainfall between 30 and 40 inches ; and the areas (with green ruling) 
 between 40 and 50 inches. About what proportion of the United States has rainfall enough 
 
 for agriculture (20 inches or over)? ' In what 
 
 parts of the country is this condition general ? 
 
 for agriculture in the arid and desert sections ? 
 
 What means are adopted to supply moisture 
 
 State how the rainfall varies from the mouth of the Mississippi to northern Minnesota. 
 
 340 
 
From Virginia to southern California. 
 
 # 
 
 From the coast of Washington to the coast of Maine. 
 
 Following along several lines from the coast to the interior, what do you discover as to the 
 
 general change in amount of rainfall? Fill 
 
 out the following sentence: In general, the amount of rainfall from 
 
 coast to interior. Account for this fact. 
 
 341 
 
t 
 
* 
 
 LXXI. — RAINFALL OF THE EARTH 
 
 Materials For Each Student. — Colored pencils. 
 
 Purpose. To study and understand the cause for the distribution of rainfall over the earth. 
 
 Belts of Figure 42 is a blank map of the world with the rainfall of the continents indicated by a 
 
 heavy rain- series of lines. By reference to the Text-book (Fig. 444), secure data for filling in, with the 
 fall. green pencil, the areas which have heavy rainfall. In which zone do most of these areas lie ? 
 
 By examining the map of winds of the earth 
 
 (Fig. 40), determine in which of the wind belts the largest areas of heavy rainfall lie? 
 
 How do you account for this fact ? 
 
 There is heavy rainfall 
 
 also in some small sections of the temperate zones. On which coasts of the continents are these 
 
 located? In what wind belts ? 
 
 Account for these areas of heavy rainfall. 
 
 Desert Color in (with brown pencil) the areas which have desert conditions. In which zones are 
 
 areas. 
 
 these located? !__ 
 
 Why should there be arid conditions in the horse latitude belts ? 
 
 343 
 
Which 
 
 coasts (east or west facing) have desert conditions in the trade wind belts ? _"" 
 
 Why is there heavy rainfall on the opposite coasts in these 
 belts? •_.. 
 
 Till in this sentence : Windward coasts in the trade wind belts have 
 
 rainfall; leeward coasts have rainfall. Cuba and Porto Rico lie in 
 
 the path of the northeast trade winds. What must be the condition of rainfall on the north- 
 
 east side? On the southwest side ? 
 
 Account for the arid regions in the west wind belts of North America and South America. 
 
 Which continents have the largest area of desert land ? 
 
 How do you account for this in each 
 
 case? 
 
 Regions of Color in (with yellow pencil) the regions of light rainfall. What portions of the 
 light rain- 
 fall, northern continents are included? 
 
 Why should there be less rainfall in the cold north than 
 
 in the warm south? 
 
 344 
 
a 
 
 345 
 
t 
 
 t 
 
9 
 
 Why are regions of light rainfall extensive in the continent interiors f 
 
 Would these regions of light rainfall be better suited for grazing or for agriculture ? 
 Why would this be less true in the cool north ? 
 
 As the belt of calms shifts northward in summer and southward in winter, how would 
 the rainfall vary with the season in that part of Africa that lies south of the Desert of 
 
 Sahara ? (Text-book, p. 283.) 
 
 How would the rainfall vary with the season in the southern 
 part of Africa? 
 
 At what season would agriculture be possible in each of these two regions ? 
 
 Why are these regions (the savannas) grass 
 lands and not forest-covered lands ? 
 
 Regions of Color in the remainder of the map (with blue pencil) to show the areas of moderate rain- 
 moderate 
 rainfall. f a |] What parts of North America are included ? 
 
 347 
 
Of Eurasia? 
 
 Europe, eastern United 
 
 States, and southeastern Asia are the most densely settled parts of the earth. What is the 
 
 condition of rainfall in each of these sections ? 
 
 Why are desert countries sparsely 
 
 settled? 
 
 Why are the warm regions of heavy rainfall also unsuited to dense settlement ? 
 
 What reasons can you give for the fact that the most densely settled parts of the earth are 
 mainly located in those parts of the temperate zone in which there is moderate rainfall ? 
 
 Compar- How does North America compare with other continents in amount of desert ? 
 
 ison of 
 
 North 
 
 America 
 
 with other 
 
 continents. 
 
 348 
 
In extent of country having heavy rainfall ? 
 
 In extent of country having moderate rainfall ? 
 
 In which of these respects is North America favored as compared with other continents ? 
 
 Write a brief statement as to the advantages that North America has as to rainfall and 
 temperature as compared with (a) Eurasia; (6) South America; (c) Africa; (d) Australia- 
 
 349 
 
c 
 
LXXIL — LIFE ZONES ON THE EARTH 
 
 Purpose. To understand the relation between climate and the plant zones of the earth; and the chief 
 
 reasons for the distribution of animal life on the earth. 
 
 Fig. 43. — Zones of Plant Life in the United States as influenced by Temperature. 
 
 Plant zones Figure 43 shows the different zones of plant life in the United States as influenced by 
 
 of the the temperature. In what three sections of the country are tropical conditions found ? 
 
 United J r 
 
 States. 
 
 Explain the presence of tropical conditions in each of these three places. 
 
 J 
 
 351 
 
^ V 
 
 
 B 
 
 I 
 
 "2 
 
 TT' 
 
 
 352 
 
Where are cold north-temperate conditions found? 
 
 f Explain the presence of cold climate plants so far to the south in western United States. 
 
 In what portions of the country are warm temperate plants found? 
 
 Cool temperate plants ? 
 
 Distribu- Trace the northern limit of trees (Fig. 44). Why cannot trees grow north of this line ? 
 tion of 
 
 P lantsin . To the north of the tree line is the tundra 
 
 e wor ' region. What countries of Eurasia and North America are partly within the tundra belt ? 
 
 Why is there so little tundra in the southern hemisphere ? 
 
 Trace the northern and southern limits of palms. What kind of climate do they require ? 
 
 What countries of Europe and North America 
 
 are included in the belt of palms? 
 
 Why does the limit of palms extend so much farther 
 
 north in Europe than in America? 
 
 What two continents are almost wholly in the belt of palm growth ? 
 
 In which continents are the tropical forests most extensive ? 
 
 353 
 
In what wind belts (Fig. 40)? 
 
 What are the temperature and rainfall conditions in the tropical forest belt ? 
 
 Make a list of the tropical trees of which you know the names. 
 
 Through what countries does 
 
 the belt of m ost extensive forest in the temperate zone extend ? 
 
 What are the temperature 
 
 and rainfall conditions there? 
 
 Make a list of some trees that grow in the cool temperate 
 forest. 
 
 In which, fhe temperate or tropical forest belt, does vegetation grow most luxuriantly? 
 
 Through which of these forest belts would it 
 
 be more difficult for an explorer to pass ? 
 
 Why should so much forest be left in the more 
 northerly countries, while it has been stripped off in the regions immediately to the south ? 
 
 Explain the long, narrow strips of forest in the belt south of the northern forests. 
 
 9 
 
 9 
 
 354 
 
3 
 
 ft 
 
 In what zones are the principal agricultural belts located ? 
 
 What leading countries in 
 
 the northern hemisphere are included? 
 
 What countries in the southern hemisphere ? 
 
 What are the rainfall conditions in these belts ? 
 
 .. If the land were not needed for agricul- 
 
 ture, would forests grow in these belts? Trace the northern limit of 
 
 grain. What countries of the northern hemisphere are partly to the north of this line ? 
 
 What countries of the southern hemisphere extend beyond the limit of grain growth ? 
 
 In which hemisphere, northern or southern, is most agricultural land found in the temperate 
 
 zone? 
 
 Locate the chief deserts and tell in which part of each continent they are found. 
 
 Which continent has most desert? Which 
 
 continent least? How does North America 
 
 rank in amount of desert? 
 
 Why will forests not grow in deserts ? .. 
 355 
 
In what zones are the largest deserts located? 
 
 In what rainfall 
 
 belts? 
 
 Where are the principal grazing lands located ? 
 
 What are the rainfall conditions in 
 
 such regions ? W T hy are the savannas of the 
 
 torrid zone arid in one season ? 
 
 Why are there great areas of grazing land in the interiors 
 
 of continents ? 
 
 Why do forests not grow in these regions ? 
 
 Are the grazing lands sparsely 
 
 or densely settled? How must they com- 
 pare with the agricultural lands in respect to density of population? 
 
 With the deserts? 
 
 Why are the tropical forests not densely settled ? 
 
 Distribu- Figure 45 shows the three realms of animal life, and some of the main subdivisions. In 
 
 tion of each f these divisions the animals differ very much. From this map, what should vou iudee 
 
 animal life. r j j t> 
 
 was the chief barrier to the spread of types of animals that live on the land ? 
 
 356 
 
} 
 
 ANTARCTIC CIRCLE 
 
 100° Longitude WeBt 60" from Greenwich 20 s 
 
 20° Longitude East 60° from Greenwich 100° 
 
 Fig. 45. — Map showing Three Realms of Animal Life and Main Subdivisions. 
 
 Do deserts also serve as a barrier? 
 
 mountain ranges ? Do differences in temperature ? 
 
 Why should South American animals differ so greatly from those of Africa ? 
 
 Do 
 
 What bar- 
 rier would serve to check the spread of life to Australia ? 
 
 What barrier partly cuts off the Oriental Region from the Northern Realm ? 
 
 What barrier tends to prevent the spread of 
 
 animal life from the Northern Realm into the Ethiopian Region? 
 
 Is such a barrier as effective as that between Africa and South America? 
 
 357 
 
How may differences in climate help to account for the failure of 
 
 animals of North and South America to migrate more freely ? 
 
 What one condition affecting animal life is practically the same throughout the extensive 
 Northern Realm ? 
 
 How can you explain the fact that the animal life throughout this great 
 
 realm is so nearly alike? 
 
 What would be the effect of former greater elevations partly or 
 
 wholly closing up the water areas between the continents ? 
 
 Australian animals are wholly 
 
 different from those of southern Asia. What does this fact indicate as to the probability of 
 
 former connection between these two lands ? 
 
 # 
 
 t 
 
 358 
 
J 
 
 LXXIII. — MAGNETISM 
 
 Materials. For Each Student. — Two small needles. 
 
 For General Class Use. — Several small bar magnets (preferably one for each student). One or 
 more magnetic compasses. 
 
 Purpose. To study the properties of a magnet, the magnetism of the earth, and the use of a compass. 
 
 The attrac- Let each student take one of the magnets and place it near his needle. What happens? 
 
 tion of a 
 
 magnet ' Place one end of the magnet near the needle 
 
 point. Now place the other end near the needle point. Repeat this at the other end of the 
 
 needle. What happens in each case ? 
 
 Try the magnet on objects other than iron (such as 
 
 glass, a penny, a nickel, a dime, etc.) What is the result? 
 
 What can you say about the 
 
 attraction of the magnet ? 
 
 Complete this sentence : There is some force in the _ _ 
 
 which draws the to it. Of what metal is the needle made ? 
 
 Does the magnet attract other iron objects (such as a knife, nails, etc.)? 
 
 Magnetiz- Rub one of the needles over the magnet several times. Place this needle near the other one. 
 inga 
 
 needle. What happens? . 
 
 Now place one end of the magnet near the point of the needle 
 
 that you have rubbed on the magnet. What happens ? 
 
 Try the other end of the magnet. What happens? 
 
 359 
 
Go through the same procedure with the eye of the needle. What is the difference in the be- 
 havior of this needle as compared to the one that was not rubbed on the magnet ? _ 
 
 The two ends of the magnet are called its poles. Since the needle is now a magnet, what may 
 
 its two ends be called ? Like poles of a magnet repel each other ; 
 
 and unlike poles attract each other. From this principle determine the like poles in the mag- 
 net and the needle. Find which end of the magnet will repel the north end of the needle in 
 
 the compass. 
 
 Suggestion Take the magnetized needle home. Cut off a thin slice from a small cork and thrust the needle through 
 
 for home the thin edge and parallel to the flat surface. Place this in a dish of water and the cork will float the needle, 
 work. 
 
 Which way does the needle point. 
 
 Change its position 
 
 and note if it returns to the same position as before ? Repeat this experiment 
 
 several times. If you could get the same result in all parts of the world, what useful purpose would such a 
 
 floating needle serve ? 
 
 The com- 
 pass. 
 
 How can you prove that the needle of the compass is not an ordinary piece of steel ? 
 
 Does it behave like the ordinary needle, or the magnetized needle, when the different poles of 
 the magnet are brought up to it ? 
 
 Earth's 
 magnetism. 
 
 What does this prove 
 
 In what directions do the two ends of the needle of the compass point? 
 
 What makes the needle always come to rest in that position ? 
 
 On a large globe or a map of North America find Boothia Land where the north magnetic pole is 
 
 situated. What is its location with reference to the north pole of the earth ? 
 
 360 
 
O 
 
 In which of your previous experiments have you determined the 
 
 true north-south line ? Does the compass 
 
 needle point toward the north pole or the north magnetic pole? 
 
 What is the meaning of "true north " ? 
 
 Of "magnetic north"? 
 
 With the compass find how many degrees difference there is between true and magnetic north 
 
 in your locality. .. 
 
 Isogonic Figure 560 in the Text-book is an Isogonic Map. What does it illustrate ? 
 
 map. 
 
 Find the 
 
 isogonic line that runs nearest your home and draw it on the map (Fig. 46). How much is the 
 
 declination? Is it east or west declination? 
 
 Knowing the declination, what correction to a compass reading 
 
 would you have to make to get true north ? 
 
 2 Draw on the map the isogonic line that runs 
 
 nearest New York City. What is the amount and direction of the declination there ? 
 
 Do the same for Columbia, S.C. 
 
 For Augusta, Me. 
 
 For San Francisco. In what part of 
 
 the United States is there greatest east declination ? 
 
 Greatest west declination ? 
 
 Use of the Of what use is the compass ? 
 
 compass. 
 
 361 
 
Fig. 46. — Blank Chart fob drawing Isogonic Links. 
 Why is it more useful to sailors than to any other class 
 
 of men ? 
 
 What is the significance of the fact that the use of the compass was discovered just before the 
 time of Columbus ? 
 
 362 
 

 
 ■ 
 
 _L ... .. • 
 
 — : 1 
 
 J[ _ H - 
 
 ^n 
 
 
 
 
 
 ., 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 - ■ * ... .... 
 
 ; 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 - — 1 — 
 
 _ ; — _ _ , , — _ _ - 
 
 1 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 * 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - .' ■ ....... ',. . ......... 
 
 1 , 1 __ 1 
 
 
 
 
 » . ! L— , _ _- 
 
 ' '"' 
 
 1 
 
 , , , . 
 
 
 , 
 
 
 *^fc. 
 
 A 
 
 ■ < ap' . 
 
 v 
 
 — — . _..- 1 . _ _ ,_ .. 
 
 i— -i 1 — 1 — 1 . 1 — l -J LJ -t— — ■ . — i — i — — 
 

 "■ - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *k, 
 
 
 ot 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 jr 
 
 
 w ! 
 
 j I ■■ I ■ I 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
t 
 

 
 
 
 4— J— __ 
 
 _ 
 
 iE 
 
 
 >J 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ; . . 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 , , : — , — , , 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . . . . . _. ... .. — _ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 j| 
 
 
 
 
 
 *~~ ~x 
 
 
 , . j __ . 1 rj-\ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ! 
 
: H 1 :- - 
 
 
 II 1 1 1 ' 
 
 (Jr=~--i:ii=-=-"i2 ::ii-iiii: :z===z~= 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ■■ ■ ■ 
 
 w ■ ' 
 
 - . — ■ ■ ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 ____ — 1_ , i — — — i , 1 — | — — | — | 1 — . . i — , , , ►— — — i • — — 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 . . 1 — t . ^- 
 
 — ■ ■ '■- ■ ■ 
 
 1 1 1 , , 
 
 
 
 
 
 — — — — : ■ ■ ■■ 
 
 
 ^r 
 
 _.„ ^ i T ,4..,,,., , ........ . 
 
 ■ 
 
 . ■ 
 
 
 |p:::::::::::::::::::±::::+:::::::::::::::::::::::: 
 
 ^ 
 
 • 
 
 
 

 
 : 1 1— r— — 1- 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 dfc- 
 
 
 yj— T - 
 
 
 
 
 • : 
 
 it 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . , , — . : — — 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 • ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 , 
 
 
 L_ _ ■ . 
 
 — 1 — — i — _| — 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • "i " ~ 
 
 1 J ; 1 1 
 
 ^T^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
f 
 
■"■■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 d 1 ' 
 
 
 T^ / 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 /A 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
— — TTT"I 1 — '-'■■" ' T-l 
 
 ■ 
 
 — - — ' 
 
 , : 1 ■ — 
 
 /% 4 „ 
 
 Qz 
 
 
 ■ ^ . , ; f 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r ~" 
 
 
 
 
 
 . — , 1 , — . . . — , , __ — __ — _ ___ 
 
 
 
 
 
 . : — — 
 
 . . 1 — — L-J • — f— 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 _L 
 
 ~J~ . ""' "' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 1 1 —1— — 1 j 1— 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 a a 
 
 ■ + _ 
 
 
 
 
 
■■■■■ - 1 H+ M4-H-- 
 
 1 ' 
 
 Li_ 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 rt)k 
 
 
 QL 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ak 
 
 
 fli_ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 — > — ' j — ^ i — 
 
 
■ 1 1 
 
 | 1 1 | 1 1 | | 1 ! II . . -' . " 
 
 
 
 
 
 . I _m_ 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 m iL Mill 
 
 
 (J~ 
 
 
 ^■F 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 _. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 
 . _^_ | ^_ 
 
 
 i 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 ! 
 
 
 
 '"It" I " i r~ "i i — J" " i '"" '™ 
 
 1 1 l 1 i 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 «Hfcr 
 
 1 
 
 Mr- it IE ^T-T 
 
 it It It it-.-lt 
 
 41 -i" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • *~ ni ■ . 
 
 
 
t 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 X 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 JJ_. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 % 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■"■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
t 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 \ i i 
 
 
 v 
 
 
 - • TS' — — -....;-.. 
 
 
 
 
 
 ,' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 — 1 — 
 
 _ — __ — __ . 1 . — U — _ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 
 T 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
t 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 "\ -4- 
 
 |+ _ _+_ _^ 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ~ ■ *~ .-..-..- — _«—..,,. - - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
t 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i i 
 
 
 kJ „ 
 
 
 "9 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C\- 
 
 
 <J 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
— : 1 i 1 ■" _' u 
 
 ■ * 
 
 
 
 
 
 i - - 
 
 H--~ 
 
 
 
 .' 
 
 
 
 _. 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 "^J 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^v 
 
 
 -X it 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ~% 
 
 
 sj' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "■"" ■ ; 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
t 
 

 ] 1 HP _ 
 
 
 J 1 ! 1 1_ — L 
 
 
 
 
 
 ~s 
 
 
 ^i 
 
 
 -^ s 
 
 
 — 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 
 L_ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
BOOKS BY RALPH S. TARR 
 
 Professor of Dynamic Geology and Physical Geography at Cornell University 
 
 New Physical Geography 
 
 Fully illustrated, cloth, l2mo, $1.00 net 
 
 " I like the spirit and tone of this work more than anything else I have seen on the subject. 
 The presentation especially of erosion, land formation, glacial action and effect is especially 
 clear, and with the aid of the admirable pictures and diagrams becomes truly fascinating. 
 The topical questions and ample references at the end of each chapter make it a very usable 
 book." — H. E. Bennett, State Normal School, De Funiak Springs, Florida. 
 
 First Book of Physical Geography 
 
 • , Illustrated, cloth, l2mo, $1.10 net 
 
 "This is, in every case, the new physical geography, skillfully and attractively presented. It 
 is a thoroughly scientific work, and yet its treatment is so elementary that it may be used 
 profitably in the ninth grade of the grammar school. The book is packed with information 
 needed by every grammar school pupil, but what signifies vastly more, the pupils get this 
 information in a way that gives thorough discipline in observation, careful reading, dis- 
 criminating thinking." — Journal of Education. 
 
 Elementary Physical Geography 
 
 Illustrated, i2mo, half leather, $1.40 net 
 
 This book is designed specially for classes in the latter part of the high school course.' 
 The material has been carefully selected so as to weed out the superfluous and less important, 
 and care has been taken to insure scientific accuracy. The illustrations are a prominent 
 feature of the book. 
 
 The Physical Geography of New York State 
 
 Illustrated, cloth, 8vo, $3.50 net 
 
 Summary of Contents 
 
 General Physiographic Features — The Mountains of the State — Plains and Plateaus — The 
 Influence of the Glacial Period upon Topography — The Rivers of New York — Lakes and 
 Swamps — Origin of the Basins of the Great Lakes — Post-glacial History of the Great Lakes 
 — Niagara — The Shore Lines — The Climate of New York — Influence of Physiographic 
 Features upon the Industrial Developments of the State. 
 
 Teachers are invited to send for a full list of the series 
 of geographies by Tarr and McMurry. 
 
 PUBLISHED BY 
 
 THE MACMILLAN COMPANY 
 
 64-66 Fifth Avenue, New York 
 
Books for Supplementary Reading in Geography 
 
 How We are Fed: A Geographical Reader 
 By JAMES FRANKLIN CHAMBERLAIN 
 
 Department of Geography, State Normal School, Los Angeles, Cal. 
 
 Illustrated, cloth, I2mo, $.40 net 
 Here the pupil is given a clear idea of those great world activities which touch the daily life 
 of every member of society. The study begins with the commodities in constant use and 
 finally encompasses the whole world, but always with the home as the base of operations. 
 This treatment creates a knowledge of the interdependence of individuals, communities, and 
 nations, and a genuine respect for the work of the hands and for the worker. Suggestive 
 questions are provided, while the illustrations have been very carefully selected for their 
 teaching value. 
 
 How We are Clothed: A Geographical Reader 
 By JAMES FRANKLIN CHAMBERLAIN 
 
 Illustrated, cloth, !2mo, $.40 net 
 Similar in scope and treatment to How We are Fed. The chief materials and processes 
 used in the production of clothing are treated in a simple and interesting manner. Pro- 
 ceeding from the pupil's immediate surroundings, in tracing commodities back to their 
 origin and in following the raw product through the various stages in its development, 
 journeys are made to distant lands, always with a definite purpose in view. By constant 
 suggestion the pupil is taught to discover many things for himself. The illustrations are a 
 valuable feature of the book, 
 
 How We are Sheltered: A Geographical Reader 
 By JAMES FRANKLIN CHAMBERLAIN 
 
 Cloth, l2tno, $.40 net 
 An intelligent study of the homes of men in various nations and of every degree of advance- 
 ment in intelligence and civilization. Further than this the reader will find much of interest 
 in regard to the building materials used in different countries and the origin and preparation 
 of many things which contribute to make the homes of mankind comfortable and livable. 
 
 Peeps at Many Lands 
 
 Little Travel Books for Little Readers 
 
 Each volume illustrated with colored plates. Decorated cloth covers. Price $.75 net 
 
 The volumes in this series are not designed as lesson books, though much may be learned 
 from them, but are intended to give children a glimpse at the scenes, peoples, and 
 characteristics of foreign countries. The series includes Burma, Egypt, England, France, 
 Holland, Holy Land, Iceland, India, Italy, Japan, Morocco, Scotland, Siam, South Africa, 
 South Seas, Switzerland, and Canada. New books are being added continually. 
 
 PUBLISHED .BY 
 
 THE MACMILLAN COMPANY 
 
 64-66 Fifth Avenue, New York 
 
 k* 
 
Books for Supplementary Reading in Geography — Continued 
 
 The Great World's Farm 
 
 SOME ACCOUNT OF NATURE'S CROPS AND HOW THEY ARE SOWN 
 
 By SELINA GAYE 
 
 Library Edition, illustrated, cloth, i2mo, $1.00 net. Standard School Library Edition $.50 net 
 
 A very readable account of plants and how they live and grow. It is as free as possible 
 from technicalities and well adapted to young people. 
 
 Short Studies in Nature Knowledge 
 
 AN INTRODUCTION TO THE SCIENCE OF PHYSIOGRAPHY 
 
 BY WILLIAM GEE Illustrated, cloth, i2mo,$i.io net 
 
 A Brief Synopsis 
 
 The Great Globe Itself — Mountains, Valleys, and Great Plains — Scenery and Its Causes — 
 The Sea — Rivers and Their Work — Lakes and Their Lessons — Wells and Springs — The 
 Air — The Winds of Heaven — Frost — r Fires — Showers and Dew. 
 
 The Story of the Hills 
 
 A BOOK ABOUT MOUNTAINS FOR GENERAL READERS 
 
 By REV. H. W. HUTCHINSON 
 
 Library Edition, illustrated, cloth, I2mo, $1.50. Standard School Library Edition $.50 net 
 
 "A clear account of the geological formation of mountains and their various methods of 
 origin in language so clear and untechnical that it will not confuse even the most 
 unscientific." — Boston Transcript. 
 
 The Scenery of England 
 
 AND THE CAUSES TO WHICH IT IS DUE 
 
 By THE RIGHT HON. LORD AVEBURY 
 
 Illustrated, cloth, 8vo, $2.50 net 
 A Brief Synopsis 
 
 Geology — The Quaternary Period — General Configuration — The Coast — The Origin of 
 Mountains — Volcanoes — Our English Mountains and Hills — The History of a River — 
 Rivers — The Courses of English Rivers — Lakes — Of the Influence of the Rocks upon 
 Scenery — Downs, Wolds, Fens, Moors, Commons — Law, Custom, and Scenery — On Local 
 Divisions and Sites of Towns — Conclusion. 
 
 The Scenery of Switzerland 
 
 AND THE CAUSES TO WHICH IT IS DUE 
 
 By THE RIGHT HON. LORD AVEBURY 
 
 Illustrated, cloth, i2mo, $1.50 net 
 A Brief Synopsis 
 
 The Geology of Switzerland — The Origin of Mountains — The Mountains of Switzerland — 
 Ice and Snow — The Former Extension of Glaciers — Valleys — Action of Rivers — Direc- 
 tions of Rivers — Lakes — The Influence of the Strata upon Scenery — The Jura — The 
 Central Plain — The Outer Alps — The Central Massives — The Lake of Geneva — The 
 Massif of Mt. Blanc — The Valais — The Bernese Oberland — The Upper Aar — Zurick and 
 Glarus — The Rhine — The Reuss — The Ticino — The Engadine — General Summary. 
 
 J 
 
 PUBLISHED BY 
 
 THE MACMILLAN COMPANY 
 
 64-66 Fifth Avenue. New York 
 
BOOKS BY CHARLES A. McMURRY 
 
 Excursions and Lessons in Home Geography 
 
 Cloth, l2mo, $.50 net 
 
 The material provided in this book constitutes the introductory lessons in geography for the 
 third and fourth grades. It is the geography of the home and the neighborhood. The 
 illustrations are taken from many different localities and are typical of various parts of 
 the country. 
 
 Type Studies from the Geography of the United States 
 
 Cloth, l2mo, $.50 net 
 
 Type Studies is designed to illustrate in some detail the second stage of geography study, 
 following Excursions and Lessons. The purpose of the simple type studies given is to 
 introduce children to the geography of our own country. This volume also is appropriately 
 illustrated. 
 
 Larger Types of American Geography 
 
 Cloth, I2mo, $.75 net 
 
 The six large units worked out with some fullness of detail in this volume furnish the broad 
 and comprehensive framework within which to combine and arrange the lesser topics 
 previously studied. It is the purpose of the present book to organize these earlier studies 
 into more comprehensive units and at the same time to bring into view the few commanding 
 types which give a good survey of American geography as a whole. Physiography and 
 industrial topics are both strongly represented in the types selected. 
 
 Special Method in Geography 
 
 Cloth, l2mo, $.70 net 
 
 Special Method in Geography covers the whole course of geographical study from the third 
 through the eighth grade. The characteristic points to be noted throughout this volume are : 
 The gradual movement from the home outward ; the strong concentration of study, first upon 
 North America and second upon Europe, and the selection of types as centers for the 
 organization of materials. 
 
 Teachers are invited to send for a circular containing full list and 
 descriptive matter of Dr. McMurry's books on method. 
 
 PUBLISHED BY 
 
 THE MACMILLAN COMPANY 
 
 64-66 Fifth Avenue, New York 
 
THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE 
 STAMPED BELOW 
 
 AN INITIAL FINE OF 25 CENTS 
 
 WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN 
 THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY 
 WILL INCREASE TO SO CENTS ON THE FOURTH 
 DAY AND TO $1.00 ON THE SEVENTH DAY 
 OVERDUE. 
 
 
 
 
 
 JAJV 31 1 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 ) 
 
 24Jan54jf|tf 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *M/U6Jyo4 i 
 
 
 LIBRARY USE 
 
 
 AUG 1 4 1958 
 
 
 
 
 e>rr»ft ? D 
 
 
 nun t A 4Qfift 
 
 
 
 
 -3AW«v'RC Jjft_ 
 
 
 writ'fjjjO 
 
 
 
 
 
 LD 21-95m-7,'37 
 
 to 
 

 201630 
 
 V 
 
 v:-;.